Nortel Networks Switch 40M2420 User Manual

Alteon OSTM  
Command Reference  
Layer 2/3 GbE Switch Module for IBM BladeCenter®  
Version 1.3  
Part Number: 40M2420, April 2007  
2350 Mission College Blvd.  
Suite 600  
Santa Clara, CA 95054  
www.bladenetwork.net  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Re-Mark Menu 213  
Re-Marking In-Profile Menu 214  
Update User Priority Menu 215  
Re-Marking Out-of-Profile Menu 216  
Layer 2 Configuration 217  
40M2420, April 2007  
Contents 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Routing Map Configuration 262  
IP Access List Configuration 264  
Autonomous System Filter Path 265  
Routing Information Protocol Configuration 266  
Routing Information Protocol Interface Configuration 267  
8 Contents  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ethernet Filtering Configuration 312  
IP version 4 Filtering Configuration 313  
TCP/UDP Filtering Configuration 314  
Packet Format Filtering Configuration 315  
ACL Block Menu 316  
40M2420, April 2007  
Contents 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Uuencode Flash Dump 349  
Clearing Dump Information 350  
Loading a new switch image 369  
Saving the switch configuration 370  
Saving a switch dump 371  
Glossary 373  
Index 1  
40M2420, April 2007  
Contents 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
12 Contents  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface  
The Alteon OS Command Reference describes how to configure and use the Alteon OS  
software with your Layer 2/3 GbE Switch Module.  
For documentation on installing the switches physically, see the Installation Guide for  
your GbE Switch Module. For details about configuration and operation of your GbE Switch  
Module, see the Alteon OS Application Guide.  
40M2420, April 2007  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Who Should Use This Book  
This Command Reference is intended for network installers and system administrators engaged  
in configuring and maintaining a network. The administrator should be familiar with Ethernet  
concepts, IP addressing, the IEEE 802.1d Spanning Tree Protocol, and SNMP configuration  
parameters.  
14 Preface  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Chapter 1 “The Command Line Interface,” describes how to connect to the switch and access  
the information and configuration menus.  
Chapter 2 “First-Time Configuration,” describes how to use the Setup utility for initial  
switch configuration and how to change the system passwords.  
Chapter 3 “Menu Basics,” provides an overview of the menu system, including a menu map,  
global commands, and menu shortcuts.  
Chapter 4 “The Information Menu,” shows how to view switch configuration parameters.  
Chapter 5 “The Statistics Menu,” shows how to view switch performance statistics.  
Chapter 6 “The Configuration Menu,” shows how to configure switch system parameters,  
ports, VLANs, Spanning Tree Protocol, SNMP, Port Mirroring, IP Routing, Port Trunking, and  
more.  
Chapter 7 “The Operations Menu,” shows how to use commands which affect switch per-  
formance immediately, but do not alter permanent switch configurations (such as temporarily  
disabling ports). The menu describes how to activate or deactivate optional software features.  
images, how to load a new software image, and how to reset the software to factory defaults.  
Chapter 9 “The Maintenance Menu,” shows how to generate and access a dump of critical  
switch state information, how to clear it, and how to clear part or all of the forwarding database.  
Appendix A, “Alteon OS Syslog Messages,” shows a listing of syslog messages.  
Appendix B, “Alteon OS SNMP Agent,” lists the Management Interface Bases (MIBs) sup-  
ported in the switch software.  
“Glossary” includes definitions of terminology used throughout the book.  
“Index” includes pointers to the description of the key words used throughout the book.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Preface 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Typographic Conventions  
The following table describes the typographic styles used in this book.  
Table 1 Typographic Conventions  
Typeface or  
Symbol  
Meaning  
Example  
AaBbCc123  
This type is used for names of commands,  
files, and directories used within the text.  
View the readme.txtfile.  
It also depicts on-screen computer output and Main#  
prompts.  
AaBbCc123  
This bold type appears in command exam-  
ples. It shows text that must be typed in  
exactly as shown.  
Main# sys  
<AaBbCc123> This italicized type appears in command  
To establish a Telnet session, enter:  
examples as a parameter placeholder. Replace host# telnet <IP address>  
the indicated text with the appropriate real  
name or value when using the command. Do  
not type the brackets.  
This also shows book titles, special terms, or Read your Users Guide thoroughly.  
words to be emphasized.  
[ ]  
Command items shown inside brackets are host# ls [-a]  
optional and can be used or excluded as the  
situation demands. Do not type the brackets.  
16 Preface  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
How to Get Help  
If you need help, service, or technical assistance, see the “Getting help and technical  
assistance” appendix in the Layer 2/3 GbE Switch Module for IBM BladeCenter  
Installation Guide.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Preface 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
18 Preface  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 1  
The Command Line Interface  
Your GbE Switch Module (GbESM) is ready to perform basic switching functions right out of the  
box. Some of the more advanced features, however, require some administrative configuration  
before they can be used effectively.  
The extensive Alteon OS switching software included in your switch provides a variety of  
options for accessing and configuring the switch:  
A built-in, text-based command line interface and menu system for access via a Telnet ses-  
sion or serial-port connection  
SNMP support for access through network management software such as IBM Director or  
HP OpenView  
Alteon OS Browser-Based Interface (BBI)  
The command line interface is the most direct method for collecting switch information and  
performing switch configuration. Using a basic terminal, you are presented with a hierarchy of  
menus that enable you to view information and statistics about the switch, and to perform any  
necessary configuration.  
This chapter explains how to access the Command Line Interface (CLI) for the switch.  
40M2420, April 2007  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Connecting to the Switch  
You can access the command line interface in any one of the following ways:  
Using a Telnet via the management module  
Using a Telnet connection over the network  
Using a SSH connection to securely log into another computer over a network  
Using a serial connection using the serial port on the GbESM  
Management Module Setup  
The BladeCenter GbE Switch Module is an integral subsystem within the overall BladeCenter  
system. The BladeCenter chassis includes a management module (MM) as the central element  
for overall chassis management and control.  
You can use the 100 Mbps Ethernet port on the management module to configure and manage  
the GbE Switch Module. The GbE Switch Module communicates with the management mod-  
ule through its internal port 15 (MGT1) and port 16 (MGT2), which you can access through the  
Ethernet port on the management module. The factory default settings will permit only man-  
agement and control access to the switch module through the Ethernet port on the management  
module, or the built-in serial port. You can use the six external 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet  
ports on the switch module for management and control of the switch by selecting this mode as  
an option through the management module configuration utility program (see the applicable  
BladeCenter Installation and Users Guide publications for more information).  
Factory-Default vs. MM assigned IP Addresses  
Each GbE Switch Module must be assigned its own Internet Protocol address, which is used  
for communication with an SNMP network manager or other transmission control protocol/  
Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) applications (for example, BootP or TFTP). The factory-default IP  
address is 10.90.90.9x, where x corresponds to the number of the bay into which the GbE  
20 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Switch Module is installed. For additional information, see the Installation Guide). The man-  
agement module assigns an IP address of 192.168.70.1xx, where xx corresponds to the number  
of the bay into which each GbE Switch Module is installed, as shown in the following table:  
Table 1-1 GbESM IP addresses, based on switch-module bay numbers  
Bay number  
Bay 1  
Factory-default IP address  
10.90.90.91  
IP address assigned by MM  
192.168.70.127  
Bay 2  
10.90.90.92  
192.168.70.128  
Bay 3  
10.90.90.94  
192.168.70.129  
Bay 4  
10.90.90.97  
192.168.70.130  
NOTE Switch Modules installed in Bay 1 and Bay 2 connect to server NICs 1 and 2, respec-  
tively. However, Windows operating systems show that Switch Modules installed in Bay 3 and  
Bay 4 connect to server NICs 4 and 3, respectively.  
Default Gateway  
The default Gateway IP address determines where packets with a destination address outside  
the current subnet should be sent. Usually, the default Gateway is a router or host acting as an  
IP gateway to handle connections to other subnets of other TCP/IP networks. If you want to  
access the GbE Switch Module from outside your local network, use the management module  
to assign a default Gateway address to the GbE Switch Module. Choose I/O Module Tasks >  
Configuration from the navigation pane on the left, and enter the default Gateway IP address  
(for example, 192.168.70.125). Click Save.  
Configuring management module for switch access  
Complete the following initial configuration steps:  
1. Connect the Ethernet port of the management module to a 10/100 Mbps network (with  
access to a management station) or directly to a management station.  
2. Access and log on to the management module, as described in the BladeCenter Manage-  
ment Module User’s Guide. The management module provides the appropriate IP  
addresses for network access (see the applicable BladeCenter Installation and User’s  
Guide publications for more information).  
3. Select Configuration on the I/O Module Tasks menu on the left side of the BladeCenter  
Management Module window. See Figure 1-1.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Figure 1-1 Switch management on the BladeCenter management module  
4. You can use the default IP addresses provided by the management module, or you can  
assign a new IP address to the switch module through the management module. You can  
assign this IP address through one of the following methods:  
Manually through the BladeCenter management module  
Automatically through the IBM Director Configuration Wizard (available in  
Director release 4.21)  
NOTE If you change the IP address of the GbE Switch Module, make sure that the switch  
module and the management module both reside on the same subnet.  
22 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
5. Enable the following features in the management module:  
External Ports (I/O Module Tasks > Admin/Power/Restart > Advance Setup)  
External management over all ports (Configuration > Advanced Configuration)  
This setting is required if you want to access the management network through the exter-  
nal ports on the GbE Switch Module.  
The default value is Disabledfor both features. If these features are not already enabled,  
change the value to Enabled, then Save.  
NOTE In Advanced Configuration > Advanced Setup, enable “Preserve new IP configura-  
tion on all switch resets,” to retain the switch’s IP interface when you restore factory defaults.  
This setting preserves the management port’s IP address in the management module’s memory,  
so you maintain connectivity to the management module after a reset.  
You can now start a Telnet session, Browser-Based Interface (Web) session, a Secure Shell ses-  
sion, or a secure HTTPS session to the GbE Switch Module.  
Connecting to the Switch via Telnet  
Use the management module to access the GbE Switch Module through Telnet. Choose  
I/O Module Tasks > Configuration from the navigation pane on the left. Select a bay number  
and click Advanced Configuration > Start Telnet/Web Session > Start Telnet Session. A  
Telnet window opens a connection to the Switch Module (requires Java 1.4 Plug-in).  
Once that you have configured the GbE Switch Module with an IP address and gateway, you  
can access the switch from any workstation connected to the management network. Telnet  
access provides the same options for user and administrator access as those available through  
the management module, minus certain Telnet and management commands.  
To establish a Telnet connection with the switch, run the Telnet program on your workstation  
and issue the Telnet command, followed by the switch IP address:  
telnet <switch IP address>  
Running Telnet  
Once the IP parameters on the GbE Switch Module are configured, you can access the CLI using  
a Telnet connection. From the management module, you can establish a Telnet connection with  
the switch.  
You will then be prompted to enter a password as explained on page 27.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Establishing an SSH Connection  
Although a remote network administrator can manage the configuration of a GbE Switch Module  
via Telnet, this method does not provide a secure connection. The SSH (Secure Shell) protocol  
enables you to securely log into another computer over a network to execute commands  
remotely. As a secure alternative to using Telnet to manage switch configuration, SSH ensures  
that all data sent over the network is encrypted and secure.  
The switch can do only one session of key/cipher generation at a time. Thus, a SSH/SCP client  
will not be able to login if the switch is doing key generation at that time or if another client  
has just logged in before this client. Similarly, the system will fail to do the key generation if a  
SSH/SCP client is logging in at that time.  
The supported SSH encryption and authentication methods are listed below.  
Server Host Authentication: Client RSA-authenticates the switch in the beginning of  
every connection.  
Key Exchange: RSA  
Encryption: 3DES-CBC, DES  
User Authentication: Local password authentication, Radius  
The following SSH clients have been tested:  
SSH 1.2.23 and SSH 1.2.27 for Linux (freeware)  
SecureCRT 3.0.2 and SecureCRT 3.0.3 (Van Dyke Technologies, Inc.)  
F-Secure SSH 1.1 for Windows (Data Fellows)  
NOTE The Alteon OS implementation of SSH is based on SSH version 1.5 and supports SSH-  
1.5-1.X.XX. SSH clients of other versions (especially Version 2) are not supported.  
24 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Running SSH  
Once the IP parameters are configured and the SSH service is turned on the GbE Switch Module,  
you can access the command line interface using an SSH connection. The default setting for  
SSH access is disabled.  
To establish an SSH connection with the switch, run the SSH program on your workstation by  
issuing the SSH command, followed by the switch IP address:  
>> # ssh <switch IP address>  
or, if SecurID authentication is required, use the following command:  
>> # ssh -1 ace <switch IP address>  
You will then be prompted to enter your user name and password.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Accessing the Switch  
To enable better switch management and user accountability, three levels or classes of user  
access have been implemented on the GbE Switch Module. Levels of access to CLI, Web man-  
agement functions, and screens increase as needed to perform various switch management  
tasks. Conceptually, access classes are defined as follows:  
User interaction with the switch is completely passive—nothing can be changed on the  
GbE Switch Module. Users may display information that has no security or privacy implica-  
tions, such as switch statistics and current operational state information.  
Operators can only effect temporary changes on the GbE Switch Module. These changes  
will be lost when the switch is rebooted/reset. Operators have access to the switch man-  
agement features used for daily switch operations. Because any changes an operator  
makes are undone by a reset of the switch, operators cannot severely impact switch opera-  
tion.  
Administrators are the only ones that may make permanent changes to the switch configu-  
ration—changes that are persistent across a reboot/reset of the switch. Administrators can  
access switch functions to configure and troubleshoot problems on the GbE Switch Module.  
Because administrators can also make temporary (operator-level) changes as well, they  
must be aware of the interactions between temporary and permanent changes.  
Access to switch functions is controlled through the use of unique surnames and passwords.  
Once you are connected to the switch via local Telnet, remote Telnet, or SSH, you are  
prompted to enter a password. The default user names/password for each access level are listed  
in the following table.  
26 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
NOTE It is recommended that you change default switch passwords after initial configuration  
and as regularly as required under your network security policies. For more information, see  
“Setting Passwords” on page 43.  
Table 1-2 User Access Levels  
User Account  
Description and Tasks Performed  
Password  
User  
The User has no direct responsibility for switch management. user  
He or she can view all switch status information and statistics,  
but cannot make any configuration changes to the switch.  
Operator  
The Operator manages all functions of the switch. The  
Operator can reset ports, except the management ports.  
oper  
The superuser Administrator has complete access to all menus, admin  
information, and configuration commands on the GbE Switch  
Module, including the ability to change both the user and  
administrator passwords.  
Administrator  
NOTE With the exception of the “admin” user, access to each user level can be disabled by  
setting the password to an empty value.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Setup Versus CLI  
Once the administrator password is verified, you are given complete access to the switch. If the  
switch is still set to its factory default configuration, the system will ask whether you wish to  
run Setup (see Chapter 2, “First-Time Configuration”), a utility designed to help you through  
the first-time configuration process. If the switch has already been configured, the Main Menu  
of the CLI is displayed instead.  
The following table shows the Main Menu with administrator privileges.  
[Main Menu]  
info  
- Information Menu  
stats - Statistics Menu  
cfg  
oper  
boot  
- Configuration Menu  
- Operations Command Menu  
- Boot Options Menu  
maint - Maintenance Menu  
diff  
- Show pending config changes [global command]  
apply - Apply pending config changes [global command]  
save  
revert - Revert pending or applied changes [global command]  
exit - Exit [global command, always available]  
- Save updated config to FLASH [global command]  
NOTE If you are accessing a user account, some menu options will not be available.  
28 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Command Line History and Editing  
For a description of global commands, shortcuts, and command line editing functions, see  
“Menu Basics” on page 47.”  
Idle Timeout  
By default, the switch will disconnect your Telnet session after five minutes of inactivity. This  
function is controlled by the idle timeout parameter, which can be set from 1 to 60 minutes. For  
information on changing this parameter, see “System Configuration” on page 174.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
30 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 2  
First-Time Configuration  
To help with the initial process of configuring your switch, the Alteon OS software includes a  
Setup utility. The Setup utility prompts you step-by-step to enter all the necessary information  
for basic configuration of the switch. This chapter describes how to use the Setup utility and  
how to change system passwords. Before you run Setup, you must first connect to the switch  
(see Chapter 1, “Connecting to the Switch”).  
40M2420, April 2007  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Using the Setup Utility  
Whenever you log in as the system administrator under the factory default configuration, you  
are asked whether you wish to run the Setup utility. Setup can also be activated manually from  
the command line interface any time after login.  
Information Needed For Setup  
Setup requests the following information:  
Basic system information  
Date & time  
Whether to use Spanning Tree Group or not  
Optional configuration for each port  
Speed, duplex, flow control, and negotiation mode (as appropriate)  
Whether to use VLAN tagging or not (as appropriate)  
Optional configuration for each VLAN  
Name of VLAN  
Which ports are included in the VLAN  
Optional configuration of IP parameters  
IP address, subnet mask, and VLAN for each IP interface  
IP addresses for default gateway  
Destination, subnet mask, and gateway IP address for each IP static route  
Whether IP forwarding is enabled or not  
Whether the RIP supply is enabled or not  
Starting Setup When You Log In  
The Setup prompt appears automatically whenever you login as the system administrator under  
the factory default settings.  
1. Connect to the switch.  
After connecting, the login prompt will appear as shown below.  
Enter Password:  
32 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Alteon OS Command Reference  
2. Enter adminas the default administrator password.  
If the factory default configuration is detected, the system prompts:  
Nortel Layer2-3 GbE Switch Module  
18:44:05 Wed Jan 3, 2007  
The switch is booted with factory default configuration.  
To ease the configuration of the switch, a "Set Up" facility which  
will prompt you with those configuration items that are essential to  
the operation of the switch is provided.  
Would you like to run "Set Up" to configure the switch? [y/n]:  
NOTE If the default adminlogin is unsuccessful, or if the administrator Main Menu appears  
instead, the system configuration has probably been changed from the factory default settings.  
If you are certain that you need to return the switch to its factory default settings, see “Select-  
ing a Configuration Block” on page 336.  
3. Enter yto begin the initial configuration of the switch, or n to bypass the Setup facility.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually  
Stopping Setup  
To abort the Setup utility, press <Ctrl-C> during any Setup question. When you abort Setup,  
the system will prompt:  
Would you like to run from top again? [y/n]  
Enter nto abort Setup, or yto restart the Setup program at the beginning.  
Restarting Setup  
You can restart the Setup utility manually at any time by entering the following command at  
the administrator prompt:  
# /cfg/setup  
Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration  
When Setup is started, the system prompts:  
"Set Up" will walk you through the configuration of  
System Date and Time, Spanning Tree, Port Speed/Mode,  
VLANs, and IP interfaces. [type Ctrl-C to abort "Set Up"]  
------------------------------------------------------------  
Will you be configuring VLANs? [y/n]  
1. Enter yif you will be configuring VLANs. Otherwise enter n.  
If you decide not to configure VLANs during this session, you can configure them later using  
the configuration menus, or by restarting the Setup facility. For more information on configur-  
ing VLANs, see the Alteon OS Application Guide.  
Next, the Setup utility prompts you to input basic system information.  
2. Enter the year of the current date at the prompt:  
Enter year [2007]:  
Enter the last two digits of the year as a number from 00 to 99. “00” is considered 2000. To  
keep the current year, press <Enter>.  
34 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Alteon OS Command Reference  
NOTE When the GbE Switch Module is reset, the date and time to revert to default values.  
Use /cfg/sys/dateand /cfg/sys/timeto re-enter the current date and time.  
The system displays the date and time settings:  
System clock set to 18:55:36 Wed Jan 3, 2007.  
3. Enter the month of the current system date at the prompt:  
System Date:  
Enter month [1]:  
Enter the month as a number from 1 to 12. To keep the current month, press <Enter>.  
4. Enter the day of the current date at the prompt:  
Enter day [3]:  
Enter the date as a number from 1 to 31. To keep the current day, press <Enter>.  
5. Enter the hour of the current system time at the prompt:  
System Time:  
Enter hour in 24-hour format [18]:  
Enter the hour as a number from 00 to 23. To keep the current hour, press <Enter>.  
6. Enter the minute of the current time at the prompt:  
Enter minutes [55]:  
Enter the minute as a number from 00 to 59. To keep the current minute, press <Enter>.  
7. Enter the seconds of the current time at the prompt:  
Enter seconds [37]:  
Enter the seconds as a number from 00 to 59. To keep the current second, press <Enter>.  
The system displays the date and time settings:  
System clock set to 8:55:36 Wed Jan 3, 2007.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
8. Turn Spanning Tree Protocol on or off at the prompt:  
Spanning Tree:  
Current Spanning Tree Group 1 setting: ON  
Turn Spanning Tree Group 1 OFF? [y/n]  
Enter yto turn off Spanning Tree, or enter nto leave Spanning Tree on.  
Setup Part 2: Port Configuration  
NOTE When configuring port options for your switch, some of the prompts and options may  
be different.  
1. Select the port to configure, or skip port configuration at the prompt:  
Port Config:  
Enter port (INT1-14, MGT1-2, EXT1-6):  
NOTE The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens  
displayed by your system. Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you  
are using and the firmware versions and options that are installed.  
If you wish to change settings for individual ports, enter the number of the port you wish to  
configure. To skip port configuration, press <Enter> without specifying any port and go to  
“Setup Part 3: VLANs” on page 38.  
2. Configure Gigabit Ethernet port flow parameters.  
If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector, the system prompts:  
Gig Link Configuration:  
Port Flow Control:  
Current Port EXT1 flow control setting:  
Enter new value ["rx"/"tx"/"both"/"none"]:  
both  
Enter rxto enable receive flow control, txfor transmit flow control, bothto enable both, or  
noneto turn flow control off for the port. To keep the current setting, press <Enter>.  
36 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
3. Configure Gigabit Ethernet port autonegotiation mode.  
If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector, the system prompts:  
Port Auto Negotiation:  
Current Port EXT1 autonegotiation:  
Enter new value ["on"/"off"]:  
on  
Enter onto enable port autonegotiation, offto disable it, or press <Enter> to keep the current  
setting.  
4. If configuring VLANs, enable or disable VLAN tagging for the port.  
If you have selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1, the system prompts:  
Port VLAN tagging config (tagged port can be a member of multiple VLANs)  
Current TAG support:  
disabled  
Enter new TAG support [d/e]:  
Enter dto disable VLAN tagging for the port or enter eto enable VLAN tagging for the port.  
To keep the current setting, press <Enter>.  
5. The system prompts you to configure the next port:  
Enter port (INT1-14, MGT1-2, EXT1-6):  
When you are through configuring ports, press <Enter> without specifying any port. Other-  
wise, repeat the steps in this section.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup Part 3: VLANs  
If you chose to skip VLANs configuration back in Part 1, skip to “Setup Part 4: IP Configura-  
tion” on page 39.  
1. Select the VLAN to configure, or skip VLAN configuration at the prompt:  
VLAN Config:  
Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4094, NULL at end:  
If you wish to change settings for individual VLANs, enter the number of the VLAN you wish  
to configure. To skip VLAN configuration, press <Enter> without typing a VLAN number and  
go to “Setup Part 4: IP Configuration” on page 39.  
2. Enter the new VLAN name at the prompt:  
Current VLAN name: VLAN 2  
Enter new VLAN name:  
Entering a new VLAN name is optional. To use the pending new VLAN name, press <Enter>.  
3. Enter the VLAN port numbers:  
Define Ports in VLAN:  
Current VLAN 2: empty  
Enter ports one per line, NULL at end:  
Enter each port, by port number or port alias, and confirm placement of the port into this  
VLAN. When you are finished adding ports to this VLAN, press <Enter> without specifying  
any port.  
4. Configure Spanning Tree Group membership for the VLAN:  
Spanning Tree Group membership:  
Current Spanning Tree Group index: 1  
Enter new Spanning Tree Group index [1-127]:  
5. The system prompts you to configure the next VLAN:  
VLAN Config:  
Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4094, NULL at end:  
Repeat the steps in this section until all VLANs have been configured. When all VLANs have  
been configured, press <Enter> without specifying any VLAN.  
38 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Setup Part 4: IP Configuration  
The system prompts for IP parameters.  
IP Interfaces  
IP interfaces are used for defining subnets to which the switch belongs.  
Up to 128 IP interfaces can be configured on the GbE Switch Module. The IP address assigned to  
each IP interface provide the switch with an IP presence on your network. No two IP interfaces  
can be on the same IP subnet. The interfaces can be used for connecting to the switch for  
remote configuration, and for routing between subnets and VLANs (if used).  
1. Select the IP interface to configure, or skip interface configuration at the prompt:  
IP Config:  
IP interfaces:  
Enter interface number: (1-128)  
If you wish to configure individual IP interfaces, enter the number of the IP interface you with  
to configure. To skip IP interface configuration, press <Enter> without typing an interface  
number and go to “Default Gateways” on page 40.  
NOTE Interface 128 is reserved for switch management. If you change the IP address of  
IF 128, you can lose the connection to the management module. Use the management module  
to change the IP address of the GbE Switch Module.  
2. For the specified IP interface, enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation:  
Current IP address:  
0.0.0.0  
Enter new IP address:  
To keep the current setting, press <Enter>.  
3. At the prompt, enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation:  
Current subnet mask:  
Enter new subnet mask:  
0.0.0.0  
To keep the current setting, press <Enter>.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
4. If configuring VLANs, specify a VLAN for the interface.  
This prompt appears if you selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1:  
Current VLAN:  
1
Enter new VLAN [1-4090]:  
Enter the number for the VLAN to which the interface belongs, or press <Enter> without spec-  
ifying a VLAN number to accept the current setting.  
5. At the prompt, enter yto enable the IP interface, or nto leave it disabled:  
Enable IP interface? [y/n]  
6. The system prompts you to configure another interface:  
Enter interface number: (1-128)  
Repeat the steps in this section until all IP interfaces have been configured. When all interfaces  
have been configured, press <Enter> without specifying any interface number.  
Default Gateways  
1. At the prompt, select a default gateway for configuration, or skip default gateway config-  
uration:  
IP default gateways:  
Enter default gateway number: (1-132)  
Enter the number for the default gateway to be configured. To skip default gateway configura-  
tion, press <Enter> without typing a gateway number and go to “IP Routing” on page 41.  
2. At the prompt, enter the IP address for the selected default gateway:  
Current IP address:  
0.0.0.0  
Enter new IP address:  
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation, or press <Enter> without specifying an address  
to accept the current setting.  
3. At the prompt, enter yto enable the default gateway, or nto leave it disabled:  
Enable default gateway? [y/n]  
40 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
4. The system prompts you to configure another default gateway:  
Enter default gateway number: (1-132)  
Repeat the steps in this section until all default gateways have been configured. When all  
default gateways have been configured, press <Enter> without specifying any number.  
IP Routing  
When IP interfaces are configured for the various subnets attached to your switch, IP routing  
between them can be performed entirely within the switch. This eliminates the need to send  
inter-subnet communication to an external router device. Routing on more complex networks,  
where subnets may not have a direct presence on the GbE Switch Module, can be accomplished  
through configuring static routes or by letting the switch learn routes dynamically.  
This part of the Setup program prompts you to configure the various routing parameters.  
1. At the prompt, enable or disable forwarding for IP Routing:  
Enable IP forwarding? [y/n]  
Enter yto enable IP forwarding. To disable IP forwarding, enter n.To keep the current setting,  
press <Enter>.  
Setup Part 5: Final Steps  
1. When prompted, decide whether to restart Setup or continue:  
Would you like to run from top again? [y/n]  
Enter yto restart the Setup utility from the beginning, or nto continue.  
2. When prompted, decide whether you wish to review the configuration changes:  
Review the changes made? [y/n]  
Enter yto review the changes made during this session of the Setup utility. Enter nto continue  
without reviewing the changes. We recommend that you review the changes.  
3. Next, decide whether to apply the changes at the prompt:  
Apply the changes? [y/n]  
Enter yto apply the changes, or nto continue without applying. Changes are normally applied.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
4. At the prompt, decide whether to make the changes permanent:  
Save changes to flash? [y/n]  
Enter yto save the changes to flash. Enter nto continue without saving the changes. Changes  
are normally saved at this point.  
5. If you do not apply or save the changes, the system prompts whether to abort them:  
Abort all changes? [y/n]  
Enter yto discard the changes. Enter nto return to the “Apply the changes?” prompt.  
NOTE After initial configuration is complete, it is recommended that you change the default  
passwords as shown in “Setting Passwords” on page 43.  
Optional Setup for Telnet Support  
NOTE This step is optional. Perform this procedure only if you are planning on connecting to  
the GbE Switch Module through a remote Telnet connection.  
1. Telnet is enabled by default. To change the setting, use the following command:  
>> # /cfg/sys/access/tnet  
2. Apply and save SNMP and /or telnet configuration(s).  
>> System# apply  
>> System# save  
42 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Setting Passwords  
It is recommended that you change the user and administrator passwords after initial configu-  
ration and as regularly as required under your network security policies.  
To change the administrator password, you must login using the administrator password.  
NOTE If you forget your administrator password, call your technical support representative  
for help using the password fix-up mode.  
Changing the Default Administrator Password  
The administrator has complete access to all menus, information, and configuration com-  
mands, including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords.  
The default password for the administrator account is admin. To change the default password,  
follow this procedure:  
1. Connect to the switch and log in using the adminpassword.  
2. From the Main Menu, use the following command to access the Configuration Menu:  
Main# /cfg  
The Configuration Menu is displayed.  
[Configuration Menu]  
sys  
port  
l2  
- System-wide Parameter Menu  
- Port Menu  
- Layer 2 Menu  
l3  
- Layer 3 Menu  
qos  
- QOS Menu  
acl  
- Access Control List Menu  
- Port Mirroring Menu  
pmirr  
setup  
dump  
ptcfg  
gtcfg  
cur  
- Step by step configuration set up  
- Dump current configuration to script file  
- Backup current configuration to FTP/TFTP server  
- Restore current configuration from FTP/TFTP server  
- Display current configuration  
3. From the Configuration Menu, use the following command to select the System Menu:  
>> Configuration# sys  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Alteon OS Command Reference  
The System Menu is displayed.  
[System Menu]  
syslog - Syslog Menu  
sshd - SSH Server Menu  
radius - RADIUS Authentication Menu  
tacacs+ - TACACS+ Authentication Menu  
ldap  
ntp  
- LDAP Authentication Menu  
- NTP Server Menu  
ssnmp  
- System SNMP Menu  
access - System Access Menu  
date  
time  
- Set system date  
- Set system time  
timezone - Set system timezone (daylight savings)  
olddst - Set system DST for US  
idle  
notice - Set login notice  
bannr - Set login banner  
- Set timeout for idle CLI sessions  
hprompt - Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt  
reminders - Enable/disable Reminders  
cur  
- Display current system-wide parameters  
4. From the System Menu, use the following command to select the System Access Menu:  
>> System# access  
The System Access Menu is displayed.  
[System Access Menu]  
mgmt  
user  
http  
https  
wport  
snmp  
- Management Network Definition Menu  
- User Access Control Menu (passwords)  
- Enable/disable HTTP (Web) access  
- HTTPS Web Access Menu  
- Set HTTP (Web) server port number  
- Set SNMP access control  
userbbi - Enable/disable user configuration from BBI  
tnport - Set Telnet server port number  
tport  
cur  
- Set the TFTP Port for the system  
- Display current system access configuration  
5. Select the administrator password.  
System Access# user/admpw  
44 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
6. Enter the current administrator password at the prompt:  
Changing ADMINISTRATOR password; validation required...  
Enter current administrator password:  
NOTE If you forget your administrator password, call your technical support representative  
for help using the password fix-up mode.  
7. Enter the new administrator password at the prompt:  
Enter new administrator password:  
8. Enter the new administrator password, again, at the prompt:  
Re-enter new administrator password:  
9. Apply and save your change by entering the following commands:  
System# apply  
System# save  
Changing the Default User Password  
The user login has limited control of the switch. Through a user account, you can view switch  
information and statistics, but you can’t make configuration changes.  
The default password for the user account is user. This password can be changed from the  
user account. The administrator can change all passwords, as shown in the following proce-  
dure.  
1. Connect to the switch and log in using the adminpassword.  
2. From the Main Menu, use the following command to access the Configuration Menu:  
Main# cfg  
3. From the Configuration Menu, use the following command to select the System Menu:  
>> Configuration# sys  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
4. From the System Menu, use the following command to select the System Access Menu:  
>> System# access  
5. Select the user password.  
System# user/usrpw  
6. Enter the current administrator password at the prompt.  
Only the administrator can change the user password. Entering the administrator password  
confirms your authority.  
Changing USER password; validation required...  
Enter current administrator password:  
7. Enter the new user password at the prompt:  
Enter new user password:  
8. Enter the new user password, again, at the prompt:  
Re-enter new user password:  
9. Apply and save your changes:  
System# apply  
System# save  
46 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 3  
Menu Basics  
The GbE Switch Module’s Command Line Interface (CLI) is used for viewing switch informa-  
tion and statistics. In addition, the administrator can use the CLI for performing all levels of  
switch configuration.  
To make the CLI easy to use, the various commands have been logically grouped into a series  
of menus and sub-menus. Each menu displays a list of commands and/or sub-menus that are  
available, along with a summary of what each command will do. Below each menu is a prompt  
where you can enter any command appropriate to the current menu.  
This chapter describes the Main Menu commands, and provides a list of commands and short-  
cuts that are commonly available from all the menus within the CLI.  
40M2420, April 2007  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
The Main Menu  
The Main Menu appears after a successful connection and login. The following table shows  
the Main Menu for the administrator login. Some features are not available under the user  
login.  
[Main Menu]  
info  
- Information Menu  
stats - Statistics Menu  
cfg  
oper  
boot  
- Configuration Menu  
- Operations Command Menu  
- Boot Options Menu  
maint - Maintenance Menu  
diff  
- Show pending config changes [global command]  
apply - Apply pending config changes [global command]  
save  
revert - Revert pending or applied changes [global command]  
exit - Exit [global command, always available]  
- Save updated config to FLASH [global command]  
48 Chapter 3: Menu Basics  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Menu Summary  
Information Menu  
Provides sub-menus for displaying information about the current status of the switch:  
from basic system settings to VLANs, and more.  
Statistics Menu  
Provides sub-menus for displaying switch performance statistics. Included are port, IF, IP,  
ICMP, TCP, UDP, SNMP, routing, ARP, DNS, and VRRP statistics.  
Configuration Menu  
This menu is available only from an administrator login. It includes sub-menus for config-  
uring every aspect of the switch. Changes to configuration are not active until explicitly  
applied. Changes can be saved to non-volatile memory.  
Operations Command Menu  
Operations-level commands are used for making immediate and temporary changes to  
switch configuration. This menu is used for bringing ports temporarily in and out of ser-  
vice, performing port mirroring, and enabling or disabling Server Load Balancing func-  
tions. It is also used for activating or deactivating optional software packages.  
Boot Options Menu  
This menu is used for upgrading switch software, selecting configuration blocks, and for  
resetting the switch when necessary.  
Maintenance Menu  
This menu is used for debugging purposes, enabling you to generate a dump of the critical  
state information in the switch, and to clear entries in the forwarding database and the  
ARP and routing tables.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 3: Menu Basics 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Global Commands  
Some basic commands are recognized throughout the menu hierarchy. These commands are  
useful for obtaining online help, navigating through menus, and for applying and saving con-  
figuration changes.  
For help on a specific command, type help. You will see the following screen:  
Global Commands: [can be issued from any menu]  
help  
lines  
diff  
up  
verbose  
apply  
print  
exit  
save  
pwd  
quit  
revert  
revert apply  
ping  
pushd  
traceroute  
popd  
telnet  
who  
history  
chpass_p  
chpass_s  
The following are used to navigate the menu structure:  
. Print current menu  
.. Move up one menu level  
/ Top menu if first, or command separator  
! Execute command from history  
Table 3-1 Description of Global Commands  
Command  
Action  
? command  
or help  
Provides more information about a specific command on the current menu.  
When used without the command parameter, a summary of the global com-  
mands is displayed.  
. or print  
.. or up  
/
Display the current menu.  
Go up one level in the menu structure.  
If placed at the beginning of a command, go to the Main Menu. Otherwise,  
this is used to separate multiple commands placed on the same line.  
lines  
Set the number of lines (n) that display on the screen at one time. The default  
is 24 lines. When used without a value, the current setting is displayed. Set  
lines to a value of 0 (zero) to disable pagination.  
diff  
apply  
save  
Show any pending configuration changes.  
Apply pending configuration changes.  
Write configuration changes to non-volatile flash memory.  
50 Chapter 3: Menu Basics  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 3-1 Description of Global Commands  
Command Action  
revert  
Remove pending configuration changes between “apply” commands. Use  
this command to remove any configuration changes made since last apply.  
revert apply  
Remove pending or applied configuration changes between “save” com-  
mands. Use this command to remove any configuration changes made since  
last save.  
exit or quit  
ping  
Exit from the command line interface and log out.  
Use this command to verify station-to-station connectivity across the net-  
work. The format is as follows:  
ping <host name>|<IP address> [tries (1-32)> [msec delay]]  
Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the device, tries (optional)  
is the number of attempts (1-32), msec delay (optional) is the number of mil-  
liseconds between attempts. Configure the DNS parameters if specifying  
hostnames (see “Domain Name System Configuration” on page 295).  
traceroute  
Use this command to identify the route used for station-to-station connectiv-  
ity across the network. The format is as follows:  
traceroute <host name>| <IP address> [<max-hops (1-32)>  
[msec delay]]  
Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the target station, max-  
hops (optional) is the maximum distance to trace (1-16 devices), and delay  
(optional) is the number of milliseconds for wait for the response. As with  
ping, the DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames.  
pwd  
Display the command path used to reach the current menu.  
verbose n  
Sets the level of information displayed on the screen:  
0=Quiet: Nothing appears except errors—not even prompts.  
1=Normal: Prompts and requested output are shown, but no menus.  
2=Verbose: Everything is shown.  
When used without a value, the current setting is displayed.  
telnet  
This command is used to telnet out of the switch. The format is as follows:  
telnet <host name>| <IP address> [port]  
history  
pushd  
popd  
This command displays the most recent commands.  
Save the current menu path, so you can jump back to it using popd.  
Go to the menu path and position previously saved by using pushd.  
Displays a list of users that are logged on to the switch.  
Configures the password for the primary TACACS+ server.  
who  
chpass_p  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 3: Menu Basics 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 3-1 Description of Global Commands  
Command  
Action  
chpass_s  
Configures the password for the secondary TACACS+ server.  
52 Chapter 3: Menu Basics  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Command Line History and Editing  
Using the command line interface, you can retrieve and modify previously entered commands  
with just a few keystrokes. The following options are available globally at the command line:  
Table 3-2 Command Line History and Editing Options  
Option  
history  
!!  
Description  
Display a numbered list of the last 64 previously entered commands.  
Repeat the last entered command.  
th  
!n  
Repeat the n command shown on the history list.  
<Ctrl-p>  
<Ctrl-n>  
(Also the up arrow key.) Recall the previous command from the history list. This can  
be used multiple times to work backward through the last 64 commands. The recalled  
command can be entered as is, or edited using the options below.  
(Also the down arrow key.) Recall the next command from the history list. This can be  
used multiple times to work forward through the last 64 commands. The recalled com-  
mand can be entered as is, or edited using the options below.  
<Ctrl-a>  
<Ctrl-e>  
<Ctrl-b>  
<Ctrl-f>  
Move the cursor to the beginning of command line.  
Move cursor to the end of the command line.  
(Also the left arrow key.) Move the cursor back one position to the left.  
(Also the right arrow key.) Move the cursor forward one position to the right.  
(Also the Delete key.) Erase one character to the left of the cursor position.  
Delete one character at the cursor position.  
<Backspace>  
<Ctrl-d>  
<Ctrl-k>  
<Ctrl-l>  
Kill (erase) all characters from the cursor position to the end of the command line.  
Redraw the screen.  
<Ctrl-u>  
Other keys  
Clear the entire line.  
Insert new characters at the cursor position.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 3: Menu Basics 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Command Line Interface Shortcuts  
Command Stacking  
As a shortcut, you can type multiple commands on a single line, separated by forward slashes  
(/). You can connect as many commands as required to access the menu option that you want.  
For example, the keyboard shortcut to access the Spanning Tree Port Configuration Menu from  
the Main#prompt is as follows:  
Main# cfg/l2/stg 1/port  
Command Abbreviation  
Most commands can be abbreviated by entering the first characters which distinguish the com-  
mand from the others in the same menu or sub-menu. For example, the command shown above  
could also be entered as follows:  
Main# c/l2/stg 1/po  
Tab Completion  
By entering the first letter of a command at any menu prompt and hitting <Tab>, the CLI will  
display all commands or options in that menu that begin with that letter. Entering additional  
letters will further refine the list of commands or options displayed. If only one command fits  
the input text when <Tab> is pressed, that command will be supplied on the command line,  
waiting to be entered. If the <Tab> key is pressed without any input on the command line, the  
currently active menu will be displayed.  
54 Chapter 3: Menu Basics  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
CHAPTER 4  
The Information Menu  
You can view configuration information for the switch in both the user and administrator command  
modes. This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch infor-  
mation.  
40M2420, April 2007  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info  
Information Menu  
[Information Menu]  
sys  
l2  
l3  
qos  
acl  
link  
port  
- System Information Menu  
- Layer 2 Information Menu  
- Layer 3 Information Menu  
- QoS Menu  
- Show ACL information  
- Show link status  
- Show port information  
geaport - Show system port and gea port mapping  
sfp  
dump  
- Show External Port SFP/XFP status  
- Dump all information  
The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 4-1, with pointers  
to detailed information.  
Table 4-1 Information Menu Options (/info)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
sys  
Displays the System Information Menu. For details, see page 58.  
l2  
Displays the Layer 2 Information Menu. For details, see page 74.  
l3  
Displays the Layer 3 Information Menu. For details, see page 93.  
qos  
Displays the Quality of Service (QoS) Information Menu. For details, see page 113.  
acl  
Displays the current configuration profile for each Access Control List (ACL) and ACL Group.  
For details, see page 115.  
link  
Displays configuration information about each port, including:  
Port alias  
Port speed  
Duplex mode (half, full, or auto)  
Flow control for transmit and receive (no, yes, or auto)  
Link status (up or down)  
For details, see page 116.  
56 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 4-1 Information Menu Options (/info)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
port  
Displays port status information, including:  
Port alias  
Whether the port uses VLAN Tagging or not  
Port VLAN ID (PVID)  
Port name  
VLAN membership  
Port Fast Fowarding status  
FDB Learning status  
For details, see page 117.  
geaport  
Displays the GbESM port mapping between the two Gigabit Ethernet Aggregators (GEA).  
For details, see page 118.  
sfp  
Displays the status of the Small Form Pluggable (SFP) module on each Fiber External Port.  
For details, see page 119.  
dump  
Dumps all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more, depending on  
your configuration).  
If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to  
capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/sys  
System Information  
[System Menu]  
snmpv3 - SNMPv3 Information Menu  
chassis - Show BladeCenter Chassis related information  
general - Show general system information  
log  
user  
- Show last 100 syslog messages  
- Show current user status  
e2eshow - Show E2E status  
dump  
- Dump all system information  
The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 4-2, with pointers  
to where detailed information can be found.  
Table 4-2 System Menu Options (/info/sys)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
snmpv3  
Displays SNMPv3 Information Menu. To view the menu options, see page 59.  
chassis  
Displays information about the BladeCenter chassis. For details, see page 69.  
general  
Displays system information, including:  
System date and time  
Switch model name and number  
Switch name and location  
Time of last boot  
MAC address of the switch management processor  
IP address of the management interface  
Hardware version and part number  
Software image file and version number  
Configuration name  
Log-in banner, if one is configured  
For details, see page 70.  
log  
Displays most recent syslog messages. For details, see page 72.  
user  
Displays configured user names and their status. For details, see page 73.  
e2eshow  
Displays End-to-End Flow Control information.  
58 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 4-2 System Menu Options (/info/sys)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
dump  
Dumps all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more, depending on  
your configuration).  
/info/sys/snmpv3  
SNMPv3 System Information Menu  
SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2  
Framework by supporting the following:  
a new SNMP message format  
security for messages  
access control  
remote configuration of SNMP parameters  
For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please refer to RFC2271 to RFC2276.  
[SNMPv3 Information Menu]  
usm  
- Show usmUser table information  
view  
- Show vacmViewTreeFamily table information  
access - Show vacmAccess table information  
group  
comm  
- Show vacmSecurityToGroup table information  
- Show community table information  
taddr  
- Show targetAddr table information  
tparam - Show targetParams table information  
notify - Show notify table information  
dump  
- Show all SNMPv3 information  
Table 4-3 SNMPv3 information Menu Options (/info/sys/snmpv3)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
usm  
Displays User Security Model (USM) table information. To view the table, see page 61.  
view  
Displays information about view, sub-trees, mask and type of view. To view a sample, see page 62.  
access  
Displays View-based Access Control information. To view a sample, see page 63.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 4-3 SNMPv3 information Menu Options (/info/sys/snmpv3)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
group  
Displays information about the group that includes, the security model, user name, and group  
name. To view a sample, see page 64.  
comm  
Displays information about the community table information. To view a sample, see page 64.  
taddr  
Displays the Target Address table information. To view a sample, see page 65.  
tparam  
Displays the Target parameters table information. To view a sample, see page 66.  
notify  
Displays the Notify table information. To view a sample, see page 67.  
dump  
Displays all the SNMPv3 information. To view a sample, see page 68.  
60 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/sys/snmpv3/usm  
SNMPv3 USM User Table Information  
The User-based Security Model (USM) in SNMPv3 provides security services such as authen-  
tication and privacy of messages. This security model makes use of a defined set of user iden-  
tities displayed in the USM user table. The USM user table contains the following information:  
the user name  
a security name in the form of a string whose format is independent of the Security Model  
an authentication protocol, which is an indication that the messages sent on behalf of the  
user can be authenticated  
the privacy protocol  
usmUser Table:  
User Name  
Protocol  
-------------------------------- --------------------------------  
adminmd5  
adminsha  
v1v2only  
HMAC_MD5, DES PRIVACY  
HMAC_SHA, DES PRIVACY  
NO AUTH, NO PRIVACY  
Table 4-4 USM User Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/usm)  
Field  
Description  
User Name  
This is a string that represents the name of the user that you can  
use to access the switch.  
Protocol  
This indicates whether messages sent on behalf of this user are  
protected from disclosure using a privacy protocol. Alteon OS  
21.0 supports DES algorithm for privacy. The software also sup-  
ports two authentication algorithms: MD5 and HMAC-SHA.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/sys/snmpv3/view  
SNMPv3 View Table Information  
The user can control and restrict the access allowed to a group to only a subset of the manage-  
ment information in the management domain that the group can access within each context by  
specifying the group’s rights in terms of a particular MIB view for security reasons.  
View Name  
-----------------  
iso  
v1v2only  
v1v2only  
v1v2only  
v1v2only  
Subtree  
Mask  
Type  
------------------ -------------- --------  
1.3  
1.3  
1.3.6.1.6.3.15  
1.3.6.1.6.3.16  
1.3.6.1.6.3.18  
included  
included  
excluded  
excluded  
excluded  
Table 4-5 SNMPv3 View Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/view)  
Field  
Description  
View Name  
Subtree  
Displays the name of the view.  
Displays the MIB subtree as an OID string. A view subtree is the set  
of all MIB object instances which have a common Object Identifier  
prefix to their names.  
Mask  
Type  
Displays the bit mask.  
Displays whether a family of view subtreesis included or  
excluded from the MIB view.  
62 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/sys/snmpv3/access  
SNMPv3 Access Table Information  
The access control sub system provides authorization services.  
The vacmAccessTable maps a group name, security information, a context, and a message  
type, which could be the read or write type of operation or notification into a MIB view.  
The View-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for  
checking access rights of a group. This group's access rights are determined by a read-view, a  
write-view and a notify-view. The read-view represents the set of object instances authorized  
for the group while reading the objects. The write-view represents the set of object instances  
authorized for the group when writing objects. The notify-view represents the set of object  
instances authorized for the group when sending a notification.  
Group Name Model Level  
ReadV  
WriteV  
NotifyV  
---------- ------- ------------ ---------- ---------- ----------  
v1v2grp  
admingrp usm  
snmpv1 noAuthNoPriv iso  
authPriv iso  
iso  
iso  
v1v2only  
iso  
Table 4-6 SNMPv3 Access Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/access)  
Field  
Description  
Group Name  
Model  
Displays the name of group.  
Displays the security model used, for example, SNMPv1, or  
SNMPv2 or USM.  
Level  
Displays the minimum level of security required to gain rights of  
access. For example, noAuthNoPriv, authNoPriv, or auth-  
Priv.  
ReadV  
Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the read  
access.  
WriteV  
NotifyV  
Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the write  
access.  
Displays the Notify view to which this entry authorizes the notify  
access.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/sys/snmpv3/group  
SNMPv3 Group Table Information  
A group is a combination of security model and security name that defines the access rights  
assigned to all the security names belonging to that group. The group is identified by a group  
name.  
Sec Model  
User Name  
Group Name  
---------- ------------------------------- --------------------  
snmpv1  
usm  
usm  
v1v2only  
adminmd5  
adminsha  
v1v2grp  
admingrp  
admingrp  
Table 4-7 SNMPv3 Group Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/group)  
Field  
Description  
Sec Model  
Displays the security model used, which is any one of: USM,  
SNMPv1, SNMPv2, and SNMPv3.  
User Name  
Displays the name for the group.  
Group Name  
Displays the access name of the group.  
/info/sys/snmpv3/comm  
SNMPv3 Community Table Information  
This command displays the community table information stored in the SNMP engine.  
Index  
---------- ---------- -------------------- ----------  
trap1 public v1v2only v1v2trap  
Name  
User Name  
Tag  
Table 4-8 SNMPv3 Community Table Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/comm)  
Field  
Description  
Index  
Name  
Displays the unique index value of a row in this table  
Displays the community string, which represents the configuration.  
Displays the User Security Model (USM) user name.  
User Name  
Tag  
Displays the community tag. This tag specifies a set of transport  
endpoints from which a command responder application accepts  
management requests and to which a command responder applica-  
tion sends an SNMP trap.  
64 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/sys/snmpv3/taddr  
SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information  
This command displays the SNMPv3 target address table information, which is stored in the  
SNMP engine.  
Name  
---------- --------------- ---- ---------- ---------------  
trap1 47.81.25.66 162 v1v2trap v1v2param  
Transport Addr Port Taglist  
Params  
Table 4-9 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/  
snmpv3/taddr)  
Field  
Description  
Name  
Displays the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated with  
this snmpTargetAddrEntry.  
Transport Addr  
Port  
Displays the transport addresses.  
Displays the SNMP UDP port number.  
Taglist  
This column contains a list of tag values which are used to select tar-  
get addresses for a particular SNMP message.  
Params  
The value of this object identifies an entry in the snmpTargetParam-  
sTable. The identified entry contains SNMP parameters to be used  
when generating messages to be sent to this transport address.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/sys/snmpv3/tparam  
SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information  
Name  
--------------- -------- --------------  
v1v2param snmpv2c v1v2only  
MP Model User Name  
Sec Model Sec Level  
--------- ---------  
snmpv1  
noAuthNoPriv  
Table 4-10 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/  
tparam)  
Field  
Description  
Name  
Displays the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated with  
this snmpTargeParamsEntry.  
MP Model  
User Name  
Sec Model  
Displays the Message Processing Model used when generating  
SNMP messages using this entry.  
Displays the securityName, which identifies the entry on whose  
behalf SNMP messages will be generated using this entry.  
Displays the security model used when generating SNMP messages  
using this entry. The system may choose to return an inconsis-  
tentValue error if an attempt is made to set this variable to a  
value for a security model which the system does not support.  
Sec Level  
Displays the level of security used when generating SNMP mes-  
sages using this entry.  
66 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/sys/snmpv3/notify  
SNMPv3 Notify Table Information  
Name  
-------------------- --------------------  
v1v2trap v1v2trap  
Tag  
Table 4-11 SNMPv3 Notify Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/notify)  
Field  
Description  
Name  
The locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated with this  
snmpNotifyEntry.  
Tag  
This represents a single tag value which is used to select entries in  
the snmpTargetAddrTable. Any entry in the snmpTar-  
getAddrTablethat contains a tag value equal to the value of this  
entry, is selected. If this entry contains a value of zero length, no  
entries are selected.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/sys/snmpv3/dump  
SNMPv3 Dump Information  
usmUser Table:  
User Name  
Protocol  
-------------------------------- --------------------------------  
adminmd5  
adminsha  
v1v2only  
HMAC_MD5, DES PRIVACY  
HMAC_SHA, DES PRIVACY  
NO AUTH, NO PRIVACY  
vacmAccess Table:  
Group Name Model Level  
ReadV  
WriteV  
NotifyV  
---------- ------- ------------ ---------- ---------- ----------  
v1v2grp  
admingrp usm  
snmpv1 noAuthNoPriv iso  
authPriv iso  
iso  
iso  
v1v2only  
iso  
vacmViewTreeFamily Table:  
View Name Subtree  
-------------------- --------------- ------------  
Mask  
Type  
--------------  
included  
included  
excluded  
excluded  
excluded  
iso  
1.3  
v1v2only  
v1v2only  
v1v2only  
v1v2only  
1.3  
1.3.6.1.6.3.15  
1.3.6.1.6.3.16  
1.3.6.1.6.3.18  
vacmSecurityToGroup Table:  
Sec Model User Name  
Group Name  
---------- ------------------------------- -----------------------  
snmpv1  
usm  
usm  
v1v2only  
adminmd5  
adminsha  
v1v2grp  
admingrp  
admingrp  
snmpCommunity Table:  
Index Name  
User Name  
Tag  
---------- ---------- -------------------- ----------  
snmpNotify Table:  
Name  
Tag  
-------------------- --------------------  
snmpTargetAddr Table:  
Name  
Transport Addr Port Taglist  
Params  
---------- --------------- ---- ---------- ---------------  
snmpTargetParams Table:  
Name  
MP Model User Name  
Sec Model Sec Level  
-------------------- -------- ------------------ --------- -------  
68 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
info/sys/chassis  
BladeCenter Chassis Information  
IBM BladeCenter Chassis Related Information:  
Switch Module Bay = 1  
Chassis Type  
POST Results  
= Enterprise  
= 0xff  
Management Module Control -  
Default Configuration  
Skip Extended Memory Test  
Disable External Ports  
POST Diagnostics Control  
= FALSE  
= FALSE  
= FALSE  
= Normal Diagnostics  
Control Register  
Extended Control Register  
= 0x19  
= 0x00  
Management Module Status Reporting -  
Device PowerUp Complete  
Over Current Fault  
Fault LED  
= TRUE  
= FALSE  
= OFF  
Primary Temperature Warning = OK  
Secondary Temperature Warning = OK  
Status Register  
Extended Status Register  
= 0x40  
= 0x01  
Chassis information includes details about the BladeCenter chassis and management module  
settings.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/sys/general  
General System Information  
System Information at 0:16:42 Wed Jan 3, 2007  
Time zone: No timezone configured  
Nortel Layer 2-3 GbE Switch Module  
Switch is up 5 days, 2 hours, 16 minutes and 42 seconds.  
Last boot: 0:00:47 Wed Jan 3, 2007 (power cycle)  
MAC address: 00:11:58:ad:a3:00 Management IP Address (if 128):  
10.90.90.97  
Software Version 1.3.0 (FLASH image1), factory default configura-  
tion.  
PCBA Part Number:  
FAB Number:  
Serial Number:  
317857-A  
EL4512011  
YJ1WDW47N277  
Manufacturing Date:  
Hardware Revision:  
Board Revision:  
0
2
PLD Firmware Version: 1.0  
Temperature Sensor 1 (Warning): 33.0 C (Warn at 77.0 C/  
Recover at 72.0 C)  
Temperature Sensor 2 (Shutdown): 32.0 C (Warn at 90.0 C/  
Recover at 80.0 C)  
Switch is in I/O Module Bay 1  
NOTE The display of temperature will come up only if the temperature of any of the sensors  
exceeds the temperature threshold. There will be a warning from the software if any of the sen-  
sors exceeds this temperature threshold. The switch will shut down if the power supply over-  
heats.  
System information includes:  
System date and time  
Switch model  
Switch name and location  
Time of last boot  
MAC address of the switch management processor  
IP address of management IP interface  
Hardware version and part number  
70 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Software image file and version number  
Configuration name  
Log-in banner, if one is configured  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/sys/log  
Show Recent Syslog Messages  
Date  
Time  
Criticality level  
Message  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:41  
Jul 8 17:25:42  
Jul 8 17:25:42  
Jul 8 17:25:42  
Jul 8 17:25:42  
Jul 8 17:25:42  
Jul 8 17:25:42  
Jul 8 17:25:42  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
NOTICE  
system: link up on port INT1  
system: link up on port INT8  
system: link up on port INT7  
system: link up on port INT2  
system: link up on port INT1  
system: link up on port INT4  
system: link up on port INT3  
system: link up on port INT6  
system: link up on port INT5  
system: link up on port EXT4  
system: link up on port EXT1  
system: link up on port EXT3  
system: link up on port EXT2  
system: link up on port INT3  
system: link up on port INT2  
system: link up on port INT4  
system: link up on port INT3  
system: link up on port INT6  
system: link up on port INT5  
system: link up on port INT1  
system: link up on port INT6  
Each syslog message has a criticality level associated with it, included in text form as a prefix  
to the log message. One of eight different prefixes is used, depending on the condition that the  
administrator is being notified of, as shown below.  
EMERG: indicates the system is unusable  
ALERT: Indicates action should be taken immediately  
CRIT: Indicates critical conditions  
ERR: indicates error conditions or errored operations  
WARNING: indicates warning conditions  
NOTICE: indicates a normal but significant condition  
INFO: indicates an information message  
DEBUG: indicates a debug-level message  
72 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/sys/user  
User Status  
Usernames:  
user  
oper  
admin  
- enabled - offline  
- disabled - offline  
- Always Enabled - online 1 session  
Current User ID table:  
1: name paul , dis, cos user  
Current strong password settings:  
strong password status: disabled  
, password valid, offline  
This command displays the status of the configured usernames.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/l2  
Layer 2 Information  
[Layer 2 Menu]  
fdb  
- Forwarding Database Information Menu  
- Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu  
- Show 802.1x information  
lacp  
8021x  
stg  
- Show STP information  
cist  
- Show CIST information  
trunk  
vlan  
- Show Trunk Group information  
- Show VLAN information  
gen  
dump  
- Show general information  
- Dump all layer 2 information  
The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 4-12, with point-  
ers to where detailed information can be found.  
Table 4-12 Layer 2 Menu Options (/info/l2)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
fdb  
Displays the Forwarding Database Information Menu. For details, see page 76.  
lacp  
Displays the Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu. For details, see page 78.  
8021x  
Displays the 802.1x Information Menu. For details, see page 80.  
stg  
In addition to seeing if STG is enabled or disabled, you can view the following STG bridge infor-  
mation:  
Priority  
Hello interval  
Maximum age value  
Forwarding delay  
Aging time  
You can also see the following port-specific STG information:  
Port alias and priority  
Cost  
State  
For details, see page 82.  
74 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 4-12 Layer 2 Menu Options (/info/l2)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
cist  
Displays Common internal Spanning Tree (CIST) bridge information, including the following:  
Priority  
Hello interval  
Maximum age value  
Forwarding delay  
You can also view port-specific CIST information, including the following:  
Port number and priority  
Cost  
State  
For details, see page 88.  
trunk  
When trunk groups are configured, you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups.  
For details, see page 91.  
vlan  
Displays VLAN configuration information, including:  
VLAN Number  
VLAN Name  
Status  
Port membership of the VLAN  
For details, see page 91.  
gen  
Displays general Layer 2 information.  
dump  
Dumps all switch information available from the Layer 2 menu (10K or more, depending on your  
configuration).  
If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to  
capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/l2/fdb  
FDB Information  
[Forwarding Database Menu]  
find  
port  
- Show a single FDB entry by MAC address  
- Show FDB entries on a single port  
trunk - Show FDB entries on a single trunk  
vlan - Show FDB entries on a single VLAN  
state - Show FDB entries by state  
dump - Show all FDB entries  
The forwarding database (FDB) contains information that maps the media access control  
(MAC) address of each known device to the switch port where the device address was learned.  
The FDB also shows which other ports have seen frames destined for a particular MAC  
address.  
NOTE The master forwarding database supports up to 16K MAC address entries on the MP  
per switch.  
Table 4-13 FDB Information Menu Options (/info/l2/fdb)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
find <MAC address> [<VLAN>]  
Displays a single database entry by its MAC address. You are prompted to enter the MAC address  
of the device. Enter the MAC address using the format, xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. For example,  
08:00:20:12:34:56.  
You can also enter the MAC address using the format, xxxxxxxxxxxx.  
For example, 080020123456.  
port <port number or alias>  
Displays all FDB entries for a particular port.  
trunk <trunk number>  
Displays all FDB entries for a particular trunk.  
vlan <VLAN number (1-4095)>  
Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN.  
state unknown|forward|trunk  
Displays all FDB entries of a particular state.  
dump  
Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database. For more information, see page 77.  
76 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/l2/fdb/dump  
Show All FDB Information  
MAC address  
VLAN Port Trnk State  
----------------- ---- ---- ---- -----  
00:04:38:90:54:18  
00:09:6b:9b:01:5f  
00:09:6b:ca:26:ef 4095 MGT1  
00:0f:06:ec:3b:00 4095 MGT1  
00:11:43:c4:79:83  
00:11:f9:36:71:00 4095 MGT1  
00:13:0a:4d:3c:00 4095 MGT1  
1 EXT4  
1 INT13  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
1 EXT4  
An address that is in the forwarding (FWD) state, means that it has been learned by the switch.  
When in the trunking (TRK) state, the port field represents the trunk group number. If the state  
for the port is listed as unknown (UNK), the MAC address has not yet been learned by the  
switch, but has only been seen as a destination address. When an address is in the unknown  
state, no outbound port is indicated, although ports which reference the address as a destination  
will be listed under “Reference ports.”  
If the state for the port is listed as an interface (IF), the MAC address is for a standard VRRP  
virtual router.  
Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database  
To delete a MAC address from the forwarding database (FDB) or to clear the entire FDB, refer  
to “Forwarding Database Maintenance” on page 343.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/l2/lacp  
Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information  
[LACP Menu]  
aggr  
port  
dump  
- Show LACP aggregator information for the port  
- Show LACP port information  
- Show all LACP ports information  
Use these commands to display Link Aggregation Protocol (LACP) status information about  
each port on the GbE Switch Module.  
Table 4-14 LACP Menu Options (/info/l2/lacp)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
aggr  
Displays detailed information of the LACP aggregator used by the selected port.  
port  
Displays LACP information about the selected port.  
dump  
Displays a summary of LACP information. For details, see page 78.  
/info/l2/lacp/dump  
Show all LACP Information  
port lacp adminkey operkey selected prio  
attached trunk  
aggr  
----------------------------------------------------------------  
INT1 active  
INT2 active  
INT3 off  
INT4 off  
...  
30  
30  
19  
20  
30  
30  
19  
20  
y
y
n
n
32768  
32768  
32768  
32768  
17  
17  
--  
--  
19  
19  
--  
--  
LACP dump includes the following information for each external port in the GbESM:  
lacp  
Displays the port’s LACP mode (active, passive, or off)  
adminkey  
Displays the value of the port’s adminkey.  
operkey  
Shows the value of the port’s operational key.  
78 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Alteon OS Command Reference  
selected  
Indicates whether the port has been selected to be part of a Link Aggregation Group.  
prio  
Shows the value of the port priority.  
attached aggr  
Displays the aggregator associated with each port.  
trunk  
This value represents the LACP trunk group number.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/l2/8021x  
802.1x Information  
System capability : Authenticator  
System status  
: disabled  
Protocol version : 1  
Authenticator  
PAE State  
Backend  
Auth State  
Port  
Auth Mode  
Auth Status  
----- ------------ ------------ -------------- ----------  
INT1 force-auth  
*INT2 force-auth  
*INT3 force-auth  
*INT4 force-auth  
*INT5 force-auth  
*INT6 force-auth  
*INT7 force-auth  
*INT8 force-auth  
INT9 force-auth  
INT10 force-auth  
*INT11 force-auth  
*INT12 force-auth  
*INT13 force-auth  
*INT14 force-auth  
MGT1 force-auth  
*MGT2 force-auth  
EXT1 force-auth  
EXT2 force-auth  
*EXT3 force-auth  
EXT4 force-auth  
EXT5 force-auth  
EXT6 force-auth  
authorized  
authorized  
authorized  
authorized  
authorized  
authorized  
authorized  
authorized  
authorized  
authorized  
authorized  
authorized  
authorized  
authorized  
authorized  
authorized  
authorized  
authorized  
authorized  
authorized  
authorized  
authorized  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
initialize  
------------------------------------------------------------------  
* - Port down or disabled  
NOTE The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens  
displayed by your system. Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you  
are using and the firmware versions and options that are installed.  
80 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
The following table describes the IEEE 802.1x parameters.  
Table 4-15 802.1x Parameter Descriptions (/info/l2/8021x)  
Parameter  
Description  
Port  
Displays each port’s alias.  
Auth Mode  
Displays the Access Control authorization mode for the port. The Authoriza-  
tion mode can be one of the following:  
force-unauth  
auto  
force-auth  
Auth Status  
Displays the current authorization status of the port, either authorized or  
unauthorized.  
Authenticator  
PAE State  
Displays the Authenticator Port Access Entity State. The PAE state can be  
one of the following:  
initialize  
disconnected  
connecting  
authenticating  
authenticated  
aborting  
held  
forceAuth  
Backend  
Displays the Backend Authorization State. The Backend Authorization state  
Auth State  
can be one of the following:  
initialize  
request  
response  
success  
fail  
timeout  
idle  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/l2/stg  
Spanning Tree Information  
------------------------------------------------------------------  
upfast disabled, update 40  
------------------------------------------------------------------  
Spanning Tree Group 1: On (STP/PVST+)  
VLANs: 1 10  
Current Root:  
8000 00:16:60:f9:1e:00  
Path-Cost Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel  
0 (null) 20 15  
2
Parameters: Priority Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging  
32768  
2
20  
15  
300  
Port Priority  
---- --------  
Cost  
----  
0
FastFwd  
--------  
State  
-------  
Designated Bridge  
--------------------- --------  
Des Port  
INT1  
INT2  
INT3  
INT4  
INT5  
INT6  
INT7  
INT8  
INT9  
INT10  
INT11  
INT12  
INT13  
INT14  
EXT1  
EXT2  
EXT3  
EXT4  
EXT5  
EXT6  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
FORWARDING *  
FORWARDING *  
FORWARDING *  
FORWARDING *  
FORWARDING *  
FORWARDING *  
FORWARDING *  
FORWARDING *  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
2
DISABLED  
*
FORWARDING *  
FORWARDING *  
FORWARDING *  
FORWARDING *  
FORWARDING *  
DISABLED  
0
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
DISABLED  
FORWARDING  
FORWARDING  
DISABLED  
8000-00:16:60:f9:1e:00  
8000-00:16:60:f9:1e:00  
8013  
8014  
4!  
2
2
DISABLED  
* = STP turned off for this port.  
! = Automatic path cost.  
NOTE The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens  
displayed by your system. Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you  
are using and the firmware versions and options that are installed.  
82 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
The switch software uses the IEEE 802.1d Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). In addition to seeing  
if STG is enabled or disabled, you can view the following STG bridge information:  
Priority  
Hello interval  
Maximum age value  
Forwarding delay  
Aging time  
You can also see the following port-specific STG information:  
Slot number  
Port alias and priority  
Cost  
State  
The following table describes the STG parameters.  
Table 4-16 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions  
Parameter  
Description  
Priority(bridge)  
The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will  
become the STG root bridge.  
Hello  
The hello time parameter specifies, in seconds, how often the root bridge  
transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). Any bridge that  
is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value.  
MaxAge  
The maximum age parameter specifies, in seconds, the maximum time the  
bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit  
before it reconfigure the STG network.  
FwdDel  
The forward delay parameter specifies, in seconds, the amount of time that a  
bridge port has to wait before it changes from learning state to forwarding  
state.  
Aging  
The aging time parameter specifies, in seconds, the amount of time the  
bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the  
station from the Forwarding Database.  
priority(port)  
The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the  
designated port. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports con-  
nected to a single segment, the port with the lowest port priority becomes the  
designated port for the segment.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 4-16 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions (Continued)  
Parameter  
Description  
Cost  
The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for  
a segment. Generally speaking, the faster the port, the lower the path cost. A  
setting of 0 indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after  
the link speed has been auto negotiated.  
State  
The state field shows the current state of the port. The state field can be either  
BLOCKING, LISTENING, LEARNING, FORWARDING, or DISABLED.  
Designated  
Bridge  
The Designated Bridge shows information about the bridge connected to  
each port, if applicable. Information includes the priority (hex) and MAC  
address of the Designated Bridge.  
Designated Port  
The identifier of the port on the Designated Bridge to which this port is con-  
nected.  
84 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/l2/stg  
RSTP/MSTP Information  
Spanning Tree Group 1: On (RSTP)  
VLANs: 1  
Current Root:  
Path-Cost Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel  
8000 00:11:58:ae:39:00  
0
EXT4  
2
20  
15  
Parameters: Priority Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging  
32768 20 15 300  
2
Port Prio Cost  
State Role Designated Bridge  
Des Port  
Type  
----- ---- --------- ----- ---- ---------------------- -------- -----  
INT1  
INT2  
INT3  
INT4  
INT5  
INT6  
INT7  
INT8  
INT9  
INT10  
INT11  
INT12  
INT13  
INT14  
EXT1  
EXT2  
EXT3  
EXT4  
EXT5  
EXT6  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 DSB *  
0 DSB *  
0 FWD *  
0 DSB *  
0 DSB *  
0 DSB *  
0 DSB *  
0 DSB *  
0 DSB *  
0 DSB *  
0 DSB *  
0 DSB *  
0 DSB *  
0 DSB *  
0
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
2000 FWD  
2000 DISC BKUP 8000-00:11:58:ae:39:00  
2000 FWD DESG 8000-00:11:58:ae:39:00  
20000 DISC BKUP 8000-00:11:58:ae:39:00  
2000 FWD  
2000 FWD  
DESG 8000-00:11:58:ae:39:00  
8011  
8011  
8013  
8013  
8011  
8011  
P2P  
P2P  
P2P  
Shared  
P2P  
P2P  
DESG 8000-00:11:58:ae:39:00  
DESG 8000-00:11:58:ae:39:00  
* = STP turned off for this port.  
NOTE The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens  
displayed by your system. Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you  
are using and the firmware versions and options that are installed.  
The switch software can be set to use the IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)  
or the IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP).  
If RSTP/MSTP is turned on (see page 225), you can view RSTP/MSTP bridge information for  
the Spanning Tree Group, including the following:  
Priority  
Hello interval  
Maximum age value  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Forwarding delay  
Aging time  
You can view port-specific RSTP information, including the following:  
Port number and priority  
Cost  
State  
The following table describes the STP parameters in RSTP or MSTP mode.  
Table 4-17 RSTP/MSTP Parameter Descriptions  
Parameter  
Description  
Current Root  
The Current Root shows information about the root bridge for the Spanning  
Tree. Information includes the priority (hex) and MAC address of the root.  
Priority(bridge)  
The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will  
become the STP root bridge.  
Hello  
The hello time parameter specifies, in seconds, how often the root bridge  
transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). Any bridge that  
is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value.  
MaxAge  
FwdDel  
Aging  
The maximum age parameter specifies, in seconds, the maximum time the  
bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit  
before it reconfigures the STP network.  
The forward delay parameter specifies, in seconds, the amount of time that a  
bridge port has to wait before it changes from learning state to forwarding  
state.  
The aging time parameter specifies, in seconds, the amount of time the  
bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the  
station from the Forwarding Database.  
Prio(port)  
The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the  
designated port. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports con-  
nected to a single segment, the port with the lowest port priority becomes the  
designated port for the segment.  
Cost  
The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for  
a segment. Generally speaking, the faster the port, the lower the path cost. A  
setting of 0 indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after  
the link speed has been auto negotiated.  
State  
The State field shows the current state of the port. The State field in RSTP or  
MSTP mode can be one of the following: Discarding (DISC),  
Learning (LRN), Forwarding (FWD), or Disabled (DSB).  
86 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 4-17 RSTP/MSTP Parameter Descriptions (Continued)  
Parameter  
Description  
Role  
The Role field shows the current role of this port in the Spanning Tree. The  
port role can be one of the following: Designated (DESG), Root (ROOT),  
Alternate (ALTN), Backup (BKUP), Disabled (DSB), Master (MAST), or  
Unknown (UNK).  
Designated  
Bridge  
The Designated Bridge shows information about the bridge connected to  
each port, if applicable. Information includes the priority (hex) and MAC  
address of the Designated Bridge.  
Designated Port  
Type  
The port ID of the port on the Designated Bridge to which this port is con-  
nected.  
Type of link connected to the port, and whether the port is an edge port.  
Link type values are AUTO, P2P, or SHARED.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/l2/cist  
Common Internal Spanning Tree Information  
Common Internal Spanning Tree:  
VLANs: 2-4094  
Current Root:  
Path-Cost Port MaxAge FwdDel  
8000 00:11:58:ae:39:00  
0
0
20  
15  
Cist Regional Root:  
8000 00:11:58:ae:39:00  
Path-Cost  
0
Parameters: Priority MaxAge FwdDel Hops  
32768 20 15 20  
Port Prio Cost State Role Designated Bridge  
----- ---- --------- ----- ---- ---------------------- -------- ----- ----  
Des Port Hello Type  
INT1  
INT2  
INT3  
INT4  
INT5  
INT6  
INT7  
INT8  
INT9  
INT10  
INT11  
INT12  
INT13  
INT14  
MGT1  
MGT2  
EXT1  
EXT2  
EXT3  
EXT4  
EXT5  
EXT6  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 DSB *  
0 DSB *  
0 FWD *  
0 DSB *  
0 DSB *  
0 DSB *  
0 DSB *  
0 DSB *  
0 DSB *  
0 DSB *  
0 DSB *  
0 DSB *  
0 DSB *  
0 DSB *  
0 FWD *  
0 DSB *  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
20000 FWD  
20000 DISC BKUP 8000-00:11:58:ae:39:00  
20000 FWD DESG 8000-00:11:58:ae:39:00  
20000 DISC BKUP 8000-00:11:58:ae:39:00  
20000 FWD  
20000 FWD  
DESG 8000-00:11:58:ae:39:00  
8011  
8011  
8013  
8013  
8011  
8011  
2
2
2
2
2
2
P2P  
P2P  
P2P  
Shared  
P2P  
P2P  
DESG 8000-00:11:58:ae:39:00  
DESG 8000-00:11:58:ae:39:00  
* = STP turned off for this port.  
NOTE The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens  
displayed by your system. Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you  
are using and the firmware versions and options that are installed.  
In addition to seeing if Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) is enabled or disabled, you can  
view CIST bridge information, including the following:  
Priority  
88 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Maximum age value  
Forwarding delay  
You can view port-specific CIST information, including the following:  
Port number and priority  
Cost  
Link type and Port type  
The following table describes the CIST parameters.  
Table 4-18 CIST Parameter Descriptions  
Parameter  
Description  
CIST Root  
The CIST Root shows information about the root bridge for the Common  
Internal Spanning Tree (CIST). Values on this row of information refer to the  
CIST root.  
CIST Regional Root  
Priority(bridge)  
Hello  
The CIST Regional Root shows information about the root bridge for this  
MSTP region. Values on this row of information refer to the regional root.  
The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will  
become the STP root bridge.  
The hello time parameter specifies, in seconds, how often the root bridge  
transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). Any bridge that  
is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value.  
MaxAge  
The maximum age parameter specifies, in seconds, the maximum time the  
bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit  
before it reconfigure the STP network.  
FwdDel  
The forward delay parameter specifies, in seconds, the amount of time that a  
bridge port has to wait before it changes from learning state to forwarding  
state.  
priority(port)  
The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the  
designated port. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports con-  
nected to a single segment, the port with the lowest port priority becomes the  
designated port for the segment.  
Cost  
The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for  
a segment. Generally speaking, the faster the port, the lower the path cost. A  
setting of 0 indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after  
the link speed has been auto negotiated.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 4-18 CIST Parameter Descriptions  
Parameter  
Description  
State  
The state field shows the current state of the port. The state field can be either  
Discarding (DISC), Learning (LRN), or Forwarding  
(FWD).  
Role  
The Role field shows the current role of this port in the Spanning Tree. The  
port role can be one of the following: Designated (DESG), Root (ROOT),  
Alternate (ALTN), Backup (BKUP), Disabled (DSB), Master (MAST), or  
Unknown (UNK).  
Designated  
Bridge  
The Designated Bridge shows information about the bridge connected to  
each port, if applicable. Information includes the priority (hex) and MAC  
address of the Designated Bridge.  
Designated Port  
Type  
The port ID of the port on the Designated Bridge to which this port is con-  
nected.  
Type of link connected to the port, and whether the port is an edge port.  
Link type values are AUTO, P2P, or SHARED.  
90 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/l2/trunk  
Trunk Group Information  
Trunk group 1, port state:  
EXT1: STG 1 forwarding  
EXT2: STG 1 forwarding  
When trunk groups are configured, you can view the state of each port in the various trunk  
groups.  
NOTE If Spanning Tree Protocol on any port in the trunk group is set to forwarding, the  
remaining ports in the trunk group will also be set to forwarding.  
/info/l2/vlan  
VLAN Information  
VLAN  
Name  
Status  
Ports  
---- -------------------------------- ------ --------------------  
1
Default VLAN  
VLAN 10  
VLAN 10  
ena  
ena  
ena  
ena  
INT1-INT14 EXT1-EXT6  
INT1  
EXT3  
EXT4  
10  
10  
30  
VLAN 30  
4095 Mgmt VLAN  
ena  
INT1-INT14 MGT1 MGT2  
Private-VLAN Type  
Mapped-To Status  
Ports  
------------ --------- ---------- ---------- -----------------  
1000  
1001  
primary  
1001-1014 ena  
EXT1 EXT2  
INT1  
isolated 1000  
ena  
1002  
1003  
community 1000  
community 1000  
ena  
ena  
INT2  
INT3  
NOTE The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens  
displayed by your system. Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you  
are using and the firmware versions and options that are installed.  
This information display includes all configured VLANs and all member ports that have an  
active link state. Port membership is represented in slot/port format.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Alteon OS Command Reference  
VLAN information includes:  
VLAN Number  
VLAN Name  
Status  
Port membership of the VLAN  
Protocol-based VLAN information  
Whether the VLAN is a GVRP dynamic VLAN  
Private VLAN configuration  
92 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/l3  
Layer 3 Information  
[Layer 3 Menu]  
route  
arp  
- IP Routing Information Menu  
- ARP Information Menu  
bgp  
- BGP Information Menu  
ospf  
rip  
ip  
- OSPF Routing Information Menu  
- RIP Routing Information Menu  
- Show IP information  
igmp  
vrrp  
dump  
- Show IGMP Snooping Multicast Group information  
- Show Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol information  
- Dump all layer 3 information  
The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 4-19, with point-  
ers to detailed information.  
Table 4-19 Layer 3 Menu Options (/info/l3)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
route  
Displays the IP Routing Menu. Using the options of this menu, the system displays the following  
for each configured or learned route:  
Route destination IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address  
Type of route  
Tag indicating origin of route  
Metric for RIP tagged routes, specifying the number of hops to the destination (1-15 hops, or 16  
for infinite hops)  
The IP interface that the route uses  
For details, see page 95.  
arp  
Displays the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Information Menu. For details, see page 98.  
bgp  
Displays BGP Information Menu. To view menu options, see page 100.  
ospf  
Displays OSPF routing Information Menu. For details, see page 102.  
rip  
Displays Routing Information Protocol Menu. For details, see page 107.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 4-19 Layer 3 Menu Options (/info/l3)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
ip  
Displays IP Information. For details, see page 108.  
IP information, includes:  
IP interface information: Interface number, IP address, subnet mask, VLAN number, and opera-  
tional status.  
Default gateway information: Metric for selecting which configured gateway to use, gateway  
number, IP address, and health status  
IP forwarding information: Enable status, lnetand lmask  
Port status  
igmp  
Displays IGMP Information Menu. For details, see page 109.  
vrrp  
Displays the VRRP Information Menu. For details, see page 112.  
dump  
Dumps all switch information available from the Layer 3 Menu (10K or more, depending on your  
configuration).  
If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to  
capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.  
94 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/l3/route  
IP Routing Information  
[IP Routing Menu]  
find  
gw  
type  
tag  
if  
- Show a single route by destination IP address  
- Show routes to a single gateway  
- Show routes of a single type  
- Show routes of a single tag  
- Show routes on a single interface  
- Show all routes  
dump  
Using the commands listed below, you can display all or a portion of the IP routes currently  
held in the switch.  
Table 4-20 Route Information Menu Options (/info/l3/route)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
find <IP address (such as 192.4.17.101)>  
Displays a single route by destination IP address.  
gw <default gateway address (such as 192.4.17.44)>  
Displays routes to a single gateway.  
type indirect|direct|local|broadcast|martian|multicast  
Displays routes of a single type. For a description of IP routing types, see Table 4-21 on page 96.  
tag fixed|static|addr|rip|ospf|bgp|broadcast|martian|multicast  
Displays routes of a single tag. For a description of IP routing types, see Table 4-22 on page 97.  
if <interface number (1-128)>  
Displays routes on a single interface.  
dump  
Displays all routes configured in the switch. For more information, see page 96.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/l3/route/dump  
Show All IP Route Information  
Status code: * - best  
Destination  
--------------- --------------- --------------- --------- --------- ---- --  
Mask  
Gateway  
Type  
Tag  
Metr If  
* 11.0.0.0  
* 11.0.0.1  
255.0.0.0  
255.255.255.255 11.0.0.1  
11.0.0.1  
direct  
local  
fixed  
addr  
211  
211  
* 11.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 11.255.255.255 broadcast broadcast  
211  
* 12.0.0.0  
* 12.0.0.1  
255.0.0.0  
255.255.255.255 12.0.0.1  
12.0.0.1  
direct  
local  
fixed  
addr  
12  
12  
* 12.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 12.255.255.255 broadcast broadcast  
12  
* 13.0.0.0  
* 47.0.0.0  
255.0.0.0  
255.0.0.0  
11.0.0.2  
47.133.88.1  
indirect ospf  
indirect static  
2 211  
24  
* 47.133.88.0  
255.255.255.0 47.133.88.46  
direct  
fixed  
24  
* 172.30.52.223 255.255.255.255 172.30.52.223 broadcast broadcast  
2
* 224.0.0.0  
* 224.0.0.5  
224.0.0.0  
255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
martian martian  
multicast addr  
The following table describes the Typeparameters.  
Table 4-21 IP Routing Type Parameters  
Parameter  
Description  
indirect  
The next hop to the host or subnet destination will be forwarded through a  
router at the Gatewayaddress.  
direct  
Packets will be delivered to a destination host or subnet attached to the  
switch.  
local  
Indicates a route to one of the switch’s IP interfaces.  
Indicates a broadcast route.  
broadcast  
martian  
The destination belongs to a host or subnet which is filtered out. Packets to  
this destination are discarded.  
multicast  
Indicates a multicast route.  
96 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Alteon OS Command Reference  
The following table describes the Tagparameters.  
Table 4-22 IP Routing Tag Parameters  
Parameter  
fixed  
Description  
The address belongs to a host or subnet attached to the switch.  
static  
The address is a static route which has been configured on the GbE Switch  
Module.  
addr  
The address belongs to one of the switch’s IP interfaces.  
The address was learned by the Routing Information Protocol (RIP).  
The address was learned by Open Shortest Path First (OSPF).  
The address was learned via Border Gateway Protocol (BGP)  
Indicates a broadcast address.  
rip  
ospf  
bgp  
broadcast  
martian  
multicast  
The address belongs to a filtered group.  
Indicates a multicast address.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/l3/arp  
ARP Information  
[Address Resolution Protocol Menu]  
find  
vlan  
addr  
dump  
- Show a single ARP entry by IP address  
- Show ARP entries on a single port  
- Show ARP entries on a single VLAN  
- Show ARP address list  
- Show all ARP entries  
The ARP information includes IP address and MAC address of each entry, address status flags  
(see Table 4-23 on page 98), VLAN and port for the address, and port referencing information.  
Table 4-23 ARP Information Menu Options (/info/l3/arp)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
find <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101>  
Displays a single ARP entry by IP address.  
port <port alias or number>  
Displays the ARP entries on a single port.  
vlan <VLAN number (1-4095)>  
Displays the ARP entries on a single VLAN.  
addr  
Displays the ARP address list: IP address, IP mask, MAC address, and VLAN flags.  
dump  
Displays all ARP entries. including:  
IP address and MAC address of each entry  
Address status flag (see below)  
The VLAN and port to which the address belongs  
The ports which have referenced the address (empty if no port has routed traffic to the IP  
address shown)  
For more information, see page 99.  
98 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/l3/arp/dump  
Show All ARP Entry Information  
IP address  
Flags  
MAC address  
VLAN Port  
--------------- ----- ----------------- ---- ----  
47.80.22.1  
00:e0:16:7c:28:86  
00:03:42:fa:3b:30  
00:c0:4f:60:3e:c1  
1 INT6  
1
1 INT6  
47.80.23.243  
47.80.23.245  
190.10.10.1  
P
P
00:03:42:fa:3b:30 10  
NOTE If you have VMA turned on, the referenced port will be the designated port. If you have  
VMA turned off, the designated port will be the normal ingress port.  
The Flagfield is interpreted as follows:  
Table 4-24 ARP Dump Flag Parameters  
Flag  
P
Description  
Permanent entry created for switch IP interface.  
Indirect route entry.  
R
U
Unresolved ARP entry. The MAC address has not been learned.  
/info/l3/arp/addr  
ARP Address List Information  
IP address  
--------------- --------------- ----------------- ---- -----  
205.178.18.66 255.255.255.255 00:70:cf:03:20:04  
205.178.50.1 255.255.255.255 00:70:cf:03:20:06 1  
205.178.18.64 255.255.255.255 00:70:cf:03:20:05 1  
IP mask  
MAC address  
VLAN Flags  
P
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/l3/bgp  
BGP Information  
[BGP Menu]  
peer  
- Show all BGP peers  
summary - Show all BGP peers in summary  
dump  
- Show BGP routing table  
Table 4-25 BGP Peer Information Menu Options (/info/l3/bgp))  
Command Syntax and Usage  
peer  
Displays BGP peer information. See page 100 for a sample output.  
summary  
Displays peer summary information such as AS, message received, message sent, up/down, state.  
See page 101 for a sample output.  
dump  
Displays the BGP routing table. See page 101 for a sample output.  
/info/l3/bgp/peer  
BGP Peer information  
Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/peerprovides.  
BGP Peer Information:  
3: 2.1.1.1  
, version 0, TTL 1  
Remote AS: 0, Local AS: 0, Link type: IBGP  
Remote router ID: 0.0.0.0,  
Local router ID: 1.1.201.5  
BGP status: idle, Old status: idle  
Total received packets: 0, Total sent packets: 0  
Received updates: 0, Sent updates: 0  
Keepalive: 0, Holdtime: 0, MinAdvTime: 60  
LastErrorCode: unknown(0), LastErrorSubcode: unspecified(0)  
Established state transitions: 0  
4: 2.1.1.4  
, version 0, TTL 1  
Remote AS: 0, Local AS: 0, Link type: IBGP  
Remote router ID: 0.0.0.0,  
Local router ID: 1.1.201.5  
BGP status: idle, Old status: idle  
Total received packets: 0, Total sent packets: 0  
Received updates: 0, Sent updates: 0  
Keepalive: 0, Holdtime: 0, MinAdvTime: 60  
LastErrorCode: unknown(0), LastErrorSubcode: unspecified(0)  
Established state transitions: 0  
100 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/l3/bgp/summary  
BGP Summary information  
Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/summaryprovides.  
BGP Peer Summary Information:  
Peer  
V
AS  
MsgRcvd MsgSent Up/Down State  
--------------- - -------- -------- -------- -------- ----------  
1: 205.178.23.142 4  
2: 205.178.15.148 0  
142  
148  
113  
121 00:00:28 established  
0 never connect  
0
/info/l3/bgp/dump  
Show all BGP Information  
Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/dumpprovides.  
>> BGP# dump  
Status codes: * valid, > best, i - internal  
Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete  
Network  
Next Hop  
Metr LcPrf Wght Path  
--------------- --------------- ----- ---- ----- --------------  
*> 10.0.0.0  
*>i205.178.15.0  
*
*> 205.178.17.0  
13.0.0.0  
205.178.21.147  
0.0.0.0  
205.178.21.147  
205.178.21.147  
205.178.21.147  
1
256 147 148 i  
0 i  
128 147 i  
128 147 i  
256 147 {35} ?  
1
1
1
The 13.0.0.0 is filtered out by rrmap; or, a loop detected.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/l3/ospf  
OSPF Information  
[OSPF Information Menu]  
general - Show general information  
aindex - Show area(s) information  
if - Show interface(s) information  
virtual - Show details of virtual links  
nbr - Show neighbor(s) information  
dbase - Database Menu  
sumaddr - Show summary address list  
nsumadd - Show NSSA summary address list  
routes - Show OSPF routes  
dump  
- Show OSPF information  
Table 4-26 OSPF Information Menu options (/info/l3/ospf)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
general  
Displays general OSPF information. See page 103 for a sample output.  
aindex <area index [0-2]>  
Displays area information for a particular area index. If no parameter is supplied, it displays area  
information for all the areas.  
if <interface number [1-128]>  
Displays interface information for a particular interface. If no parameter is supplied, it displays  
information for all the interfaces. See page 104 for a sample output.  
virtual  
Displays information about all the configured virtual links.  
nbr <nbr router-id [A.B.C.D]>  
Displays the status of a neighbor with a particular router ID. If no router ID is supplied, it displays  
the information about all the current neighbors.  
dbase  
Displays OSPF database menu. To view menu options, see page 104.  
sumaddr <area index [0-2]>  
Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to non-NSSA areas.  
nsumadd <area index [0-2]>  
Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to NSSA areas.  
routes  
Displays OSPF routing table. See page 106 for a sample output.  
102 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 4-26 OSPF Information Menu options (/info/l3/ospf)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
dump  
Displays the OSPF information.  
/info/l3/ospf/general  
OSPF General Information  
OSPF Version 2  
Router ID: 10.10.10.1  
Started at 1663 and the process uptime is 4626  
Area Border Router: yes, AS Boundary Router: no  
LS types supported are 6  
External LSA count 0  
External LSA checksum sum 0x0  
Number of interfaces in this router is 2  
Number of virtual links in this router is 1  
16 new lsa received and 34 lsa originated from this router  
Total number of entries in the LSDB 10  
Database checksum sum 0x0  
Total neighbors are 1, of which  
2 are >=INIT state,  
2 are >=EXCH state,  
2 are =FULL state  
Number of areas is 2, of which 3-transit 0-nssa  
Area Id : 0.0.0.0  
Authentication : none  
Import ASExtern : yes  
Number of times SPF ran : 8  
Area Border Router count : 2  
AS Boundary Router count : 0  
LSA count : 5  
LSA Checksum sum : 0x2237B  
Summary : noSummary  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/l3/ospf/if  
OSPF Interface Information  
Ip Address 10.10.12.1, Area 0.0.0.1, Admin Status UP  
Router ID 10.10.10.1, State DR, Priority 1  
Designated Router (ID) 10.10.10.1, Ip Address 10.10.12.1  
Backup Designated Router (ID) 10.10.14.1, Ip Address 10.10.12.2  
Timer intervals, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 1663, Retransmit 5,  
Poll interval 0, Transit delay 1  
Neighbor count is 1 If Events 4, Authentication type none  
/info/l3/ospf/dbase  
OSPF Database Information  
[OSPF Database Menu]  
advrtr - LS Database info for an Advertising Router  
asbrsum - ASBR Summary LS Database info  
dbsumm - LS Database summary  
ext  
nw  
- External LS Database info  
- Network LS Database info  
- NSSA External LS Database info  
- Router LS Database info  
- Self Originated LS Database info  
- Network-Summary LS Database info  
- All  
nssa  
rtr  
self  
summ  
all  
Table 4-27 OSPF Database Information Menu Options (/info/l3/ospf/dbase)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
advrtr <router-id (A.B.C.D)>  
Takes advertising router as a parameter. Displays all the Link State Advertisements (LSAs) in the  
LS database that have the advertising router with the specified router ID, for example: 20.1.1.1.  
asbrsum <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)> | <link_state_id (A.B.C.D> | <self>  
Displays ASBR summary LSAs. The usage of this command is as follows:  
a) asbrsum adv-rtr 20.1.1.1displays ASBR summary LSAs having the advertising  
router 20.1.1.1.  
b) asbrsum link_state_id 10.1.1.1displays ASBR summary LSAs having the link  
state ID 10.1.1.1.  
c) asbrsum self displays the self advertised ASBR summary LSAs.  
d) asbrsumwith no parameters displays all the ASBR summary LSAs.  
104 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 4-27 OSPF Database Information Menu Options (/info/l3/ospf/dbase)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
dbsumm  
Displays the following information about the LS database in a table format:  
a) the number of LSAs of each type in each area.  
b) the total number of LSAs for each area.  
c) the total number of LSAs for each LSA type for all areas combined.  
d) the total number of LSAs for all LSA types for all areas combined.  
No parameters are required.  
ext <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)>|<link_state_id (A.B.C.D>|<self>  
Displays the AS-external (type 5) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs. The  
usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.  
nw <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)>|<link_state_id (A.B.C.D>|<self>  
Displays the network (type 2) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSA.network LS  
database. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.  
nssa <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)>|<link_state_id (A.B.C.D>|<self>  
Displays the NSSA (type 7) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs. The usage  
of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.  
rtr <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)>|<link_state_id (A.B.C.D>|<self>  
Displays the router (type 1) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs. The usage  
of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.  
self  
Displays all the self-advertised LSAs. No parameters are required.  
summ <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)>|<link_state_id (A.B.C.D>|<self>  
Displays the network summary (type 3) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.  
The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.  
all  
Displays all the LSAs.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/l3/ospf/routes  
OSPF Information Route Codes  
Codes: IA - OSPF inter area,  
N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2  
E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2  
IA 10.10.0.0/16 via 200.1.1.2  
IA 40.1.1.0/28 via 20.1.1.2  
IA 80.1.1.0/24 via 200.1.1.2  
IA 100.1.1.0/24 via 20.1.1.2  
IA 140.1.1.0/27 via 20.1.1.2  
IA 150.1.1.0/28 via 200.1.1.2  
E2 172.18.1.1/32 via 30.1.1.2  
E2 172.18.1.2/32 via 30.1.1.2  
E2 172.18.1.3/32 via 30.1.1.2  
E2 172.18.1.4/32 via 30.1.1.2  
E2 172.18.1.5/32 via 30.1.1.2  
E2 172.18.1.6/32 via 30.1.1.2  
E2 172.18.1.7/32 via 30.1.1.2  
E2 172.18.1.8/32 via 30.1.1.2  
106 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/l3/rip  
Routing Information Protocol Information  
[RIP Information Menu]  
routes - Show RIP routes  
dump  
- Show RIP user's configuration  
Use this menu to view information about the Routing Information Protocol (RIP)  
configuration and statistics.  
Table 4-28 RIP Information Menu Options (/info/l3/rip)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
routes  
Displays RIP routes. For more information, see page 107.  
dump <interface number or zero for all IFs)>  
Displays RIP user’s configuration. For more information, see page 107.  
/info/l3/rip/routes  
RIP Routes Information  
>> IP Routing# /info/l3/rip/routes  
3.0.0.0/8 via 30.1.1.11 metric 4  
4.0.0.0/16 via 30.1.1.11 metric 16  
10.0.0.0/8 via 30.1.1.2 metric 3  
20.0.0.0/8 via 30.1.1.2 metric 2  
This table contains all dynamic routes learnt through RIP, including the routes that are under-  
going garbage collection with metric = 16. This table does not contain directly connected  
routes and locally configured static routes.  
/info/l3/rip/dump<interface number>  
Show RIP User Configuration  
RIP USER CONFIGURATION :  
RIP on updat 30  
RIP Interface 2 : 102.1.1.1,  
enabled  
version 2, listen enabled, supply enabled, default none  
poison disabled, trigg enabled, mcast enabled, metric 1  
auth none,key none  
RIP Interface 3 : 103.1.1.1,  
enabled  
version 2, listen enabled, supply enabled, default none  
poison disabled, trigg enabled, mcast enabled, metric 1  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/l3/ip  
IP Information  
IP information:  
AS number 0  
Interface information:  
1: 10.200.30.3  
128: 10.90.90.97  
255.255.0.0  
255.255.255.0 10.90.90.255,  
10.200.255.255, vlan 1, up  
vlan 4095, up  
Default gateway information: metric strict  
1: 10.200.1.1, vlan any, up  
Current BOOTP relay settings: OFF  
0.0.0.0, 0.0.0.0  
Current IP forwarding settings: ON, dirbr disabled, noicmprd dis-  
abled  
Current network filter settings:  
none  
Current route map settings:  
IP information includes:  
IP interface information: Interface number, IP address, subnet mask, broadcast address,  
VLAN number, and operational status.  
Default gateway information: Metric for selecting which configured gateway to use, gate-  
way number, IP address, and health status  
BootP relay settings  
IP forwarding settings, including the forwarding status of directed broadcasts, and the  
status of ICMP re-directs  
Network filter settings  
Route map settings  
108 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/l3/igmp  
IGMP Multicast Group Information  
[IGMP Multicast Menu]  
mrouter - Show IGMP Snooping Multicast Router Port information  
find  
port  
trunk  
- Show a single group by IP group address  
- Show groups on a single vlan  
- Show groups on a single port  
- Show groups on a single trunk  
detail - Show detail of a single group by IP group address  
dump - Show all groups  
Table 4-29 describes the commands used to display information about IGMP groups learned  
by the switch.  
Table 4-29 IGMP Multicast Group Information Menu Options (/info/l3/igmp)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
mrouter  
Displays IGMP Multicast Router menu. To view menu options, see page 110.  
find <IP address>  
Displays a single IGMP multicast group by its IP address.  
vlan <VLAN number>  
Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single VLAN.  
port <port number or alias>  
Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single port.  
trunk <Trunk Group number>  
Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single trunk group.  
detail <IP address>  
Displays details about IGMP multicast groups, including source and timer information.  
dump  
Displays information for all multicast groups.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Alteon OS Command Reference  
info/l3/igmp/dump  
IGMP Group Information  
Note: Local groups (224.0.0.x) are not snooped/relayed and will not appear.  
Source  
Group  
VLAN  
Port  
Version  
Mode Expires Fwd  
-------------- --------------- ------- ------ -------- ----- ------- ---  
10.1.1.1  
10.1.1.5  
232.1.1.1  
232.1.1.1  
232.1.1.1  
235.0.0.1  
236.0.0.1  
2
2
2
9
9
EXT4  
EXT4  
EXT4  
EXT1  
EXT1  
V3  
V3  
V3  
V3  
V3  
INC  
INC  
INC  
INC  
EXC  
4:16  
4:16  
-
2:26  
-
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
*
10.10.10.43  
*
IGMP Group information includes:  
IGMP source address  
IGMP Group address  
VLAN and port  
IGMP version  
IGMPv3 filter mode  
Expiration timer value  
IGMP multicast forwarding state  
/info/l3/igmp/mrouter  
IGMP Multicast Router Port Information  
[IGMP Multicast Router Menu]  
vlan  
dump  
- Show all multicast router ports on a single vlan  
- Show all learned multicast router ports  
Table 4-30 describes the commands used to display information about multicast routers  
(Mrouters) learned through IGMP Snooping.  
Table 4-30 IGMP Mrouter Information Menu Options (/info/igmp/mrouter)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
vlan <VLAN number>  
Displays the multicast router ports configured or learned on the selected VLAN.  
dump  
Displays information for all multicast groups learned by the switch.  
110 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Alteon OS Command Reference  
info/l3/igmp/mrouter/dump  
IGMP Mrouter Information  
VLAN  
Port  
Version  
Expires  
Max Query Resp. Time  
QRV  
QQIC  
------- -------  
--------- -------- ----------------------- ----  
---  
125  
-
1
2
3
EXT1  
EXT3  
EXT4  
V3  
V2  
V2  
4:09  
4:09  
static  
128  
125  
unknown  
2
-
-
-
IGMP Mrouter information includes:  
VLAN and port where the Mrouter is connected  
IGMP version  
Mrouter expiration  
Maximum query response time  
Querier’s Robustness Variable (QRV)  
Querier’s Query Interval Code (QQIC)  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/l3/vrrp  
VRRP Information  
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on GbE Switch Module provides redun-  
dancy between routers in a LAN. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP  
address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. One of the virtual  
routers is then elected as the master, based on a number of priority criteria, and assumes control  
of the shared virtual router IP address. If the master fails, one of the backup virtual routers will  
assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address.  
VRRP information:  
1: vrid 2, 205.178.18.210, if 1, renter, prio 100, master, server  
2: vrid 1, 205.178.18.202, if 1, renter, prio 100, backup  
3: vrid 3, 205.178.18.204, if 1, renter, prio 100, master, proxy  
When virtual routers are configured, you can view the status of each virtual router using this  
command. VRRP information includes:  
Virtual router number  
Virtual router ID and IP address  
Interface number  
Ownership status  
owneridentifies the preferred master virtual router. A virtual router is the owner  
when the IP address of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same.  
renteridentifies virtual routers which are not owned by this device.  
Priority value. During the election process, the virtual router with the highest priority  
becomes master.  
Activity status  
masteridentifies the elected master virtual router.  
backupidentifies that the virtual router is in backup mode.  
initidentifies that the virtual router is waiting for a startup event.  
For example, once it receives a startup event, it transitions to master if its priority  
is 255, (the IP address owner), or transitions to backup if it is not the IP address  
owner.  
Server status. The serverstate identifies virtual routers.  
Proxy status. The proxy state identifies virtual proxy routers, where the virtual router  
shares the same IP address as a proxy IP address. The use of virtual proxy routers enables  
redundant switches to share the same IP address, minimizing the number of unique IP  
addresses that must be configured.  
112 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/qos  
Quality of Service Information  
[QoS Menu]  
8021p  
- Show QOS 802.1p information  
Table 4-31 QoS Menu Options (/info/qos)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
8021p  
Displays the 802.1p Information Menu. For details, see page 113.  
/info/qos/8021p  
802.1p Information  
Current priority to COS queue information:  
Priority COSq Weight  
-------- ---- ------  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
Current port priority information:  
Port Priority COSq Weight  
----- -------- ---- ------  
INT1  
INT2  
...  
0
0
0
0
1
1
MGT1  
MGT2  
EXT1  
EXT2  
EXT3  
EXT4  
EXT5  
EXT6  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Alteon OS Command Reference  
The following table describes the IEEE 802.1p priority to COS queue information.  
Table 4-32 802.1p Priority-to-COS Queue Parameter Descriptions  
Parameter  
Description  
Priority  
COSq  
Displays the 802.1p Priority level.  
Displays the Class of Service queue.  
Displays the scheduling weight of the COS queue.  
Weight  
The following table describes the IEEE 802.1p port priority information.  
Table 4-33 802.1p Port Priority Parameter Descriptions  
Parameter  
Port  
Description  
Displays the port alias.  
Priority  
COSq  
Displays the 802.1p Priority level.  
Displays the Class of Service queue.  
Displays the scheduling weight.  
Weight  
114 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
info/acl  
Access Control List Information  
Current ACL information:  
------------------------  
Filter 2 profile:  
Ethernet  
- VID  
: 2/0xfff  
No ACL groups configured.  
Access Control List (ACL) information includes configuration settings for each ACL and  
ACL Group.  
Table 4-34 ACL Parameter Descriptions  
Parameter  
Filter x profile  
Actions  
Description  
Indicates the ACL number.  
Displays the configured action for the ACL.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/link  
Link Status Information  
Alias Port Speed  
Duplex  
Flow Ctrl  
Link  
---- ----- ----- -------- --TX-----RX-- ------  
INT1  
INT2  
INT3  
INT4  
INT5  
INT6  
INT7  
INT8  
INT9  
INT10 10  
INT11 11  
INT12 12  
INT13 13  
INT14 14  
MGT1 15  
MGT2 16  
EXT1 17  
EXT2 18  
EXT3 19  
EXT4 20  
EXT5 21  
EXT6 22  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
100  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
full  
any  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
up  
up  
up  
up  
down  
up  
up  
up  
up  
up  
up  
up  
up  
up  
up  
up  
up  
up  
up  
up  
up  
up  
100  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
1000  
any  
any  
any  
any  
any  
NOTE The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens  
displayed by your system. Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you  
are using and the firmware versions and options that are installed.  
Use this command to display link status information about each port on an GbE Switch Module  
slot, including:  
Port alias  
Port speed (10, 100, 1000, or any)  
Duplex mode (half, full, any, or auto)  
Flow control for transmit and receive (no, yes, or auto)  
Link status (up, down, or disabled)  
116 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/port  
Port Information  
Alias Port Tag Fast Lrn PVID  
NAME  
VLAN(s)  
----- ---- --- ---- --- ---- -------------- ------------------------  
INT1  
INT2  
INT3  
INT4  
INT5  
INT6  
INT7  
INT8  
INT9  
1 y n  
2 y n  
3 y n  
4 y n  
5 y n  
6 y n  
7 y n  
8 y n  
9 y n  
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
1 INT1  
1 INT2  
1 INT3  
1 INT4  
1 INT5  
1 INT6  
1 INT7  
1 INT8  
1 INT9  
1 INT10  
1 INT11  
1 INT12  
1 INT13  
1 INT14  
1 10 4095  
1 4095  
1 4095  
1 4095  
1 4095  
1 4095  
1 4095  
1 4095  
1 4095  
1 4095  
1 4095  
1 4095  
1 4095  
1 4095  
4095  
4095  
1
1
1
1
1
1
INT10 10 y n  
INT11 11 y n  
INT12 12 y n  
INT13 13 y n  
INT14 14 y n  
MGT1 15 y n  
MGT2 16 y n  
EXT1 17 n n  
EXT2 18 n n  
EXT3 19 y n  
EXT4 20 y n  
EXT5 21 y n  
EXT6 22 y n  
e 4095*MGT  
e 4095*MGT  
e
e
e
e
e
e
1 EXT1  
1 EXT2  
1 EXT3  
1 EXT4  
1 EXT4  
1 EXT4  
* = PVID is tagged.  
NOTE The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens  
displayed by your system. Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you  
are using and the firmware versions and options that are installed.  
Port information includes:  
Port alias  
Whether the port uses VLAN tagging or not (yor n)  
Port VLAN ID (PVID)  
Port name  
VLAN membership  
Whether the port is configured for Port Fast Fowarding (Fast)  
Whether the port is enabled for FDB Learning (Lrn)  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/geaport  
Logical Port to GEA Port Mapping  
Alias Logical Port GEA Port(0-based) GEA Unit  
----- ------------ ----------------- ---------  
INT1  
INT2  
INT3  
INT4  
INT5  
INT6  
INT7  
INT8  
INT9  
INT10  
INT11  
INT12  
INT13  
INT14  
MGT1  
MGT2  
EXT1  
EXT2  
EXT3  
EXT4  
EXT5  
EXT6  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
3
2
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
1
0
3
2
20  
6
1
6
10  
9
8
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
5
4
NOTE The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens  
displayed by your system. Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you  
are using and the firmware versions and options that are installed.  
This display correlates the port alias to logical port number, and shows the GEA unit on which  
each port resides.  
118 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/info/sfp  
Fiber Port SFP Status  
Port Device TX-Enable RX-Signal TX-Fault  
---- ------ --------- --------- --------  
EXT1 FI-SFP enabled  
EXT2 FI-SFP enabled  
EXT3 FI-SFP enabled  
EXT4 FI-SFP enabled  
EXT5 FI-SFP enabled  
EXT6 FI-SFP enabled  
LOST  
LOST  
LOST  
LOST  
LOST  
LOST  
none  
none  
none  
none  
none  
none  
This command displays the status of the Small Form Pluggable (SFP) module on each Fiber  
External Port.  
/info/dump  
Information Dump  
Use the dump command to dump all switch information available from the Information Menu  
(10K or more, depending on your configuration). This data is useful for tuning and debugging  
switch performance.  
If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your worksta-  
tion to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 4: The Information Menu 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Alteon OS Command Reference  
120 Chapter 4: The Information Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 5  
The Statistics Menu  
You can view switch performance statistics in both the user and administrator command modes.  
This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch statistics.  
/stats  
Statistics Menu  
[Statistics Menu]  
port  
- Port Stats Menu  
clrports - Clear stats for all ports  
l2  
l3  
mp  
acl  
snmp  
ntp  
clrmp  
dump  
- Layer 2 Stats Menu  
- Layer 3 Stats Menu  
- MP-specific Stats Menu  
- ACL Stats Menu  
- Show SNMP stats  
- Show NTP stats  
- Clear all MP related stats  
- Dump all stats  
40M2420, April 2007  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Alteon OS Command Reference  
The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 5-1, with pointers  
to detailed information.  
Table 5-1 Statistics Menu Options (/stats)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
port <port alias or number>  
Displays the Port Statistics Menu for the specified port. Use this command to display traffic statis-  
tics on a port-by-port basis. Traffic statistics are included in SNMP Management Information Base  
(MIB) objects. To view menu options, see page 123.  
clrports  
Clears statistics counters for all ports.  
l2  
Displays the Layer 2 Stats Menu. To view menu options, see page 135.  
l3  
Displays the Layer 3 Stats Menu. To view menu options, see page 137.  
mp  
Displays the Management Processor Statistics Menu. Use this command to view information on  
how switch management processes and resources are currently being allocated. To view menu  
options, see page 156.  
acl  
Displays ACL Statistics menu. To view menu options, see page 160.  
snmp  
Displays SNMP statistics. See page 162 for sample output.  
ntp <clear>  
Displays Network Time Protocol (NTP) Statistics. See page 166 for a sample output and a descrip-  
tion of NTP Statistics.  
You can execute the clear command option to delete all statistics.  
clrmp  
Clears all management processor statistics.  
dump  
Dumps all switch statistics. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch per-  
formance. If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your  
workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command. For details, see page 167.  
122 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/stats/port <port alias or number>  
Port Statistics  
This menu displays traffic statistics on a port-by-port basis. Traffic statistics include SNMP  
Management Information Base (MIB) objects.  
[Port Statistics Menu]  
8021x  
brg  
ether  
if  
ip  
link  
clear  
- Show 802.1x stats  
- Show bridging ("dot1") stats  
- Show Ethernet ("dot3") stats  
- Show interface ("if") stats  
- Show Internet Protocol ("IP") stats  
- Show link stats  
- Clear all port stats  
Table 5-2 Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/port)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
8021x  
Displays IEEE 802.1x statistics for the port. See page 125 for sample output.  
brg  
Displays bridging (“dot1”) statistics for the port. See page 127 for sample output.  
ether  
Displays Ethernet (“dot3”) statistics for the port. See page 129 for sample output.  
if  
Displays interface statistics for the port. See page 132 for sample output.  
ip  
Displays IP statistics for the port. See page 134 for sample output.  
link  
Displays link statistics for the port. See page 134 for sample output.  
clear  
This command clears all the statistics on the port.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/stats/port <port alias or number>/8021x  
802.1x Authenticator Statistics  
This menu option enables you to display the 802.1x authenticator statistics of the selected port.  
Authenticator Statistics:  
eapolFramesRx  
eapolFramesTx  
= 925  
= 3201  
= 2  
eapolStartFramesRx  
eapolLogoffFramesRx  
eapolRespIdFramesRx  
eapolRespFramesRx  
eapolReqIdFramesTx  
eapolReqFramesTx  
= 0  
= 463  
= 460  
= 1820  
= 1381  
invalidEapolFramesRx = 0  
eapLengthErrorFramesRx = 0  
lastEapolFrameVersion = 1  
lastEapolFrameSource = 00:01:02:45:ac:51  
Table 5-3 802.1x Authenticator Statistics of a Port (/stats/port/8021x)  
Statistics  
Description  
eapolFramesRx  
eapolFramesTx  
Total number of EAPOL frames received  
Total number of EAPOL frames transmitted  
eapolStartFramesRx Total number of EAPOL Start frames received  
eapolLogoff-  
FramesRx  
Total number of EAPOL Logoff frames received  
Total number of EAPOL Response Identity frames received  
Total number of Response frames received  
eapolRespId-  
FramesRx  
eapolRespFramesRx  
eapolReqIdFramesTx Total number of Request Identity frames transmitted  
eapolReqFramesTx  
Total number of Request frames transmitted  
invalidEapol-  
FramesRx  
Total number of invalid EAPOL frames received  
eapLengthError-  
FramesRx  
Total number of EAP length error frames received  
lastEapolFrameVer-  
sion  
The protocol version number carried in the most recently received  
EAPOL frame.  
124 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 5-3 802.1x Authenticator Statistics of a Port (/stats/port/8021x)  
Statistics  
Description  
lastEapolFrame-  
Source  
The source MAC address carried in the most recently received  
EAPOL frame.  
/stats/port <port alias or number>/8021x  
802.1x Authenticator Diagnostics  
This menu option enables you to display the 802.1x authenticator diagnostics of the selected  
port.  
Authenticator Diagnostics:  
authEntersConnecting  
authEapLogoffsWhileConnecting  
authEntersAuthenticating  
= 1820  
= 0  
= 463  
= 5  
= 0  
= 458  
= 0  
= 0  
= 0  
= 3  
= 0  
authSuccessesWhileAuthenticating  
authTimeoutsWhileAuthenticating  
authFailWhileAuthenticating  
authReauthsWhileAuthenticating  
authEapStartsWhileAuthenticating  
authEapLogoffWhileAuthenticating  
authReauthsWhileAuthenticated  
authEapStartsWhileAuthenticated  
authEapLogoffWhileAuthenticated  
backendResponses  
= 0  
= 923  
= 460  
= 460  
backendAccessChallenges  
backendOtherRequestsToSupplicant  
backendNonNakResponsesFromSupplicant = 460  
backendAuthSuccesses  
backendAuthFails  
= 5  
= 458  
Table 5-4 802.1x Authenticator Diagnostics of a Port (/stats/port/8021x)  
Statistics  
Description  
authEntersConnect-  
ing  
Total number of times that the state machine transitions to the  
CONNECTING state from any other state.  
authEapLogoffsWhi-  
leConnecting  
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  
CONNECTING to DISCONNECTED as a result of receiving an  
EAPOL-Logoff message.  
authEntersAuthen-  
ticating  
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  
CONNECTING to AUTHENTICATING, as a result of an EAP-  
Response/Identity message being received from the Supplicant.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 5-4 802.1x Authenticator Diagnostics of a Port (/stats/port/8021x)  
Statistics  
Description  
authSuccessesWhi-  
leAuthenticating  
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  
AUTHENTICATING to AUTHENTICATED, as a result of the Backend  
Authentication state machine indicating successful authentication of the  
Supplicant.  
authTimeoutsWhile- Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  
Authenticating  
AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING, as a result of the Backend Authen-  
tication state machine indicating authentication timeout.  
authFailWhileAu-  
thenticating  
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  
AUTHENTICATING to HELD, as a result of the Backend Authenti-  
cation state machine indicating authentication failure.  
authReauthsWhile-  
Authenticating  
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHEN-  
TICATING to ABORTING, as a result of a re-authentication request  
authEapStartsWhi-  
leAuthenticating  
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  
AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING, as a result of an EAPOL-Start  
message being received from the Supplicant.  
authEapLogoffWhi-  
leAuthenticating  
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  
AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING, as a result of an EAPOL-Logoff  
message being received from the Supplicant.  
authReauthsWhile-  
Authenticated  
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHEN-  
TICATED to CONNECTING, as a result of a re-authentication request.  
authEapStartsWhi-  
leAuthenticated  
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  
AUTHENTICATED to CONNECTING, as a result of an EAPOL-Start  
message being received from the Supplicant.  
authEapLogoffWhi-  
leAuthenticated  
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from  
AUTHENTICATED to DISCONNECTED, as a result of an EAPOL-  
Logoff message being received from the Supplicant.  
backendResponses  
Total number of times that the state machine sends an initial Access-  
Request packet to the Authentication server. Indicates that the Authenti-  
cator attempted communication with the Authentication Server.  
backendAccessChal- Total number of times that the state machine receives an initial Access-  
lenges  
Challenge packet from the Authentication server. Indicates that the  
Authentication Server has communication with the Authenticator.  
backendOtherRe-  
Total number of times that the state machine sends an EAP-Request  
questsToSupplicant packet (other than an Identity, Notification, Failure, or Success message)  
to the Supplicant. Indicates that the Authenticator chose an EAP-method.  
126 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 5-4 802.1x Authenticator Diagnostics of a Port (/stats/port/8021x)  
Statistics  
Description  
backendNonNakRe-  
Total number of times that the state machine receives a response from the  
sponsesFromSuppli- Supplicant to an initial EAP-Request, and the response is something other  
cant  
than EAP-NAK. Indicates that the Supplicant can respond to the Authen-  
ticator.s chosen EAP-method.  
backendAuthSuc-  
cesses  
Total number of times that the state machine receives an Accept message  
from the Authentication Server. Indicates that the Supplicant has success-  
fully authenticated to the Authentication Server.  
backendAuthFails  
Total number of times that the state machine receives a Reject message  
from the Authentication Server. Indicates that the Supplicant has  
not authenticated to the Authentication Server.  
/stats/port <port alias or number>/brg  
Bridging Statistics  
This menu option enables you to display the bridging statistics of the selected port.  
Bridging statistics for port INT1:  
dot1PortInFrames:  
63242584  
dot1PortOutFrames:  
63277826  
dot1PortInDiscards:  
dot1TpLearnedEntryDiscards:  
dot1StpPortForwardTransitions:  
0
0
0
Table 5-5 Bridging Statistics of a Port (/stats/port/brg)  
Statistics  
Description  
dot1PortInFrames  
The number of frames that have been received by this port from its seg-  
ment. A frame received on the interface corresponding to this port is only  
counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being processed by  
the local bridging function, including bridge management frames.  
dot1PortOutFrames  
The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its seg-  
ment. Note that a frame transmitted on the interface corresponding to this  
port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being  
processed by the local bridging function, including bridge management  
frames.  
dot1PortInDiscards Count of valid frames received which were discarded (that is, filtered) by  
the Forwarding Process.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 5-5 Bridging Statistics of a Port (/stats/port/brg)  
Statistics Description  
dot1TpLearnedEntry The total number of Forwarding Database entries, which have been or  
Discards  
would have been learnt, but have been discarded due to a lack of space to  
store them in the Forwarding Database. If this counter is increasing, it  
indicates that the Forwarding Database is regularly becoming full (a con-  
dition which has unpleasant performance effects on the subnetwork). If  
this counter has a significant value but is not presently increasing, it indi-  
cates that the problem has been occurring but is not persistent.  
dot1StpPortForward The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to  
Transitions  
the Forwarding state.  
128 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/stats/port <port alias or number>/ether  
Ethernet Statistics  
This menu option enables you to display the ethernet statistics of the selected port  
Ethernet statistics for port INT1:  
dot3StatsAlignmentErrors:  
dot3StatsFCSErrors:  
0
0
dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames:  
dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames:  
dot3StatsLateCollisions:  
0
0
0
dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions:  
dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors:  
dot3StatsFrameTooLongs:  
0
NA  
0
dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors:  
0
Table 5-6 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether)  
Statistics  
Description  
dot3StatsAlignment A count of frames received on a particular interface that are not an inte-  
Errors  
gral number of octets in length and do not pass the Frame Check  
Sequence (FCS) check.  
The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when  
the alignmentErrorstatus is returned by the MAC service to the  
Logical Link Control (LLC) (or other MAC user). Received frames for  
which multiple error conditions obtained are, according to the conven-  
tions of IEEE 802.3 Layer Management, counted exclusively according  
to the error status presented to the LLC.  
dot3StatsFCSErrors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral  
number of octets in length but do not pass the Frame Check Sequence  
(FCS) check.  
The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when  
the frameCheckErrorstatus is returned by the MAC service to the  
LLC (or other MAC user). Received frames for which multiple error con-  
ditions obtained are, according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer  
Management, counted exclusively according to the error status presented  
to the LLC.  
dot3StatsSingle-  
CollisionFrames  
A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for  
which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision.  
A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the  
corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts, ifOutMul-  
ticastPkts, or ifOutBroadcastPkts, and is not counted by the  
corresponding instance of the dot3StatsMultipleCollision-  
Frameobject.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 5-6 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether)  
Statistics Description  
dot3StatsMultiple- A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for  
CollisionFrames  
which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision.  
A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the  
corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts, ifOutMul-  
ticastPkts, or ifOutBroadcastPkts, and is not counted by the  
corresponding instance of the dot3StatsSingleCollision-  
Framesobject.  
dot3StatsLate-  
Collisions  
The number of times that a collision is detected on a particular interface  
later than 512 bit-times into the transmission of a packet.  
Five hundred and twelve bit-times corresponds to 51.2 microseconds on a  
10 Mbit/s system. A (late) collision included in a count represented by an  
instance of this object is also considered as a (generic) collision for pur-  
poses of other collision-related statistics.  
dot3StatsExcessive A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails  
Collisions due to excessive collisions.  
dot3StatsInternal- A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails  
MacTransmitErrors  
due to an internal MAC sub layer transmit error. A frame is only counted  
by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding  
instance of either the dot3StatsLateCollisionsobject, the  
dot3StatsExcessiveCollisionsobject, or the dot3Stats-  
CarrierSenseErrorsobject.  
The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object  
is implementation-specific. In particular, an instance of this object may  
represent a count of transmission errors on a particular interface that are  
not otherwise counted.  
dot3StatsFrameToo- A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maxi-  
Longs  
mum permitted frame size.  
The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when  
the frameTooLongstatus is returned by the MAC service to the LLC  
(or other MAC user). Received frames for which multiple error condi-  
tions obtained are, according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer  
Management, counted exclusively according to the error status presented  
to the LLC.  
130 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 5-6 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether)  
Statistics Description  
dot3StatsInternal- A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due  
MacReceiveErrors  
to an internal MAC sub layer receive error. A frame is only counted by an  
instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of  
either the dot3StatsFrameTooLongsobject, the dot3Stats-  
AlignmentErrorsobject, or the dot3StatsFCSErrorsobject.  
The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object  
is implementation-specific. In particular, an instance of this object may  
represent a count of received errors on a particular interface that are not  
otherwise counted.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/stats/port <port alias or number>/if  
Interface Statistics  
This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port.  
Interface statistics for port EXT1:  
ifHCIn Counters  
ifHCOut Counters  
Octets:  
51697080313  
51721056808  
UcastPkts:  
BroadcastPkts:  
MulticastPkts:  
Discards:  
65356399  
65385714  
0
0
0
0
6516  
0
0
Errors:  
21187  
Table 5-7 Interface Statistics for Port (/stats/port/if)  
Statistics  
Description  
ifInOctets  
The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing  
characters.  
ifInUcastPkts  
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher sub- layer,  
which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-  
layer.  
ifInBroadcastPkts  
ifInMulticastPkts  
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher sub- layer,  
which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.  
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be  
transmitted, and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-  
layer, including those that were discarded or not sent. For a MAC layer  
protocol, this includes both Group and Functional addresses.  
ifInDiscards  
ifInErrors  
The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even  
though no errors had been detected to prevent their being delivered to a  
higher-layer protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a packet  
could be to free up buffer space.  
For packet-oriented interfaces, the number of inbound packets that con-  
tained errors preventing them from being delivered to a higher-layer pro-  
tocol. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces, the number of  
inbound transmission units that contained errors preventing them from  
being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.  
132 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 5-7 Interface Statistics for Port (/stats/port/if)  
Statistics Description  
ifInUnknownProtos  
For packet-oriented interfaces, the number of packets received via the  
interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported  
protocol. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces which support  
protocol multiplexing, the number of transmission units received via the  
interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported  
protocol. For any interface which does not support protocol multiplexing,  
this counter will always be 0.  
ifOutOctets  
The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including  
framing characters.  
ifOutUcastPkts  
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be  
transmitted, and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast  
address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.  
ifOutBroadcastPkts The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be  
transmitted, and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-  
layer, including those that were discarded or not sent. This object is a 64-  
bit version of ifOutBroadcastPkts.  
ifOutMulticastPkts The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be  
transmitted, and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-  
layer, including those that were discarded or not sent. For a MAC layer  
protocol, this includes both Group and Functional addresses. This object  
is a 64-bit version of ifOutMulticastPkts.  
ifOutDiscards  
The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even  
though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted.  
One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up  
buffer space.  
ifOutErrors  
For packet-oriented interfaces, the number of outbound packets that  
could not be transmitted because of errors. For character-oriented or  
fixed-length interfaces, the number of outbound transmission units that  
could not be transmitted because of errors.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/stats/port <port alias or number>/ip  
Interface Protocol Statistics  
This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port.  
GEA IP statistics for port INT1:  
ipInReceives :  
ipInHeaderError:  
ipInDiscards :  
0
0
0
Table 5-8 Interface Protocol Statistics (/stats/port/ip)  
Statistics  
Description  
ipInReceives  
The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including  
those received in error.  
ipInHeaderErrors  
The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their  
IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this  
entity (the switch).  
ipInDiscards  
The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encoun-  
tered to prevent their continued processing, but which were discarded (for  
example, for lack of buffer space). Note that this counter does not include  
any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly.  
/stats/port <port alias or number>/link  
Link Statistics  
This menu enables you to display the link statistics of the selected port.  
Link statistics for port INT1:  
linkStateChange:  
1
Table 5-9 Link Statistics (/stats/port/link)  
Statistics  
Description  
linkStateChange  
The total number of link state changes.  
134 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/stats/l2  
Layer 2 Statistics  
[Layer 2 Statistics Menu]  
fdb  
lacp  
- Show FDB stats  
- Show LACP stats  
The Layer 2 statistics provided by each menu option are briefly described in Table 5-10, with  
pointers to detailed information.  
Table 5-10 Layer 2 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/l2)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
fdb  
Displays FDB statistics. See page 135 for sample output.  
lacp <port alias or number>  
Displays Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) statistics. See page 136 for sample output.  
/stats/l2/fdb  
FDB Statistics  
FDB statistics:  
current:  
83 hiwat:  
855  
This menu option enables you to display statistics regarding the use of the forwarding data-  
base, including the number of new entries, finds, and unsuccessful searches.  
FDB statistics are described in the following table:  
Table 5-11 Forwarding Database Statistics (/stats/fdb)  
Statistic  
current  
hiwat  
Description  
Current number of entries in the Forwarding Database.  
Highest number of entries recorded at any given time in the Forwarding  
Database.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/stats/l2/lacp <port alias or number>  
LACP Statistics  
Port EXT1:  
--------------------------------------  
Valid LACPDUs received:  
Valid Marker PDUs received:  
- 870  
- 0  
Valid Marker Rsp PDUs received: - 0  
Unknown version/TLV type:  
Illegal subtype received:  
LACPDUs transmitted:  
Marker PDUs transmitted:  
Marker Rsp PDUs transmitted:  
- 0  
- 0  
- 6031  
- 0  
- 0  
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) statistics are described in the following table:  
Table 5-12 LACP Statistics (/stats/lacp)  
Statistic  
Description  
Valid LACPDUs  
received  
Total number of valid LACP data units received.  
Valid Marker PDUs  
received  
Total number of valid LACP marker data units received.  
Valid Marker Rsp  
PDUs received  
Total number of valid LACP marker response data units received.  
Unknownversion/TLV Total number of LACP data units with an unknown version or type,  
type  
length, and value (TLV) received.  
Illegal subtype  
received  
Total number of LACP data units with an illegal subtype received.  
LACPDUs transmitted Total number of LACP data units transmitted.  
Marker PDUs trans- Total number of LACP marker data units transmitted.  
mitted  
Marker Rsp PDUs  
transmitted  
Total number of LACP marker response data units transmitted.  
136 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/stats/l3  
Layer 3 Statistics  
[Layer 3 Statistics Menu]  
geal3  
ip  
route  
arp  
dns  
icmp  
tcp  
- GEA Layer 3 Stats Menu  
- Show IP stats  
- Show route stats  
- Show ARP stats  
- Show DNS stats  
- Show ICMP stats  
- Show TCP stats  
- Show UDP stats  
- Show IGMP stats  
- OSPF stats  
udp  
igmp  
ospf  
vrrp  
- Show VRRP stats  
clrvrrp - Clear VRRP stats  
rip - Show RIP stats  
igmpgrps - Total number of IGMP groups  
ipmcgrps - Total number of IPMC groups  
clrigmp - Clear IGMP stats  
ipclear - Clear IP stats  
dump  
- Dump layer 3 stats  
The Layer 3 statistics provided by each menu option are briefly described in Table 5-13, with  
pointers to detailed information.  
Table 5-13 Layer 3 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/l3)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
geal3  
Displays the Gigabit Ethernet Aggregators (GEA) statistics menu. GEA statistics are used by ser-  
vice and support personnel.  
ip  
Displays IP statistics. See page 139 for sample output.  
route  
Displays route statistics. See page 141 for sample output.  
arp  
Displays Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) statistics. See page 141 for sample output.  
dns  
Displays Domain Name System (DNS) statistics. See page 142 for sample output.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 5-13 Layer 3 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/l3)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
icmp  
Displays ICMP statistics. See page 142 for sample output.  
tcp  
Displays TCP statistics. See page 145 for sample output.  
udp  
Displays UDP statistics. See page 147 for sample output.  
igmp  
Displays IGMP statistics. See page 148 for sample output.  
ospf  
Displays OSPF statistics. See page 149 for sample output.  
vrrp  
When virtual routers are configured, you can display the following protocol statistics for VRRP:  
Advertisements received (vrrpInAdvers)  
Advertisements transmitted (vrrpOutAdvers)  
Advertisements received, but ignored (vrrpBadAdvers)  
See page 154 for sample output.  
clrvrrp  
Clears VRRP statistics.  
rip  
Displays Routing Information Protocol (RIP) statistics. See page 155 for sample output.  
igmpgrps  
Displays the total number of IGMP groups that are registered on the switch.  
ipmcgrps  
Displays the total number of current IP multicast groups that are registered on the switch.  
clrigmp  
Clears IGMP statistics.  
ipclear  
Clears IP statistics. Use this command with caution as it will delete all the IP statistics.  
dump  
Dumps all Layer 3 statistics. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch  
performance. If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your  
workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command.  
138 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/stats/l3/ip  
IP Statistics  
IP statistics:  
ipInReceives:  
ipInAddrErrors:  
ipInUnknownProtos:  
ipInDelivers:  
3115873 ipInHdrErrors:  
35447 ipForwDatagrams:  
500504 ipInDiscards:  
2334166 ipOutRequests:  
4 ipOutNoRoutes:  
0 ipReasmOKs:  
1
0
0
1010542  
ipOutDiscards:  
ipReasmReqds:  
4
0
ipReasmFails:  
0 ipFragOKs:  
0
ipFragFails:  
ipRoutingDiscards:  
ipReasmTimeout:  
0 ipFragCreates:  
0 ipDefaultTTL:  
5
0
255  
Table 5-14 IP Statistics (stats/l3/ip)  
Statistics  
Description  
ipInReceives  
The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including  
those received in error.  
ipInHdrErrors  
ipInAddrErrors  
The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP head-  
ers, including bad checksums, version number mismatch, other format  
errors, time-to-live exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IP  
options, and so forth.  
The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their  
IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this  
entity (the switch). This count includes invalid addresses (for example,  
0.0.0.0) and addresses of unsupported Classes (for example, Class E). For  
entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward data-  
grams, this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination  
address was not a local address.  
ipForwDatagrams  
The number of input datagrams for which this entity (the switch) was not  
their final IP destination, as a result of which an attempt was made to find  
a route to forward them to that final destination. In entities which do not  
act as IP Gateways, this counter will include only those packets, which  
were Source-Routed via this entity (the switch), and the Source- Route  
option processing was successful.  
ipInUnknownProtos  
ipInDiscards  
The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but dis-  
carded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.  
The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encoun-  
tered to prevent their continued processing, but which were discarded (for  
example, for lack of buffer space). Note that this counter does not include  
any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 5-14 IP Statistics (stats/l3/ip)  
Statistics  
Description  
ipInDelivers  
The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user-  
protocols (including ICMP).  
ipOutRequests  
ipOutDiscards  
The total number of IP datagrams which local IP user-protocols (includ-  
ing ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission. Note that this  
counter does not include any datagrams counted in  
ipForwDatagrams.  
The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was  
encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination, but which  
were discarded (for example, for lack of buffer space). Note that this  
counter would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagramsif any  
such packets met this (discretionary) discard criterion.  
ipOutNoRoutes  
ipReasmReqds  
The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found  
to transmit them to their destination. Note that this counter includes any  
packets counted in ipForwDatagrams, which meet this no-route crite-  
rion. Note that this includes any datagrams which a host cannot route  
because all of its default gateways are down.  
The number of IP fragments received which needed to be reassembled at  
this entity (the switch).  
ipReasmOKs  
The number of IP datagrams successfully re- assembled.  
ipReasmFails  
The number of failures detected by the IP re- assembly algorithm (for  
whatever reason: timed out, errors, and so forth). Note that this is not nec-  
essarily a count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms (notably  
the algorithm in RFC 815) can lose track of the number of fragments by  
combining them as they are received.  
ipFragOKs  
The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at  
this entity (the switch).  
ipFragFails  
The number of IP datagrams that have been discarded because they  
needed to be fragmented at this entity (the switch) but could not be, for  
example, because their Don't Fragmentflag was set.  
ipFragCreates  
The number of IP datagram fragments that have been generated as a  
result of fragmentation at this entity (the switch).  
ipRoutingDiscards  
The number of routing entries, which were chosen to be discarded even  
though they are valid. One possible reason for discarding such an entry  
could be to free-up buffer space for other routing entries.  
ipDefaultTTL  
The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live(TTL) field of the  
IP header of datagrams originated at this entity (the switch), whenever a  
TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol.  
140 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 5-14 IP Statistics (stats/l3/ip)  
Statistics Description  
ipReasmTimeout  
The maximum number of seconds, which received fragments are held  
while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity (the switch).  
/stats/l3/route  
Route Statistics  
Route statistics:  
ipRoutesCur:  
ipRoutesMax:  
11 ipRoutesHighWater:  
2048  
11  
Table 5-15 Route Statistics (/stats/l3/route)  
Statistics Description  
ipRoutesCur  
The total number of outstanding routes in the route table.  
The highest number of routes ever recorded in the route table.  
The maximum number of routes that are supported.  
ipRoutesHighWater  
ipRoutesMax  
/stats/l3/arp  
ARP statistics  
This menu option enables you to display Address Resolution Protocol statistics.  
ARP statistics:  
arpEntriesCur:  
arpEntriesMax:  
3 arpEntriesHighWater:  
4095  
4
Table 5-16 ARP Statistics (/stats/l3/arp)  
Statistics Description  
arpEntriesCur  
The total number of outstanding ARP entries in the ARP table.  
The highest number of ARP entries ever recorded in the ARP table.  
The maximum number of ARP entries that are supported.  
arpEntriesHighWater  
arpEntriesMax  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/stats/l3/dns  
DNS Statistics  
This menu option enables you to display Domain Name System statistics.  
DNS statistics:  
dnsInRequests:  
dnsBadRequests:  
0 dnsOutRequests:  
0
0
Table 5-17 DNS Statistics (/stats/dns)  
Statistics Description  
dnsInRequests  
dnsOutRequests  
dnsBadRequests  
The total number of DNS request packets that have been received.  
The total number of DNS response packets that have been transmitted.  
The total number of DNS request packets received that were dropped.  
/stats/l3/icmp  
ICMP Statistics  
ICMP statistics:  
icmpInMsgs:  
245802 icmpInErrors:  
41 icmpInTimeExcds:  
0 icmpInSrcQuenchs:  
0 icmpInEchos:  
244350 icmpInTimestamps:  
0 icmpInAddrMasks:  
0 icmpOutMsgs:  
0 icmpOutDestUnreachs:  
0 icmpOutParmProbs:  
0 icmpOutRedirects:  
253777 icmpOutEchoReps:  
0 icmpOutTimestampReps:  
0 icmpOutAddrMaskReps:  
1393  
icmpInDestUnreachs:  
icmpInParmProbs:  
icmpInRedirects:  
icmpInEchoReps:  
icmpInTimestampReps:  
icmpInAddrMaskReps:  
icmpOutErrors:  
icmpOutTimeExcds:  
icmpOutSrcQuenchs:  
icmpOutEchos:  
0
0
18  
0
0
253810  
15  
0
0
18  
0
0
icmpOutTimestamps:  
icmpOutAddrMasks:  
Table 5-18 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp)  
Statistics  
Description  
icmpInMsgs  
The total number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch)  
received. Note that this counter includes all those counted by  
icmpInErrors.  
icmpInErrors  
The number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch)  
received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP  
checksums, bad length, and so forth).  
142 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 5-18 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp)  
Statistics Description  
icmpInDestUnreachs  
icmpInTimeExcds  
icmpInParmProbs  
icmpInSrcQuenchs  
The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received.  
The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received.  
The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received.  
The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full, stop send-  
ing data) messages received.  
icmpInRedirects  
icmpInEchos  
The number of ICMP Redirect messages received.  
The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received.  
The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received.  
The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages received.  
The number of ICMP Timestamp Replymessages received.  
The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received.  
The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received.  
icmpInEchoReps  
icmpInTimestamps  
icmpInTimestampReps  
icmpInAddrMasks  
icmpInAddrMaskReps  
icmpOutMsgs  
The total number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch)  
attempted to send. Note that this counter includes all those counted  
by icmpOutErrors.  
icmpOutErrors  
The number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch) did not  
send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of  
buffer. This value should not include errors discovered outside the  
ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the resultant data-  
gram. In some implementations there may be no types of errors that  
contribute to this counter's value.  
icmpOutDestUnreachs  
icmpOutTimeExcds  
icmpOutParmProbs  
icmpOutSrcQuenchs  
The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent.  
The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent.  
The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent.  
The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full, stop send-  
ing data) messages sent.  
icmpOutRedirects  
The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent. For a host, this object  
will always be zero, since hosts do not send redirects.  
icmpOutEchos  
The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent.  
The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent.  
icmpOutEchoReps  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 5-18 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp)  
Statistics  
Description  
icmpOutTimestamps  
icmpOutTimestampReps  
icmpOutAddrMasks  
icmpOutAddrMaskReps  
The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages sent.  
The number of ICMP Timestamp Replymessages sent.  
The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent.  
The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent.  
144 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/stats/l3/tcp  
TCP Statistics  
TCP statistics:  
tcpRtoAlgorithm:  
tcpRtoMax:  
tcpActiveOpens:  
tcpAttemptFails:  
tcpInSegs:  
4 tcpRtoMin:  
240000 tcpMaxConn:  
252214 tcpPassiveOpens:  
528 tcpEstabResets:  
756401 tcpOutSegs:  
0 tcpInErrs:  
0
512  
7
4
756655  
tcpRetransSegs:  
tcpCurBuff:  
0
3
0 tcpCurConn:  
tcpOutRsts:  
417  
Table 5-19 TCP Statistics (/stats/l3/tcp)  
Statistics  
Description  
tcpRtoAlgorithm  
The algorithm used to determine the timeoutvalue used for retransmit-  
ting unacknowledged octets.  
tcpRtoMin  
tcpRtoMax  
tcpMaxConn  
The minimum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retrans-  
mission timeout, measured in milliseconds. More refined semantics  
for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the  
retransmission timeout. In particular, when the timeoutalgorithm is  
rsre(3), an object of this type has the semantics of the LBOUND quantity  
described in RFC 793.  
The maximum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retrans-  
mission timeout, measured in milliseconds. More refined semantics  
for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the  
retransmission timeout. In particular, when the timeoutalgorithm is  
rsre(3), an object of this type has the semantics of the UBOUND quantity  
described in RFC 793.  
The limit on the total number of TCP connections the entity (the switch)  
can support. In entities where the maximum number of connections is  
dynamic, this object should contain the value -1.  
tcpActiveOpens  
tcpPassiveOpens  
tcpAttemptFails  
The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to  
the SYN-SENT state from the CLOSED state.  
The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to  
the SYN-RCVD state from the LISTEN state.  
The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to  
the CLOSED state from either the SYN-SENT state or the SYN-RCVD  
state, plus the number of times TCP connections have made a direct tran-  
sition to the LISTEN state from the SYN-RCVD state.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 5-19 TCP Statistics (/stats/l3/tcp)  
Statistics  
Description  
tcpEstabResets  
The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to  
the CLOSED state from either the ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSE-  
WAIT state.  
tcpInSegs  
The total number of segments received, including those received in error.  
This count includes segments received on currently established connec-  
tions.  
tcpOutSegs  
tcpRetransSegs  
tcpInErrs  
The total number of segments sent, including those on current connec-  
tions but excluding those containing only retransmitted octets.  
The total number of segments retransmitted - that is, the number of TCP  
segments transmitted containing one or more previously transmitted octets.  
The total number of segments received in error (for example, bad TCP  
checksums).  
tcpCurBuff  
The total number of outstanding memory allocations from heap by TCP  
protocol stack.  
tcpCurConn  
tcpOutRsts  
The total number of outstanding TCP sessions that are currently opened.  
The number of TCP segments sent containing the RST flag.  
146 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/stats/l3/udp  
UDP Statistics  
UDP statistics:  
udpInDatagrams:  
udpInErrors:  
54 udpOutDatagrams:  
0 udpNoPorts:  
43  
1578077  
Table 5-20 UDP Statistics (/stats/l3/udp)  
Statistics  
Description  
udpInDatagrams  
udpOutDatagrams  
udpInErrors  
The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to the switch.  
The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this entity (the switch).  
The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for  
reasons other than the lack of an application at the destination port.  
udpNoPorts  
The total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no  
application at the destination port.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/stats/l3/igmp <VLAN number>  
IGMP Statistics  
IGMP Snoop vlan 2 statistics:  
-----------------------------------------------------------------------  
rxIgmpValidPkts:  
rxIgmpGenQueries:  
0
0
rxIgmpInvalidPkts:  
rxIgmpGrpSpecificQueries:  
0
0
rxIgmpGroupSrcSpecificQueries: 0  
rxIgmpLeaves:  
txIgmpReports:  
txIgmpLeaves:  
0
0
0
rxIgmpReports:  
0
0
0
0
txIgmpGrpSpecificQueries:  
rxIgmpV3CurrentStateRecords:  
rxIgmpV3FilterChangeRecords:  
rxIgmpV3SourceListChangeRecords:0  
This menu option displays statistics about the use of the IGMP Multicast Groups.  
IGMP statistics are described in the following table:  
Table 5-21 IGMP Statistics (/stats/l3/igmp)  
Statistic  
Description  
Total number of valid IGMP packets received  
Total number of invalid packets received  
rxIgmpValidPkts  
rxIgmpInvalidPkts  
rxIgmpGenQueries  
Total number of General Membership Query  
packets received  
Total number of Membership Query packets  
received from specific groups  
rxIgmpGrpSpecificQueries  
Total number of Group Source-Specific Queries  
(GSSQ) received  
rxIgmpGroupSrcSpecificQueries  
Total number of Leave requests received  
rxIgmpLeaves  
Total number of Membership Reports received  
Total number of Membership reports transmitted  
rxIgmpReports  
txIgmpReports  
Total number of Membership Query packets  
transmitted to specific groups  
txIgmpGrpSpecificQueries  
Total number of Leave messages transmitted  
Total number of Current State records received  
txIgmpLeaves  
rxIgmpV3CurrentStateRecords  
rxIgmpV3SourceListChangeRecords  
Total number of Source List Change records  
received.  
Total number of Filter Change records received.  
rxIgmpV3FilterChangeRecords  
148 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/stats/l3/ospf  
OSPF Statistics  
[OSPF stats Menu]  
general - Show global stats  
aindex - Show area(s) stats  
if - Show interface(s) stats  
Table 5-22 OSPF Statistics Menu (/stats/l3/ospf)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
general  
Displays global statistics. See page 150 for sample output.  
aindex  
Displays area statistics.  
if  
Displays interface statistics.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/stats/l3/ospf/general  
OSPF Global Statistics  
The OSPF General Statistics contain the sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF  
areas and interfaces.  
OSPF stats  
----------  
Rx/Tx Stats:  
Rx  
Tx  
--------  
--------  
Pkts  
hello  
database  
ls requests  
ls acks  
ls updates  
0
23  
4
3
7
0
518  
12  
1
7
7
9
Nbr change stats:  
hello  
Intf change Stats:  
hello  
2
0
2
2
2
2
0
0
2
0
0
1
4
2
0
0
2
0
5
start  
n2way  
down  
loop  
unloop  
wait timer  
backup  
adjoint ok  
negotiation done  
exchange done  
bad requests  
bad sequence  
loading done  
n1way  
nbr change  
rst_ad  
down  
Timers kickoff  
hello  
514  
retransmit  
lsa lock  
lsa ack  
dbage  
summary  
1028  
0
0
0
0
0
ase export  
150 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 5-23 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general)  
Statistics  
Description  
Rx/Tx Stats:  
Rx Pkts  
The sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and inter-  
faces.  
Tx Pkts  
The sum total of all OSPF packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and  
interfaces.  
Rx Hello  
The sum total of all Hello packets received on all OSPF areas and inter-  
faces.  
Tx Hello  
The sum total of all Hello packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and  
interfaces.  
Rx Database  
Tx Database  
Rx ls Requests  
Tx ls Requests  
Rx ls Acks  
Tx ls Acks  
Rx ls Updates  
Tx ls Updates  
The sum total of all Database Description packets received on all OSPF  
areas and interfaces.  
The sum total of all Database Description packets transmitted on all  
OSPF areas and interfaces.  
The sum total of all Link State Request packets received on all OSPF  
areas and interfaces.  
The sum total of all Link State Request packets transmitted on all OSPF  
areas and interfaces.  
The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets received on all  
OSPF areas and interfaces.  
The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets transmitted on  
all OSPF areas and interfaces.  
The sum total of all Link State Update packets received on all OSPF areas  
and interfaces.  
The sum total of all Link State Update packets transmitted on all OSPF  
areas and interfaces.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 5-23 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) (Continued)  
Statistics  
Description  
Nbr Change Stats:  
hello  
The sum total of all Hello packets received from neighbors on all OSPF  
areas and interfaces.  
Start  
The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is, an indication that  
Hello packets should now be sent to the neighbor at intervals of Hel-  
loIntervalseconds.) across all OSPF areas and interfaces.  
n2way  
The sum total number of bidirectional communication establishment  
between this router and other neighboring routers.  
adjoint ok  
The sum total number of decisions to be made (again) as to whether an  
adjacency should be established/maintained with the neighbor across all  
OSPF areas and interfaces.  
negotiation done  
exchange done  
bad requests  
The sum total number of neighbors in this state wherein the Master/slave  
relationship has been negotiated, and sequence numbers have been  
exchanged, across all OSPF areas and interfaces.  
The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is, in an adjacency's  
final state) having transmitted a full sequence of Database Description  
packets, across all OSPF areas and interfaces.  
The sum total number of Link State Requests which have been received  
for a link state advertisement not contained in the database across all  
interfaces and OSPF areas.  
bad sequence  
The sum total number of Database Description packets which have been  
received that either:  
a) Has an unexpected DD sequence number  
b) Unexpectedly has the init bit set  
c) Has an options field differing from the last Options field  
received in a Database Description packet.  
Any of these conditions indicate that some error has occurred during  
adjacency establishment for all OSPF areas and interfaces.  
loading done  
n1way  
The sum total number of link state updates received for all out-of-date  
portions of the database across all OSPF areas and interfaces.  
The sum total number of Hello packets received from neighbors, in which  
this router is not mentioned across all OSPF interfaces and areas.  
rst_ad  
The sum total number of times the Neighbor adjacency has been reset  
across all OPSF areas and interfaces.  
down  
The total number of Neighboring routers down (that is, in the initial  
state of a neighbor conversation.) across all OSPF areas and interfaces.  
152 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 5-23 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) (Continued)  
Statistics  
Description  
Intf Change Stats:  
hello  
down  
loop  
The sum total number of Hello packets sent on all interfaces and areas.  
The sum total number of interfaces down in all OSPF areas.  
The sum total of interfaces no longer connected to the attached network  
across all OSPF areas and interfaces.  
unloop  
The sum total number of interfaces, connected to the attached network in  
all OSPF areas.  
wait timer  
The sum total number of times the Wait Timer has been fired, indicating  
the end of the waiting period that is required before electing a (Backup)  
Designated Router across all OSPF areas and interfaces.  
backup  
The sum total number of Backup Designated Routers on the attached net-  
work for all OSPF areas and interfaces.  
nbr change  
The sum total number of changes in the set of bidirectional neighbors  
associated with any interface across all OSPF areas.  
Timers Kickoff:  
hello  
The sum total number of times the Hello timer has been fired (which trig-  
gers the sendof a Hello packet) across all OPSF areas and interfaces.  
retransmit  
lsa lock  
lsa ack  
The sum total number of times the Retransmit timer has been fired across  
all OPSF areas and interfaces.  
The sum total number of times the Link State Advertisement (LSA) lock  
timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces.  
The sum total number of times the LSA Acktimer has been fired across  
all OSPF areas and interfaces.  
dbage  
The total number of times the data base age (Dbage) has been fired.  
summary  
ase export  
The total number of times the Summary timer has been fired.  
The total number of times the Autonomous System Export (ASE) timer  
has been fired.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/stats/l3/vrrp  
VRRP Statistics  
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on the GbE Switch Module provides  
redundancy between routers in a LAN. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual  
router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. One of  
the virtual routers is then elected as the master, based on a number of priority criteria, and  
assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. If the master fails, one of the backup  
virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address.  
When virtual routers are configured, you can display the following protocol statistics for VRRP:  
Advertisements received (vrrpInAdvers)  
Advertisements transmitted (vrrpOutAdvers)  
Advertisements received, but ignored (vrrpBadAdvers)  
The statistics for the VRRP LAN are displayed:  
VRRP statistics:  
vrrpInAdvers:  
0 vrrpBadAdvers:  
0
vrrpOutAdvers:  
vrrpBadVersion:  
vrrpBadAddress:  
vrrpBadPassword:  
0
0 vrrpBadVrid:  
0 vrrpBadData:  
0 vrrpBadInterval:  
0
0
0
Table 5-24 VRRP Statistics (/stats/l3/vrrp)  
Statistics Description  
vrrpInAdvers  
vrrpBadAdvers  
vrrpOutAdvers  
vrrpBadVersion  
The total number of valid VRRP advertisements that have been received.  
The total number of VRRP advertisements received that were dropped.  
The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been sent.  
The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a bad ver-  
sion number.  
vrrpBadVrid  
The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a bad virtual  
router ID.  
vrrpBadAddress  
The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a bad  
address.  
vrrpBadData  
The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had bad data.  
vrrpBadPassword  
The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a bad pass-  
word.  
154 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 5-24 VRRP Statistics (/stats/l3/vrrp)  
Statistics Description  
vrrpBadInterval  
The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a bad inter-  
val.  
/stats/l3/rip  
Routing Information Protocol Statistics  
RIP ALL STATS INFORMATION:  
RIP packets received = 12  
RIP packets sent  
= 75  
RIP request received = 0  
RIP response recevied = 12  
RIP request sent  
RIP reponse sent  
RIP route timeout  
= 3  
= 72  
= 0  
RIP bad size packet received = 0  
RIP bad version received  
RIP bad zeros received  
RIP bad src port received  
RIP bad src IP received  
= 0  
= 0  
= 0  
= 0  
RIP packets from self received = 0  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/stats/mp  
Management Processor Statistics  
[MP-specific Statistics Menu]  
pkt  
tcb  
ucb  
cpu  
- Show Packet stats  
- Show All TCP control blocks in use  
- Show All UDP control blocks in use  
- Show CPU utilization  
Table 5-25 Management Processor Statistics Menu Options (/stats/mp)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
pkt  
Displays packet statistics, to check for leads and load. To view a sample output and a description of  
the stats, see page 157.  
tcb  
Displays all TCP control blocks that are in use. To view a sample output and a description of the  
stats, see page 158.  
ucb  
Displays all UDP control blocks that are in use. To view a sample output, see page 158.  
cpu  
Displays CPU utilization for periods of up to 1, 4, and 64 seconds. To view a sample output and a  
description of the stats, see page 159.  
156 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/stats/mp/pkt  
MP Packet Statistics  
Packet counts:  
allocs:  
mediums:  
jumbos:  
smalls:  
failures:  
1722684  
frees:  
1722684  
0
0
0
0
mediums hi-watermark:  
jumbos hi-watermark:  
smalls hi-watermark:  
4
0
8
Table 5-26 Packet Statistics (/stats/mp/pkt)  
Statistics Description  
allocs  
Total number of packet allocations from the packet buffer pool by the  
TCP/IP protocol stack.  
frees  
Total number of times the packet buffers are freed (released) to the packet  
buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.  
mediums  
Total number of packet allocations with size between 128 to 1536 bytes  
from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.  
mediums hi-water-  
mark  
The highest number of packet allocation with size between 128 to 1536  
bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.  
jumbos  
Total number of packet allocations with more than 1536 bytes from the  
packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.  
jumbos hi-watermark The highest number of packet allocation with more than 1536 bytes from  
the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.  
smalls  
Total number of packet allocations with size less than 128 bytes from the  
packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.  
smalls hi-watermark The highest number of packet allocation with size less than 128 bytes  
from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.  
failures  
Total number of packet allocation failures from the packet buffer pool by  
the TCP/IP protocol stack.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/stats/mp/tcb  
TCP Statistics  
All TCP allocated control blocks:  
10ad41e8: 0.0.0.0  
10ad5790: 47.81.27.5  
0 <=> 0.0.0.0  
1171 <=> 47.80.23.243  
80 listen  
23 established  
Table 5-27 MP Specified TCP Statistics (/stats/mp/tcb)  
Statistics  
Description  
Memory  
10ad41e8/10ad5790  
0.0.0.0/47.81.27.5  
0/1171  
Destination IP address  
Destination port  
Source IP  
0.0.0.0/47.80.23.243  
80/23  
Source port  
State  
listen/established  
/stats/mp/ucb  
UCB Statistics  
All UDP allocated control blocks:  
161: listen  
158 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/stats/mp/cpu  
CPU Statistics  
This menu option enables you to display the CPU utilization statistics.  
CPU utilization:  
cpuUtil1Second:  
cpuUtil4Seconds:  
cpuUtil64Seconds:  
53%  
54%  
54%  
Table 5-28 CPU Statistics (stats/mp/cpu)  
Statistics  
Description  
cpuUtil1Second  
cpuUtil4Seconds  
The utilization of MP CPU over 1 second. It shows the percentage.  
The utilization of MP CPU over 4 seconds. It shows the percentage.  
cpuUtil64Seconds The utilization of MP CPU over 64 seconds. It shows the percentage.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/stats/acl  
ACL Statistics  
acl  
- Display ACL stats  
meter  
dump  
- Display ACL metering stats  
- Display all available ACL stats  
clracl - Clear ACL stats  
clrmeter - Clear ACL metering stats  
ACL statistics are described in the following table.  
Table 5-29 ACL Statistics Menu Options (/stats/acl)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
acl <1-4096>  
Displays the Access Control List Statistics for a specific ACL. For details, see page 160.  
meter <1-127>  
Displays statistics for a specific ACL Meter. For details, see page 161.  
dump  
Displays all ACL statistics.  
clracl  
Clears all ACL statistics.  
clrmeter  
Clears all ACL metering statistics.  
/stats/acl/acl <ACL number>  
ACL Statistics  
This option displays ACL statistics.  
Hits for ACL 1, port EXT1:  
Hits for ACL 2, port EXT1:  
26057515  
26057497  
160 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/stats/acl/meter <meter number>  
ACL Meter Statistics  
This option displays ACL meter statistics.  
Out of profile hits for Meter 1, Port EXT1: 0  
Out of profile hits for Meter 2, Port EXT1: 0  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/stats/snmp  
SNMP Statistics  
NOTE You can reset the SNMP counter to zero by using clearcommand, as follows:  
>> Statistics# snmp clear  
SNMP statistics:  
snmpInPkts:  
150097 snmpInBadVersions:  
0 snmpInBadC'tyUses:  
0 snmpEnableAuthTraps:  
150097 snmpInBadTypes:  
0 snmpInNoSuchNames:  
0 snmpInReadOnlys:  
0 snmpInTotalReqVars:  
2731 snmpInGetRequests:  
131389 snmpInSetRequests:  
0 snmpInTraps:  
0 snmpOutNoSuchNames:  
0 snmpOutReadOnlys:  
1 snmpOutGetRequests:  
0 snmpOutSetRequests:  
150093 snmpOutTraps:  
0 snmpProxyDrops:  
0
0
0
0
0
0
snmpInBadC'tyNames:  
snmpInASNParseErrs:  
snmpOutPkts:  
snmpInTooBigs:  
snmpInBadValues:  
snmpInGenErrs:  
snmpInTotalSetVars:  
snmpInGetNexts:  
snmpInGetResponses:  
snmpOutTooBigs:  
snmpOutBadValues:  
snmpOutGenErrs:  
snmpOutGetNexts:  
snmpOutGetResponses:  
snmpSilentDrops:  
798464  
17593  
615  
0
1
0
0
0
4
0
Table 5-30 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp)  
Statistics Description  
snmpInPkts  
The total number of Messages delivered to the SNMP entity from the  
transport service.  
snmpInBadVersions  
The total number of SNMP Messages, which were delivered to the  
SNMP protocol entity and were for an unsupported SNMP version.  
snmpInBadC'tyNames The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP entity which  
used an SNMP community name not known to the said entity (the switch).  
snmpInBadC'tyUses  
The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP protocol  
entity which represented an SNMP operation which was not allowed by  
the SNMP community named in the Message.  
162 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 5-30 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp)  
Statistics Description  
snmpInASNParseErrs The total number of ASN.1 or BER errors encountered by the SNMP pro-  
tocol entity when decoding SNMP Messages received.  
Note: OSI's method of specifying abstract objects is called ASN.1  
(Abstract Syntax Notation One, defined in X.208), and one set of rules  
for representing such objects as strings of ones and zeros is called the  
BER (Basic Encoding Rules, defined in X.209). ASN.1 is a flexible nota-  
tion that allows one to define a variety of data types, from simple types  
such as integers and bit strings to structured types such as sets and  
sequences. BER describes how to represent or encode values of each  
ASN.1 type as a string of eight-bit octets.  
snmpEnableAuth  
Traps  
An object to enable or disable the authentication traps generated by this  
entity (the switch).  
snmpOutPkts  
The total number of SNMP Messages which were passed from the SNMP  
protocol entity to the transport service.  
snmpInBadTypes  
snmpInTooBigs  
The total number of SNMP Messages which failed ASN parsing.  
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were  
delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the  
error-status field is too big.  
snmpInNoSuchNames  
snmpInBadValues  
snmpInReadOnlys  
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were  
delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the  
error-status field is noSuchName.  
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were  
delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the  
error-status field is badValue.  
The total number of valid SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which  
were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of  
the error-status field is `read-Only'. It should be noted that it is a protocol  
error to generate an SNMP PDU, which contains the value `read-Only' in  
the error-status field. As such, this object is provided as a means of  
detecting incorrect implementations of the SNMP.  
snmpInGenErrs  
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which were  
delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the  
error-status field is genErr.  
snmpInTotalReqVars The total number of MIB objects which have been retrieved successfully  
by the SNMP protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP Get-  
Request and Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs).  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 5-30 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp)  
Statistics Description  
snmpInTotalSetVars The total number of MIB objects, which have been altered successfully  
by the SNMP protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP Set-  
Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs).  
snmpInGetRequests  
The total number of SNMP Get-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs),  
which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity.  
snmpInGetNexts  
The total number of SNMP Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which  
have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity.  
snmpInSetRequests  
The total number of SNMP Set-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs),  
which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity.  
snmpInGetResponses The total number of SNMP Get-Response Protocol Data Units (PDUs),  
which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity.  
snmpInTraps  
The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have  
been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity.  
snmpOutTooBigs  
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which were gen-  
erated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-  
status field is too big.  
snmpOutNoSuchNames The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which were gen-  
erated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-  
status is noSuchName.  
snmpOutBadValues  
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which were gen-  
erated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-  
status field is badValue.  
snmpOutReadOnlys  
snmpOutGenErrs  
Not in use.  
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which were gen-  
erated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-  
status field is genErr.  
snmpOutGetRequests The total number of SNMP Get-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs),  
which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity.  
snmpOutGetNexts  
The total number of SNMP Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which  
have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity.  
snmpOutSetRequests The total number of SNMP Set-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs),  
which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity.  
snmpOutGet  
Responses  
The total number of SNMP Get-Response Protocol Data Units (PDUs),  
which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity.  
164 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 5-30 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp)  
Statistics Description  
snmpOutTraps  
The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have  
been generated by the SNMP protocol entity.  
snmpSilentDrops  
The total number of GetRequest-PDUs, GetNextRequest-PDUs,  
GetBulkRequest-PDUs, SetRequest-PDUs, and InformRe-  
quest-PDUs delivered to the SNMPv2 entity which were silently  
dropped because the size of a reply containing an alternate Response-  
PDU with an empty variable bindings field was greater than either a local  
constraint or the maximum message size associated with the originator of  
the request.  
snmpProxyDrops  
The total number of GetRequest-PDUs, GetNextRequest-PDUs,  
GetBulkRequest-PDUs, SetRequest-PDUs, and InformRe-  
quest-PDUs delivered to the SNMP entity which were silently dropped  
because the transmission of the message to a proxy target failed in a man-  
ner such that no Response-PDU could be returned.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/stats/ntp  
NTP Statistics  
Alteon OS uses NTP (Network Timing Protocol) version 3 to synchronize the switch’s internal  
clock with an atomic time calibrated NTP server. With NTP enabled, the switch can accurately  
update its internal clock to be consistent with other devices on the network and generates accu-  
rate syslogs.  
NTP statistics:  
Primary Server:  
Requests Sent:  
Responses Received:  
Updates:  
17  
17  
1
Secondary Server:  
Requests Sent:  
Responses Received:  
Updates:  
0
0
0
Last update based on response from primary server.  
Last update time: 18:04:16 Tue Mar 13, 2007  
Current system time: 18:55:49 Tue Mar 13, 2007  
Table 5-31 NTP Statistics Parameters (/stats/ntp)  
Field  
Description  
Primary Server  
Requests Sent: The total number of NTP requests the switch sent to  
the primary NTP server to synchronize time.  
Responses Received: The total number of NTP responses received  
from the primary NTP server.  
Updates: The total number of times the switch updated its time  
based on the NTP responses received from the primary NTP server.  
Secondary Server  
Requests Sent: The total number of NTP requests the switch sent to  
the secondary NTP server to synchronize time.  
Responses Received: The total number of NTP responses received  
from the secondary NTP server.  
Updates: The total number of times the switch updated its time  
based on the NTP responses received from the secondary NTP  
server.  
Last update based on  
response from primary server  
Last update of time on the switch based on either primary or secondary  
NTP response received.  
166 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 5-31 NTP Statistics Parameters (/stats/ntp)  
Field Description  
Last update time  
The time stamp showing the time when the switch was last updated.  
Current system time  
The switch system time when the command /stats/ntp was  
issued.  
NOTE You can issue /stats/ntp/clear command to delete all statistics.  
/stats/dump  
Statistics Dump  
Use the dump command to dump all switch statistics available from the Statistics Menu (40K or more,  
depending on your configuration). This data can be used to tune or debug switch performance.  
If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your worksta-  
tion to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
168 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 6  
The Configuration Menu  
This chapter discusses how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI) for making, viewing, and  
saving switch configuration changes. Many of the commands, although not new, display more  
or different information than in the previous version. Important differences are called out in the  
text.  
40M2420, April 2007  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg  
Configuration Menu  
[Configuration Menu]  
sys  
- System-wide Parameter Menu  
port  
l2  
- Port Menu  
- Layer 2 Menu  
l3  
- Layer 3 Menu  
qos  
- QOS Menu  
acl  
- Access Control List Menu  
- Port Mirroring Menu  
pmirr  
setup  
dump  
ptcfg  
gtcfg  
cur  
- Step by step configuration set up  
- Dump current configuration to script file  
- Backup current configuration to FTP/TFTP server  
- Restore current configuration from FTP/TFTP server  
- Display current configuration  
Each configuration option is briefly described in Table 6-1, with pointers to detailed menu  
commands.  
Table 6-1 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
sys  
Displays the System Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 174.  
port <port alias or number>  
Displays the Port Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 208.  
l2  
Displays the Layer 2 Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 217.  
l3  
Displays the Layer 3 Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 252.  
qos  
Displays the Quality of Service Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 307.  
acl  
Displays the ACL Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 310.  
pmirr  
Displays the Mirroring Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 318.  
setup  
Step-by-step configuration set-up of the switch. For details, see page 320.  
170 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-1 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
dump  
Dumps current configuration to a script file. For details, see page 320.  
ptcfg <host name or IP address of TFTP server> <filename on host>  
Backs up current configuration to TFTP server. For details, see page 321.  
gtcfg <host name or IP address of TFTP server> <filename on host>  
Restores current configuration from TFTP server. For details, see page 321.  
cur  
Displays current configuration parameters.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Viewing, Applying, and Saving Changes  
As you use the configuration menus to set switch parameters, the changes you make do not  
take effect immediately. All changes are considered “pending” until you explicitly apply them.  
Also, any changes are lost the next time the switch boots unless the changes are explicitly  
saved.  
NOTE Some operations can override the settings in the Configuration menu. Therefore, set-  
tings you view in the Configuration menu (for example, port status) might differ from run-time  
information that you view in the Information menu or on the management module. The Infor-  
mation menu displays current run-time information of switch parameters.  
While configuration changes are in the pending state, you can do the following:  
View the pending changes  
Apply the pending changes  
Save the changes to flash memory  
Viewing Pending Changes  
You can view all pending configuration changes by entering diffat the menu prompt.  
NOTE The diffcommand is a global command. Therefore, you can enter diffat any  
prompt in the CLI.  
Applying Pending Changes  
To make your configuration changes active, you must apply them. To apply configuration  
changes, enter applyat any prompt in the CLI.  
# apply  
NOTE The applycommand is a global command. Therefore, you can enter applyat any  
prompt in the administrative interface.  
172 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Saving the Configuration  
In addition to applying the configuration changes, you can save them to flash memory on the  
GbE Switch Module.  
NOTE If you do not save the changes, they will be lost the next time the system is rebooted.  
To save the new configuration, enter the following command at any CLI prompt:  
# save  
When you save configuration changes, the changes are saved to the active configuration block.  
The configuration being replaced by the save is first copied to the backup configuration block.  
If you do not want the previous configuration block copied to the backup configuration block,  
enter the following instead:  
# save n  
You can decide which configuration you want to run the next time you reset the switch. Your  
options include:  
The active configuration block  
The backup configuration block  
Factory default configuration  
You can view all pending configuration changes that have been applied but not saved to flash  
memory using the diffflashcommand. It is a global command that can be executed from  
any menu.  
For instructions on selecting the configuration to run at the next system reset, see “Selecting a  
Configuration Block” on page 336.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/sys  
System Configuration  
[System Menu]  
syslog - Syslog Menu  
sshd - SSH Server Menu  
radius - RADIUS Authentication Menu  
tacacs+ - TACACS+ Authentication Menu  
ldap  
ntp  
- LDAP Authentication Menu  
- NTP Server Menu  
ssnmp  
- System SNMP Menu  
access - System Access Menu  
date  
time  
- Set system date  
- Set system time  
timezone - Set system timezone (daylight savings)  
olddst - Set system DST for US  
idle  
- Set timeout for idle CLI sessions  
notice - Set login notice  
e2e  
- Enable/disable end-to-end flow control mode  
hgibp  
bannr  
- Enable/disable higig IBP  
- Set login banner  
hprompt - Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt  
reminders - Enable/disable Reminders  
cur  
- Display current system-wide parameters  
This menu provides configuration of switch management parameters such as user and adminis-  
trator privilege mode passwords, Web-based management settings, and management access  
lists.  
Table 6-2 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
syslog  
Displays the Syslog Menu. To view menu options, see page 177.  
sshd  
Displays the SSH Server Menu. To view menu options, see page 178.  
radius  
Displays the RADIUS Authentication Menu. To view menu options, see page 179.  
tacacs+  
Displays the TACACS+ Authentication Menu. To view menu options, see page 181.  
ldap  
Displays the LDAP Authentication Menu. To view menu options, see page 184.  
174 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-2 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
ntp  
Displays the Network Time Protocol (NTP) Server Menu.  
To view menu options, see page 186.  
ssnmp  
Displays the System SNMP Menu. To view menu options, see page 188.  
access  
Displays the System Access Menu. To view menu options, see page 201.  
date  
Prompts the user for the system date. The date reverts to its default value when the switch is reset.  
time  
Configures the system time using a 24-hour clock format. The time reverts to its default value  
when the switch is reset.  
timezone  
Configures the time zone where the switch resides. You are prompted to select your location (con-  
tinent, country, region) by the timezone wizard. Once a region is selected, the switch updates the  
time to reflect local changes to Daylight Savings Time, etc.  
olddst enable|disable  
Enables or disables use of the Daylight Saving Time (DST) rules in effect prior to the year 2007.  
The default value is disabled.  
idle <idle timeout in minutes>  
Sets the idle timeout for CLI sessions, from 1 to 60 minutes. The default is 5 minutes.  
notice <max 1024 char multi-line login notice> <'-' to end>  
Displays login notice immediately before the “Enter password:” prompt. This notice can contain  
up to 1024 characters and new lines.  
e2e enable|disable  
Enables or disables End-to-End flow control mode. The default value is enabled. If you change  
the flow-control mode, you must apply and save the changes, then reboot the switch before the  
change takes effect.  
The GbE switch module has two switching chips connected by an internal high-capacity link  
(Higig). Over subscription of traffic across the Higig link is handled by one of the following flow  
control modes:  
End-to-End (E2E) Flow Control  
Ingress Back Pressure (IBP) across the Higig link  
One of the modes should be enabled, and the other mode disabled. E2E flow control works best for  
most applications. E2E provides a higher throughput and better overall switch performance, but  
does not provide lossless flow control.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-2 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
hgibp enable|disable  
Enables or disables Higig Ingress Back Pressure (IBP) flow control mode. The default value is  
disabled. If you change the flow-control mode, you must apply and save the changes, then  
reboot the switch before the change takes effect.  
The GbE switch module has two switching chips connected by an internal high-capacity link  
(Higig). Over subscription of traffic across the Higig link is handled by one of the following flow  
control modes:  
End-to-End (E2E) Flow Control  
Ingress Back Pressure (IBP) across the Higig link  
One of the modes should be enabled, and the other mode disabled. Applications that cannot toler-  
ate packet loss might require IBP across the Higig link. Higig IPB achieves lossless operation, but  
it might result in a lower throughput.  
bannr <string, maximum 80 characters>  
Configures a login banner of up to 80 characters. When a user or administrator logs into the switch,  
the login banner is displayed. It is also displayed as part of the output from the /info/syscom-  
mand.  
hprompt disable|enable  
Enables or disables displaying of the host name (system administrator’s name) in the Command  
Line Interface (CLI).  
reminders disable|enable  
Enables or disables reminder messages in the CLI. The default value is enabled.  
cur  
Displays the current system parameters.  
176 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/sys/syslog  
System Host Log Configuration  
[Syslog Menu]  
host  
host2  
sever  
- Set IP address of first syslog host  
- Set IP address of second syslog host  
- Set the severity of first syslog host  
sever2 - Set the severity of second syslog host  
facil - Set facility of first syslog host  
facil2 - Set facility of second syslog host  
console - Enable/disable console output of syslog messages  
log  
cur  
- Enable/disable syslogging of features  
- Display current syslog settings  
Table 6-3 Host Log Menu Options (/cfg/sys/syslog)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
host <new syslog host IP address (such as, 192.4.17.223)>  
Sets the IP address of the first syslog host.  
host2 <new syslog host IP address (such as, 192.4.17.223)>  
Sets the IP address of the second syslog host.  
sever <syslog host local severity (0–7)>  
This option sets the severity level of the first syslog host displayed. The default is 7, which means  
log all severity levels.  
sever2 <syslog host local severity (0–7)>  
This option sets the severity level of the second syslog host displayed. The default is 7, which  
means, log all severity levels.  
facil<syslog host local facility (0-7)>  
This option sets the facility level of the first syslog host displayed. The default is 0.  
facil2<syslog host local facility (0-7)>  
This option sets the facility level of the second syslog host displayed. The default is 0.  
console disable|enable  
Enables or disables delivering syslog messages to the console. When necessary, disabling con-  
soleensures the switch is not affected by syslog messages. It is enabled by default.  
log <feature|all> <enable|disable>  
Displays a list of features for which syslog messages can be generated. You can choose to enable/  
disable specific features (such as vlans, stg, or servers), or enable/disable syslog on all available  
features.  
cur  
Displays the current syslog settings.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/sys/sshd  
SSH Server Configuration  
[SSHD Menu]  
intrval - Set Interval for generating the RSA server key  
scpadm - Set SCP-only admin password  
hkeygen - Generate the RSA host key  
skeygen - Generate the RSA server key  
sshport - Set SSH server port number  
ena  
dis  
on  
- Enable the SCP apply and save  
- Disable the SCP apply and save  
- Turn SSH server ON  
off  
cur  
- Turn SSH server OFF  
- Display current SSH server configuration  
For the GbE Switch Module, this menu enables Secure Shell access from any SSH client. SSH  
scripts can be viewed by using the /cfg/dumpcommand (see page 320).  
NOTE Only the following commands are accessible through a serial connection:  
ena, on, off, cur  
Table 6-4 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sshd)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
intrval <0 - 24>  
Set the interval for auto-generation of the RSA server key.  
scpadm  
Set the administration password for SCP access.  
hkeygen  
Generate the RSA host key.  
skeygen  
Generate the RSA server key.  
sshport <TCP port number>  
Sets the SSH server port number.  
ena  
Enables the SCP apply and save.  
dis  
Disables the SCP apply and save.  
on  
Enables the SSH server.  
178 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-4 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sshd)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
off  
Disables the SSH server.  
cur  
Displays the current SSH server configuration.  
/cfg/sys/radius  
RADIUS Server Configuration  
[RADIUS Server Menu]  
prisrv - Set primary RADIUS server address  
secsrv - Set secondary RADIUS server address  
secret - Set RADIUS secret  
secret2 - Set secondary RADIUS server secret  
port  
- Set RADIUS port  
retries - Set RADIUS server retries  
timeout - Set RADIUS server timeout  
bckdoor - Enable/disable RADIUS backdoor for telnet/ssh/http/https  
on  
off  
cur  
- Turn RADIUS authentication ON  
- Turn RADIUS authentication OFF  
- Display current RADIUS configuration  
Table 6-5 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/radius)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
prisrv <IP address>  
Sets the primary RADIUS server address.  
secsrv <IP address>  
Sets the secondary RADIUS server address.  
secret <1-32 character secret>  
This is the shared secret between the switch and the RADIUS server(s).  
secret2 <1-32 character secret>  
This is the secondary shared secret between the switch and the RADIUS server(s).  
port <RADIUS port configure, default 1645>  
Enter the number of the UDP port to be configured, between 1500 - 3000. The default is 1645.  
retries <RADIUS server retries (1-3)>  
Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different RADIUS server.  
The default is 3 requests.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-5 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/radius)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
timeout <RADIUS server timeout seconds (1-10)>  
Sets the amount of time, in seconds, before a RADIUS server authentication attempt is considered  
to have failed. The default is 3 seconds.  
bckdoor disable|enable  
Enables or disables the RADIUS backdoor for telnet. The bckdoorcommand also applies to  
SSH/SCP connections and the Browser-Based Interface (BBI). The default setting is disabled.  
To obtain the RADIUS backdoor password for your GbESM, contact your IBM Service and  
Support line.  
on  
Enables the RADIUS server.  
off  
Disables the RADIUS server.  
cur  
Displays the current RADIUS server parameters.  
180 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/sys/tacacs+  
TACACS+ Server Configuration  
TACACS (Terminal Access Controller Access Control system) is an authentication protocol  
that allows a remote access server to forward a user's logon password to an authentication  
server to determine whether access can be allowed to a given system. TACACS is an  
encryption protocol, and therefore less secure than TACACS+ and Remote Authentication  
Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) protocols. (Both TACACS and TACACS+ are described in  
RFC 1492.)  
TACACS+ protocol is more reliable than RADIUS, as TACACS+ uses the Transmission Con-  
trol Protocol (TCP) whereas RADIUS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP). Also,  
RADIUS combines authentication and authorization in a user profile, whereas TACACS+  
separates the two operations.  
TACACS+ offers the following advantages over RADIUS as the authentication device:  
TACACS+ is TCP-based, so it facilitates connection-oriented traffic.  
It supports full-packet encryption, as opposed to password-only in authentication requests.  
It supports de-coupled authentication, authorization, and accounting.  
[TACACS+ Server Menu]  
prisrv - Set IP address of primary TACACS+ server  
secsrv - Set IP address of secondary TACACS+ server  
secret - Set secret for primary TACACS+ server  
secret2 - Set secret for secondary TACACS+ server  
port  
- Set TACACS+ port number  
retries - Set number of TACACS+ server retries  
timeout - Set timeout value of TACACS+ server retries  
bckdoor - Enable/disable TACACS+ backdoor for telnet/ssh/  
http/hhtps  
secbd  
- Enable/disable TACACS+ secure backdoor for telnet/  
ssh/http  
cmap  
- Enable/disable TACACS+ new privilege level mapping  
passch - Enable/disable TACACS+ password change  
chpass_p - Set new password for primary server  
chpass_s - Set new password for secondary server  
cauth  
clog  
on  
- Enable/disable TACACS+ command authorization  
- Enable/disable TACACS+ command logging  
- Enable TACACS+ authentication  
off  
- Disable TACACS+ authentication  
cur  
- Display current TACACS+ settings  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-6 TACACS+ Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/tacacs)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
prisrv <IP address>  
Defines the primary TACACS+ server address.  
secsrv <IP address>  
Defines the secondary TACACS+ server address.  
secret <1-32 character secret>  
This is the shared secret between the switch and the TACACS+ server(s).  
secret2 <1-32 character secret>  
This is the secondary shared secret between the switch and the TACACS+ server(s).  
port<TACACS port configure, default 49>  
Enter the number of the TCP port to be configured, between 1 - 65000. The default is 49.  
retries <TACACS server retries, 1-3>  
Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different TACACS+ server.  
The default is 3 requests.  
timeout <TACACS server timeout seconds, 4-15>  
Sets the amount of time, in seconds, before a TACACS+ server authentication attempt is consid-  
ered to have failed. The default is 5 seconds.  
bckdoor disable|enable  
Enables or disables the TACACS+ back door for telnet. The telnetcommand also applies to  
SSH/SCP connections, and the Browser-Based Interface (BBI). The default is disabled.  
To obtain the TACACS+ backdoor password for your GbESM, contact your IBM Service and  
Support line.  
secbd enable|disable  
Enables or disables TACACS+ secure backdoor access through telnet, SSH, and the Browser-  
Based Interface (BBI).  
cmap enable|disable  
Enables or disables TACACS+ privilege-level mapping.  
The default value is disabled.  
passch enable|disable  
Enables or disables TACACS+ password change.  
The default value is disabled.  
chpass_p  
Configures the password for the primary TACACS+ server. The CLI will prompt you for input.  
chpass_s  
Configures the password for the secondary TACACS+ server. The CLI will prompt you for input.  
182 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-6 TACACS+ Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/tacacs)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
cauth disable|enable  
Enables or disables TACACS+ command authorization.  
clog disable|enable  
Enables or disables TACACS+ command logging.  
on  
Enables the TACACS+ server. This is the default setting.  
off  
Disables the TACACS+ server.  
cur  
Displays current TACACS+ configuration parameters.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/sys/ldap  
LDAP Server Configuration  
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) is an authentication protocol that allows a  
remote access server to forward a user's logon password to an authentication server to deter-  
mine whether access can be allowed to a given system.  
[LDAP Server Menu]  
prisrv - Set IP address of primary LDAP server  
secsrv - Set IP address of secondary LDAP server  
port  
- Set LDAP port number  
retries - Set number of LDAP server retries  
timeout - Set timeout value of LDAP server retries  
domain - Set domain name  
telnet - Enable/disable LDAP backdoor for telnet/ssh/http  
on  
off  
cur  
- Enable LDAP authentication  
- Disable LDAP authentication  
- Display current LDAP settings  
Table 6-7 LDAP Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ldap)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
prisrv <IP address>  
Defines the primary LDAP server address.  
secsrv <IP address>  
Defines the secondary LDAP server address.  
port<LDAP port configure, default 389>  
Enter the number of the TCP port to be configured, between 1 - 65000. The default is 389.  
retries <LDAP server retries, 1-3>  
Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different LDAP server. The  
default is 3 requests.  
timeout <LDAP server timeout seconds, 4-15>  
Sets the amount of time, in seconds, before a LDAP server authentication attempt is considered to  
have failed. The default is 5 seconds.  
domain <domain name (1-128 characters)>|none  
Sets the domain name for the LDAP server. Enter the full path for your organization. For example:  
ou=people,dc=mydomain,dc=com  
184 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-7 LDAP Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ldap)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
telnet disable|enable  
Enables or disables the LDAP back door for telnet. The telnetcommand also applies to  
SSH/SCP connections, and the Browser-Based Interface (BBI). The default is disabled.  
To obtain the LDAP backdoor password for your GbESM, contact your IBM Service and  
Support line.  
on  
Enables the LDAP server.  
off  
cur  
Disables the LDAP server. This is the default setting.  
Displays current LDAP configuration parameters.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/sys/ntp  
NTP Server Configuration  
[NTP Server Menu]  
prisrv - Set primary NTP server address  
secsrv - Set secondary NTP server address  
intrval - Set NTP server resync interval  
tzone - Set NTP timezone offset from GMT  
dlight - Enable or disable NTP daylight savings time  
on  
- Turn NTP service ON  
off  
cur  
- Turn NTP service OFF  
- Display current NTP configuration  
This menu enables you to synchronize the switch clock to a Network Time Protocol (NTP)  
server. By default, this option is disabled.  
Table 6-8 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ntp)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
prisrv <NTP Server IP address>  
Prompts for the IP addresses of the primary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the  
switch clock.  
secsrv <NTP Server IP address>  
Prompts for the IP addresses of the secondary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the  
switch clock.  
intrval <resync interval in minutes>  
Specifies the interval, that is, how often, in minutes (1-2880), to re-synchronize the switch clock  
with the NTP server.  
tzone <time zone offset, in HH:MM>  
Prompts for the NTP time zone offset, in hours and minutes, of the switch you are synchronizing  
from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).  
dlight disable|enable  
Disables or enables daylight savings time in the system clock. When enabled, the switch will add  
an extra hour to the system clock so that it is consistent with the local clock. By default, this option  
is disabled.  
on  
Enables the NTP synchronization service.  
186 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-8 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ntp)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
off  
Disables the NTP synchronization service.  
cur  
Displays the current NTP service settings.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
cfg/sys/ssnmp  
System SNMP Configuration  
[System SNMP Menu]  
snmpv3 - SNMPv3 Menu  
name  
- Set SNMP "sysName"  
locn  
- Set SNMP "sysLocation"  
cont  
- Set SNMP "sysContact"  
rcomm  
wcomm  
trsrc  
- Set SNMP read community string  
- Set SNMP write community string  
- Set SNMP trap source interface  
timeout - Set timeout for the SNMP state machine  
auth  
linkt  
cur  
- Enable/disable SNMP "sysAuthenTrap"  
- Enable/disable SNMP link up/down trap  
- Display current SNMP configuration  
Alteon OS supports SNMP-based network management. In SNMP model of network manage-  
ment, a management station (client/manager) accesses a set of variables known as MIBs (Man-  
agement Information Base) provided by the managed device (agent). If you are running an  
SNMP network management station on your network, you can manage the switch using the  
following standard SNMP MIBs:  
MIB II (RFC 1213)  
Ethernet MIB (RFC 1643)  
Bridge MIB (RFC 1493)  
An SNMP agent is a software process on the managed device that listens on UDP port 161 for  
SNMP messages. Each SNMP message sent to the agent contains a list of management objects  
to retrieve or to modify.  
SNMP parameters that can be modified include:  
System name  
System location  
System contact  
Use of the SNMP system authentication trap function  
Read community string  
Write community string  
Trap community strings  
188 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-9 System SNMP Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
snmpv3  
Displays SNMPv3 menu. To view menu options, see page 190.  
name <new string, maximum 64 characters>  
Configures the name for the system. The name can have a maximum of 64 characters.  
locn <new string, maximum 64 characters>  
Configures the name of the system location. The location can have a maximum of 64 characters.  
cont <new string, maximum 64 characters>  
Configures the name of the system contact. The contact can have a maximum of 64 characters.  
rcomm <new SNMP read community string, maximum 32 characters>  
Configures the SNMP read community string. The read community string controls SNMP “get”  
access to the switch. It can have a maximum of 32 characters. The default read community string is  
public.  
wcomm <new SNMP write community string, maximum 32 characters>  
Configures the SNMP write community string. The write community string controls SNMP “set”  
and “get” access to the switch. It can have a maximum of 32 characters. The default write commu-  
nity string is private.  
trsrc <1-128>  
Configures the source interface for SNMP traps.  
timeout <1-30>  
Set the timeout value for the SNMP state machine, in minutes.  
auth disable|enable  
Enables or disables the use of the system authentication trap facility. The default setting is dis-  
abled.  
linkt<port> [disable|enable]  
Enables or disables the sending of SNMP link up and link down traps. The default setting is  
enabled.  
cur  
Displays the current SNMP configuration.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3  
SNMPv3 Configuration  
SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2  
Framework by supporting the following:  
a new SNMP message format  
security for messages  
access control  
remote configuration of SNMP parameters  
For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please refer to RFC2271 to RFC2276.  
[SNMPv3 Menu]  
usm  
- usmUser Table menu  
view  
- vacmViewTreeFamily Table menu  
access - vacmAccess Table menu  
group  
comm  
taddr  
- vacmSecurityToGroup Table menu  
- community Table menu  
- targetAddr Table menu  
tparam - targetParams Table menu  
notify - notify Table menu  
v1v2  
cur  
- Enable/disable V1/V2 access  
- Display current SNMPv3 configuration  
Table 6-10 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
usm <usmUser number [1-16]>  
This command allows you to create a user security model (USM) entry for an authorized user. You  
can also configure this entry through SNMP. To view menu options, see page 192.  
view <vacmViewTreeFamily number [1-128]>  
This command allows you to create different MIB views. To view menu options, see page 193.  
access <vacmAccess number [1-32]>  
This command allows you to specify access rights. The View-based Access Control Model  
defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of the user.  
You need access control when you have to process retrieval or modification request from  
an SNMP entity. To view menu options, see page 194.  
group <vacmSecurityToGroup number [1-16]>  
A group maps the user name to the access group names and their access rights needed to  
access SNMP management objects. A group defines the access rights assigned to all  
names that belong to a particular group. To view menu options, see page 196.  
190 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-10 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3)  
comm <snmpCommunity number [1-16]>  
The community table contains objects for mapping community strings and version-independent  
SNMP message parameters. To view menu options, see page 197.  
taddr <snmpTargetAddr number [1-16]>  
This command allows you to configure destination information, consisting of a transport domain  
and a transport address. This is also termed as transport endpoint. The SNMP MIB provides a  
mechanism for performing source address validation on incoming requests, and for selecting com-  
munity strings based on target addresses for outgoing notifications. To view menu options, see  
page 198.  
tparam <target params index [1-16]>  
This command allows you to configure SNMP parameters, consisting of message processing  
model, security model, security level, and security name information. There may be multiple trans-  
port endpoints associated with a particular set of SNMP parameters, or a particular transport end-  
point may be associated with several sets of SNMP parameters. To view menu options, see  
page 199.  
notify <notify index [1-16]>  
A notification application typically monitors a system for particular events or conditions, and gen-  
erates Notification-Class messages based on these events or conditions. To view menu options, see  
page 200.  
v1v2 disable|enable  
This command allows you to enable or disable the access to SNMP version 1 and version 2. This  
command is enabled by default.  
cur  
Displays the current SNMPv3 configuration.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm  
User Security Model Configuration  
You can make use of a defined set of user identities using this Security Model. An SNMP  
engine must have the knowledge of applicable attributes of a user.  
This menu helps you create a user security model entry for an authorized user. You need to pro-  
vide a security name to create the USM entry.  
[SNMPv3 usmUser 1 Menu]  
name  
auth  
- Set USM user name  
- Set authentication protocol  
authpw - Set authentication password  
priv - Set privacy protocol  
privpw - Set privacy password  
del  
cur  
- Delete usmUser entry  
- Display current usmUser configuration  
Table 6-11 User Security Model Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/  
snmpv3/usm)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
name <32 character name>  
This command allows you to configure a string up to 32 characters long that represents the name of  
the user. This is the login name that you need in order to access the switch.  
auth md5|sha|none  
This command allows you to configure the authentication protocol between HMAC-MD5-96 or  
HMAC-SHA-96. The default algorithm is none.  
authpw  
If you selected an authentication algorithm using the above command, you need to provide a pass-  
word, otherwise you will get an error message during validation. This command allows you to cre-  
ate or change your password for authentication.  
priv des|none  
This command allows you to configure the type of privacy protocol on your switch. The privacy  
protocol protects messages from disclosure. The options are des(CBC-DES Symmetric Encryp-  
tion Protocol) or none. If you specify desas the privacy protocol, then make sure that you have  
selected one of the authentication protocols (MD5 or HMAC-SHA-96). If you select noneas the  
authentication protocol, you will get an error message.  
privpw  
This command allows you to create or change the privacy password.  
192 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-11 User Security Model Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/  
snmpv3/usm)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
del  
Deletes the USM user entries.  
cur  
Displays the USM user entries.  
cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view  
SNMPv3 View Configuration  
[SNMPv3 vacmViewTreeFamily 1 Menu]  
name  
tree  
mask  
type  
del  
- Set view name  
- Set MIB subtree(OID) which defines a family of view subtrees  
- Set view mask  
- Set view type  
- Delete vacmViewTreeFamily entry  
- Display current vacmViewTreeFamily configuration  
cur  
Table 6-12 SNMPv3 View Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
name <32 character name>  
This command defines the name for a family of view subtrees up to a maximum of 32 characters.  
tree <object identifier, such as,. 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1.0, max 32 characters>  
This command defines MIB tree, a string of maximum 32 characters, which when combined with  
the corresponding mask defines a family of view subtrees.  
mask <bitmask, max size 32 characters>  
This command defines the bit mask, which in combination with the corresponding tree defines a  
family of view subtrees.  
type included|excluded  
This command indicates whether the corresponding instances of vacmViewTreeFamilySub-  
tree and vacmViewTreeFamilyMaskdefine a family of view subtrees, which is included  
in or excluded from the MIB view.  
del  
Deletes the vacmViewTreeFamilygroup entry.  
cur  
Displays the current vacmViewTreeFamilyconfiguration.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access  
View-based Access Control Model Configuration  
The view-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for  
checking access rights of the user. Access control is needed when the user has to process  
SNMP retrieval or modification request from an SNMP entity.  
[SNMPv3 vacmAccess 1 Menu]  
name  
- Set group name  
prefix - Set content prefix  
model  
level  
match  
rview  
wview  
nview  
del  
- Set security model  
- Set minimum level of security  
- Set prefix only or exact match  
- Set read view index  
- Set write view index  
- Set notify view index  
- Delete vacmAccess entry  
- Display current vacmAccess configuration  
cur  
Table 6-13 View-based Access Control Model Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/  
snmpv3/access)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
name <32 character name>  
Defines the name of the group.  
prefix <32 character name>  
Defines the name of the context. An SNMP context is a collection of management information that  
an SNMP entity can access. An SNMP entity has access to many contexts. For more information  
on naming the management information, see RFC2571, the SNMP Architecture document. The  
view-based Access Control Model defines a table that lists the locally available contexts by con-  
textName.  
model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2  
Allows you to select the security model to be used.  
level noAuthNoPriv|authNoPriv|authPriv  
Defines the minimum level of security required to gain access rights. The level noAuthNoPriv  
means that the SNMP message will be sent without authentication and without using a privacy pro-  
tocol. The level authNoPrivmeans that the SNMP message will be sent with authentication but  
without using a privacy protocol. The authPrivmeans that the SNMP message will be sent both  
with authentication and using a privacy protocol.  
match exact|prefix  
If the value is set to exact, then all the rows whose contextName exactly matches the prefix are  
selected. If the value is set to prefixthen the all the rows where the starting octets of the con-  
textName exactly match the prefix are selected.  
194 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-13 View-based Access Control Model Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/  
snmpv3/access)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
rview <32 character view name>  
This is a 32 character long read view name that allows you read access to a particular MIB view. If  
the value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having this value then no access is granted.  
wview <32 character view name>  
This is a 32 character long write view name that allows you write access to the MIB view. If the  
value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having this value then no access is granted.  
nview <32 character view name>  
This is a 32 character long notify view name that allows you notify access to the MIB view.  
del  
Deletes the View-based Access Control entry.  
cur  
Displays the View-based Access Control configuration.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/group  
SNMPv3 Group Configuration  
[SNMPv3 vacmSecurityToGroup 1 Menu]  
model  
uname  
gname  
del  
- Set security model  
- Set USM user name  
- Set group gname  
- Delete vacmSecurityToGroup entry  
- Display current vacmSecurityToGroup configuration  
cur  
Table 6-14 SNMPv3 Group Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/group)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2  
uname <32 character name>  
Sets the user name as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm/nameon page 192.  
gname <32 character name>  
The name for the access group as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access/nameon  
page 194.  
del  
Deletes the vacmSecurityToGroupentry.  
cur  
Displays the current vacmSecurityToGroupconfiguration.  
196 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/comm  
SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration  
This command is used for configuring the community table entry. The configured entry is  
stored in the community table list in the SNMP engine. This table is used to configure commu-  
nity strings in the Local Configuration Datastore (LCD) of SNMP engine.  
[SNMPv3 snmpCommunityTable 1 Menu]  
index  
name  
uname  
tag  
- Set community index  
- Set community string  
- Set USM user name  
- Set community tag  
del  
cur  
- Delete communityTable entry  
- Display current communityTable configuration  
Table 6-15 SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/  
ssnmp/snmpv3/comm)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
index <32 character name>  
Allows you to configure the unique index value of a row in this table consisting of 32 characters  
maximum.  
name <32 character name>  
Defines the user name as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm/name on page 192.  
uname <32 character name>  
Defines a readable 32 character long string that represents the corresponding value of an SNMP  
community name in a security model.  
tag <list of tag string, max 255 characters>  
Allows you to configure a tag of up to 255 characters maximum. This tag specifies a set of trans-  
port endpoints to which a command responder application sends an SNMP trap.  
del  
Deletes the community table entry.  
cur  
Displays the community table configuration.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/taddr  
SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration  
This command is used to configure the target transport entry. The configured entry is stored in  
the target address table list in the SNMP engine. This table of transport addresses is used in the  
generation of SNMP messages.  
[SNMPv3 snmpTargetAddrTable 1 Menu]  
name  
addr  
port  
- Set target address name  
- Set target transport address IP  
- Set target transport address port  
taglist - Set tag list  
pname  
del  
- Set targetParams name  
- Delete targetAddrTable entry  
cur  
- Display current targetAddrTable configuration  
Table 6-16 Target Address Table Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/taddr)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
name <32 character name>  
Allows you to configure the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier, target address name associated  
with this entry.  
addr <transport address ip>  
Allows you to configure a transport address IP that can be used in the generation of SNMP traps.  
port <transport address port>  
Allows you to configure a transport address port that can be used in the generation of SNMP traps.  
taglist <list of tag string, max 255 characters>  
Allows you to configure a list of tags that are used to select target addresses for a particular opera-  
tion.  
pname <32 character name>  
Defines the name as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam/nameon page 199.  
del  
Deletes the Target Address Table entry.  
cur  
Displays the current Target Address Table configuration.  
198 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam  
SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration  
You can configure the target parameters entry and store it in the target parameters table in the  
SNMP engine. This table contains parameters that are used to generate a message. The param-  
eters include the message processing model (for example: SNMPv3, SNMPv2c, SNMPv1), the  
security model (for example: USM), the security name, and the security level (noAuthno-  
Priv,authNoPriv, or authPriv).  
[SNMPv3 snmpTargetParamsTable 1 Menu]  
name  
- Set target params name  
mpmodel - Set message processing model  
model  
uname  
level  
del  
- Set security model  
- Set USM user name  
- Set minimum level of security  
- Delete targetParamsTable entry  
- Display current targetParamsTable configuration  
cur  
Table 6-17 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/  
ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
name <32 character name>  
Allows you to configure the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier that is associated with this entry.  
mpmodel snmpv1|snmpv2c|snmpv3  
Allows you to configure the message processing model that is used to generate SNMP messages.  
model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2  
Allows you to select the security model to be used when generating the SNMP messages.  
uname <32 character name>  
Defines the name that identifies the user in the USM table (page 192) on whose behalf the SNMP  
messages are generated using this entry.  
level noAuthNoPriv|authNoPriv|authPriv  
Allows you to select the level of security to be used when generating the SNMP messages using  
this entry. The level noAuthNoPrivmeans that the SNMP message will be sent without authen-  
tication and without using a privacy protocol. The level authNoPrivmeans that the SNMP mes-  
sage will be sent with authentication but without using a privacy protocol. The authPrivmeans  
that the SNMP message will be sent both with authentication and using a privacy protocol.  
del  
Deletes the targetParamsTableentry.  
cur  
Displays the current targetParamsTableconfiguration.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/notify  
SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration  
SNMPv3 uses Notification Originator to send out traps. A notification typically monitors a system for  
particular events or conditions, and generates Notification-Class messages based on these events or con-  
ditions.  
[SNMPv3 snmpNotifyTable 1 Menu]  
name  
tag  
del  
cur  
- Set notify name  
- Set notify tag  
- Delete notifyTable entry  
- Display current notifyTable configuration  
Table 6-18 Notify Table Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/notify)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
name <32 character name>  
Defines a locally arbitrary but unique identifier associated with this SNMP notify entry.  
tag <list of tag string, max 255 characters>  
Allows you to configure a tag of 255 characters maximum that contains a tag value which is used  
to select entries in the Target Address Table. Any entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable, that  
matches the value of this tag, is selected.  
del  
Deletes the notify table entry.  
cur  
Displays the current notify table configuration.  
200 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
cfg/sys/access  
System Access Configuration  
[System Access Menu]  
mgmt  
user  
http  
https  
wport  
snmp  
- Management Network Definition Menu  
- User Access Control Menu (passwords)  
- Enable/disable HTTP (Web) access  
- HTTPS Web Access Menu  
- Set HTTP (Web) server port number  
- Set SNMP access control  
userbbi - Enable/disable user configuration from BBI  
tsbbi  
tnet  
- Enable/disable telnet/ssh configuration from BBI  
- Enable/disable Telnet access  
tnport - Set Telnet server port number  
tport  
cur  
- Set the TFTP port for the system  
- Display current system access configuration  
Table 6-19 System Access Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
mgmt  
Displays the Management Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 203.  
user  
Displays the User Access Control Menu. To view menu options, see page 204.  
http disable|enable  
Enables or disables HTTP (Web) access to the Browser-Based Interface. It is enabled by default.  
https  
Displays the HTTPS Menu. To view menu options, see page 207.  
wport<TCP port number (1-65535)>  
Sets the switch port used for serving switch Web content. The default is HTTP port 80. If Global  
Server Load Balancing is to be used, set this to a different port (such as 8080).  
snmp disable|read-only|read-write  
Disables or provides read-only/write-read SNMP access.  
userbbi enable|disable  
Enables or disables user configuration access through the Browser-Based Interface (BBI).  
tsbbi enable|disable  
Enables or disables Telnet/SSH configuration access through the Browser-Based Interface (BBI).  
You see this command only if you are connected to the switch through a serial connection.  
tnet enable|disable  
Enables or disables Telnet access. This command is enabled by default. You see this command  
only if you are connected to the switch through a serial connection.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-19 System Access Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
tnport <TCP port number>  
Sets an optional telnet server port number for cases where the server listens for telnet sessions on a  
non-standard port.  
tport <TFTP port number (1-65535)>  
Sets the TFTP port for the switch. The default is port 69.  
cur  
Displays the current system access parameters.  
202 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/sys/access/mgmt  
Management Networks Configuration  
[Management Networks Menu]  
add  
rem  
- Add mgmt network definition  
- Remove mgmt network definition  
cur  
clear  
- Display current mgmt network definitions  
- Clear current mgmt network definitions  
This menu is used to define IP address ranges which are allowed to access the switch for man-  
agement purposes.  
Table 6-20 Management Network Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/mgmt)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
add <mgmt network address> <mgmt network mask>  
Adds a defined network through which switch access is allowed through Telnet, SNMP, RIP, or the  
Alteon OS browser-based interface. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with a network  
mask address. Specify an IP address and mask address in dotted-decimal notation.  
Note: If you configure the management network without including the switch interfaces, it will  
cause the Firewall Load Balancing health checks to fail and will create a “Network Down” state on  
the network.  
rem <mgmt network address> <mgmt network mask>  
Removes a defined network, which consists of a management network address and a management  
network mask address.  
cur  
Displays the current configuration.  
clear  
Clears the current management network definitions.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/sys/access/user  
User Access Control Configuration  
[User Access Control Menu]  
uid  
- User ID Menu  
eject  
usrpw  
opw  
- Eject user  
- Set user password (user)  
- Set operator password (oper)  
- Set administrator password (admin)  
admpw  
strongpw - Strong password menu  
cur - Display current user status  
NOTE User passwords can be a maximum of 15 characters.  
Table 6-21 User Access Control Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
uid <User ID (1-10)>  
Displays the User ID Menu. To view menu options, see page 205.  
eject user|oper|admin|<user name>  
Ejects the specified user from the GbESM.  
usrpw  
Sets the user (user) password. The user has no direct responsibility for switch management. He or  
she can view switch status information and statistics, but cannot make any configuration changes.  
The user password can have a maximum of 15 characters.  
opw  
Sets the operator (oper)password. The operator manages all functions of the switch. He or she  
can view all switch information and statistics and can reset ports, except the management ports.  
The operator password can have a maximum of 15 characters.  
admpw  
Sets the administrator (admin) password. The super user administrator has complete access to all  
menus, information, and configuration commands on the GbE Switch Module, including the abil-  
ity to change both the user and administrator passwords.  
Access includes “oper” functions.  
strongpw  
Displays the Strong User Password Menu. To view menu options, see page 206.  
cur  
Displays the current user status.  
204 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/sys/access/user/uid <1-10>  
System User ID Configuration  
[User ID 1 Menu]  
cos  
name  
pswd  
ena  
dis  
del  
cur  
- Set class of service  
- Set user name  
- Set user password  
- Enable user ID  
- Disable user ID  
- Delete user ID  
- Display current user configuration  
Table 6-22 User ID Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user/uid)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
cos <user|oper|admin>  
Sets the Class-of-Service to define the user’s authority level. Alteon OS defines these levels as:  
User, Operator, and Administrator, with User being the most restricted level.  
name <1-8 characters>  
Defines the user name of maximum eight characters.  
pswd <1-15 characters>  
Sets the user password of up to 15 characters maximum.  
ena  
Enables the user ID.  
dis  
Disables the user ID.  
del  
Deletes the user ID.  
cur  
Displays the current user ID configuration.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/sys/access/user/strongpw  
Strong Password Configuration  
[Strong Pwd Menu]  
ena  
dis  
- Enable usage of strong passwords  
- Disable usage of strong passwords  
expiry - Set password validity  
warning - Set warning days before pswd expiry  
faillog - Set number of failed logins for security notification  
cur  
- Display current strong password configuration  
Table 6-23 Strong Password Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user/strongpw)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
ena  
Enables Strong Password requirement.  
dis  
Disables Strong Password requirement.  
expiry <1-365>  
Configures the number of days allowed before the password must be changed.  
warning <1-365>  
Configures the number of days before password expiration, that a warning is issued to users.  
faillog <1-255>  
Configures the number of failed login attempts allowed before a security notification is logged.  
cur  
Displays the current Strong Password configuration.  
206 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/sys/access/https  
HTTPS Access Configuration  
[https Menu]  
access - Enable/Disable HTTPS Web access  
port - HTTPS WebServer port number  
generate - Generate self-signed HTTPS server certificate  
certSave - save HTTPS certificate  
cur  
- Display current SSL Web Access configuration  
Table 6-24 HTTPS Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/https)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
access  
Enables or disables BBI access (Web access) using HTTPS.  
port <TCP port number>  
Defines the HTTPS Web server port number.  
generate  
Allows you to generate a certificate to connect to the SSL to be used during the key exchange. A  
default certificate is created when HTTPS is enabled for the first time. The user can create a new  
certificate defining the information that they want to be used in the various fields. For example:  
Country Name (2 letter code) [ ]: CA  
State or Province Name (full name) []: Ontario  
Locality Name (for example, city) []: Ottawa  
Organization Name (for example, company) []: Blade  
Organizational Unit Name (for example, section) []: Alteon  
Common Name (for example, user’s name) []: Mr Smith  
Email (for example, email address) []: [email protected]  
You will be asked to confirm if you want to generate the certificate. It will take approximately 30  
seconds to generate the certificate. Then the switch will restart SSL agent.  
certSave  
Allows the client, or the Web browser, to accept the certificate and save the certificate to Flash to  
be used when the switch is rebooted.  
cur  
Displays the current SSL Web Access configuration.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/port<port alias or number>  
Port Configuration  
[Port INT1 Menu]  
gig  
- Gig Phy Menu  
aclqos - Acl/Qos Configuration Menu  
8021ppri - Set default 802.1p priority  
pvid  
name  
- Set default port VLAN id  
- Set port name  
dscpmrk - Enable/disable DSCP remarking for port  
tag - Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port  
tagpvid - Enable/disable tagging on pvid  
fastfwd - Enable/disable Port Fast Forwarding mode  
ena  
dis  
cur  
- Enable port  
- Disable port  
- Display current port configuration  
Use the Port Configuration menu to configure settings for individual switch ports, except the  
management port (MGT). This command is enabled by default.  
Table 6-25 Port Configuration Menu (/cfg/port)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
gig  
If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet, this option displays the Gigabit Ethernet Physi-  
cal Link Menu. To view menu options, see page 210.  
aclqos  
Displays the ACL Quality of Service Menu. To view menu options, see page 211.  
8021ppri <0-7>  
Configures the port’s 802.1p priority level.  
pvid <VLAN number, 1-4095>  
Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged.  
The default number is 1 for non-management ports.  
name <64 character string>|none  
Sets a name for the port. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some infor-  
mation and statistics screens. The default is set to None.  
dscpmark  
Enables or disables DSCP re-marking on a port.  
tag disable|enable  
Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. It is disabled by default.  
208 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-25 Port Configuration Menu (/cfg/port)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
tagpvid disable|enable  
Disables or enables VLAN tag persistence. When disabled, the VLAN tag is removed from pack-  
ets whose VLAN tag matches the port PVID. The default value is disabledfor INT and EXT  
ports, and enabledfor MGT ports.  
fastfwd disable|enable  
Disables or enables Port Fast Forwarding, which permits a port that participates in Spanning  
Tree to bypass the Listening and Learning states and enter directly into the Forwarding state.  
While in the Forwarding state, the port listens to the BPDUs to learn if there is a loop and, if  
dictated by normal STG behavior (following priorities, etc.), the port transitions into the Blocking  
state. This feature permits the GbESM to interoperate well within Rapid Spanning Tree networks.  
ena  
Enables the port.  
dis  
Disables the port. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes, refer  
to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 211.)  
cur  
Displays current port parameters.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/port<port alias or number> gig  
Port Link Configuration  
[Gigabit Link Menu]  
speed - Set link speed  
mode  
fctl  
auto  
cur  
- Set full or half duplex mode  
- Set flow control  
- Set auto negotiation  
- Display current gig link configuration  
Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link.  
Link menu options are described in Table 6-26 and appear on the gigport configuration menu  
for the GbE Switch Module. Use this menu to set port parameters such as speed, flow control,  
and negotiation mode for the port link.  
Table 6-26 Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port/gig)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
speed 10|100|1000|any  
Sets the link speed. Some options are not valid on all ports. The choices include:  
10 Mbps  
100 Mbps  
1000 Mbps  
“Auto,” for auto negotiation  
mode full|half|any  
Sets the operating mode. The choices include:  
“Any,” for auto negotiation (default)  
Full-duplex  
Half-duplex  
fctl rx|tx|both|none  
Sets the flow control. The choices include:  
Receive flow control  
Transmit flow control  
Both receive and transmit flow control (default)  
No flow control  
auto on|off  
Enables or disables auto negotiation for the port.  
cur  
Displays current port parameters.  
210 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Temporarily Disabling a Port  
To temporarily disable a port without changing its stored configuration attributes, enter the fol-  
lowing command at any prompt:  
Main# /oper/port <port alias or number>/dis  
Because this configuration sets a temporary state for the port, you do not need to use applyor  
save. The port state will revert to its original configuration when the GbE Switch Module is  
reset. See the “Operations Menu” on page 324 for other operations-level commands.  
/cfg/port<port alias or number> aclqos  
Port ACL Configuration  
[Port INT2 ACL Menu]  
meter  
- ACL Metering Configuration Menu  
re-mark - ACL Re-mark Configuration Menu  
add  
rem  
cur  
- Add ACL, ACL block or ACL group to this port  
- Remove ACL, ACL block or ACL group from this port  
- Display current ACLs for this port  
Table 6-27 Port ACL Menu Options (/cfg/port/aclqos)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
meter <meter number, 1-127>  
Displays the Metering Menu. To view menu options, see page 212.  
re-mark <re-mark number, 1-127>  
Displays the Re-Mark Menu. To view menu options, see page 213.  
add acl|blk|grp <1-4096>  
Adds the specified ACL, ACL Block, or ACL Group to the port. You can add multiple ACL  
Groups to a port, but the total number of precedence levels allowed is eight.  
rem acl|blk|grp <1-4096>  
Removes the specified ACL, ACL Block, or ACL Group from the port.  
cur  
Displays current ACL QoS parameters.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/port<port alias or number> aclqos/meter <meter  
number>  
ACL Port Metering Menu  
[Metering Menu]  
cir  
- Set committed rate in KiloBits/s  
mbsize - Set maximum burst size in KiloBits  
enable - Enable/disable port metering  
dpass  
- Set to Drop or Pass out of profile traffic  
assign - Assign meter to ACL, ACL block or ACL group  
unassign - Unassign meter from ACL, ACL block or ACL group  
reset  
cur  
- Reset meter parameters  
- Display current settings  
This menu defines the Access Control profile for the selected ACL group on the port.  
Table 6-28 ACL Metering Menu Options (/cfg/port/aclqos/meter)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
cir <64-1000000>  
Configures the committed rate, in Kilobits per second. The committed rate must be a multiple  
of 64.  
mbsize <32-4096>  
Configures the maximum burst size, in Kilobits. Enter one of the following values for  
mbsize: 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096  
enable e|d  
Enables or disables ACL Metering on the port.  
dpass drop|pass  
Configures the ACL Meter to either drop or pass out-of-profile traffic.  
assign acl|blk|grp <1-4096>  
Adds an ACL, ACL Block, or ACL Group to the ACL Meter on this port.  
unassign acl|blk|grp <1-4096>  
Removes an ACL, ACL Block, or ACL Group from the ACL Meter on this port.  
reset  
Reset ACL Metering parameters to their default values.  
cur  
Displays current ACL Metering parameters.  
212 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/port<port alias or number> aclqos/  
re-mark <re-mark number>  
Re-Mark Menu  
[Re-mark Menu]  
inprof - In Profile Menu  
outprof - Out Profile Menu  
assign - Assign re-mark action to ACL item  
unassign - Unassign re-mark action from ACL item  
reset  
cur  
- Reset re-mark settings  
- Display current settings  
You can choose to re-mark IP header data for the selected ACL Group on the port. You can  
configure different re-mark values, based on whether packets fall within the ACL Metering  
profile, or out of the ACL Metering profile.  
Table 6-29 ACL Re-Mark Options (/cfg/port/aclqos/re-mark)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
inprof  
Displays the Re-Mark In-Profile Menu. To view menu options, see page 214.  
outprof  
Displays the Re-Mark Out-of-Profile Menu. To view menu options, see page 215.  
assign acl|blk|grp <1-4096>  
Assign an ACL, ACL Block, or ACL Group for DSCP remarking on this port.  
unassign acl|blk|grp <1-4096>  
Remove an ACL, ACL Block, or ACL Group from DSCP remarking on this port.  
reset  
Reset ACL Re-Mark parameters to their default values.  
cur  
Displays current Re-Mark parameters.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/port<port alias or number> aclqos/  
re-mark <ACL group number>/inprof  
Re-Marking In-Profile Menu  
[Re-marking - In Profile Menu]  
up1p  
- Set Update User Priority Menu  
updscp - Set the update DSCP  
reset  
cur  
- Reset update DSCP settings  
- Display current settings  
Table 6-30 ACL Re-Mark In-Profile Options (/cfg/port/aclqos/re-mark/inprof)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
up1p  
Displays the Re-Mark In-Profile Update User Priority Menu. To view menu options, see page 216.  
updscp <0-63>  
Sets the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) of In-Profile packets to the selected value.  
reset  
Resets the update DSCP parameters to their default values.  
cur  
Displays current Re-Mark In-Profile parameters.  
214 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/port<port alias or number> aclqos/  
re-mark/inprof <ACL group number>/up1p  
Update User Priority Menu  
[Update User Priority Menu]  
value  
utosp  
reset  
cur  
- Set the update user priority  
- Enable/Disable use of TOS precedence  
- Reset in profile up1p settings  
- Display current settings  
Table 6-31 ACL Re-mark User Priority Options (/cfg/port/aclqos/re-mark/inprof/  
up1p)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
value <0-7>  
Defines 802.1p value. The value is the priority bits information in the packet structure.  
utosp enable|disable  
Enable or disable mapping of TOS (Type of Service) priority to 802.1p priority for In-Profile  
packets. When enabled, the TOS value is used to set the 802.1p value.  
reset  
Resets UP1P settings to their default values.  
cur  
Displays current Re-Mark In-Profile User Priority parameters.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/port<port alias or number> aclqos/  
re-mark <ACL group number>/outprof  
Re-Marking Out-of-Profile Menu  
[Re-marking - Out Of Profile Menu]  
updscp - Set the update DSCP  
reset  
cur  
- reset update DSCP setting  
- Display current settings  
Table 6-32 ACL Re-mark Out-of-Profile Options (/cfg/port/aclqos/re-mark/  
outprof)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
updscp <0-63>  
Sets the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) of Out-of-Profile packets to the selected value. The switch  
sets the DSCP value on Out-of-Profile packets.  
reset  
Resets the update DSCP parameters for Out-of-Profile packets to their default values.  
cur  
Displays current Re-Mark Out-of-Profile parameters.  
216 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l2  
Layer 2 Configuration  
[Layer 2 Menu]  
8021x  
mrst  
- 802.1x Menu  
- Multiple Spanning Tree/Rapid Spanning Tree Menu  
- Spanning Tree Menu  
stg  
fdb  
- FDB  
trunk  
thash  
lacp  
- Trunk Group Menu  
- IP Trunk Hash Menu  
- Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu  
failovr - Failover Menu  
vlan  
- VLAN Menu  
upfast - Enable/disable Uplink Fast  
update - UplinkFast station update rate  
bpdugrd - Enable/disable BPDU Guard  
macnotif - Enable/disable MAC address notification  
cur  
- Display current layer 2 parameters  
Table 6-33 Layer 2 Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
8021x  
Displays the 802.1x Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 219.  
mrst  
Displays the Rapid Spanning Tree/Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Configuration Menu. To view  
menu options, see page 225.  
stg <group number [1-128]>  
Displays the Spanning Tree Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 231.  
fdb  
Displays the Forwarding Database (FDB) Menu. To view menu options, see page 237.  
trunk <trunk group number (1-13)>  
Displays the Trunk Group Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 239.  
thash  
Displays the IP Trunk Hash Menu. To view menu options, see page 240.  
lacp  
Displays the Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu. To view menu options, see page 242.  
failovr  
Displays the Failover Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 244.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-33 Layer 2 Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
vlan <VLAN number (1-4095)>  
Displays the VLAN Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 247.  
upfast enable|disable  
Enables or disables Fast Uplink Convergence, which provides rapid Spanning Tree convergence to  
an upstream switch during failover.  
Note: When enabled, this feature increases bridge priorities to 65500 for all STGs and  
path cost by 3000 for all external STP ports.  
update <10-200>  
Configures the station update rate. The default value is 40.  
bpdugrd enable|disable  
Enables or disables BPDU guard, to avoid spanning-tree loops on ports with Port Fast Forwarding  
enabled (/cfg/port x/fastfwd ena).  
macnotif enable|disable  
Enables or disables MAC Address Notification. With MAC Address Notification enabled, the  
switch generates a syslog message when a MAC address is added or removed from the MAC  
address table.  
cur  
Displays current Layer 2 parameters.  
218 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l2/8021x  
802.1x Configuration  
[802.1x Configuration Menu]  
global - Global 802.1x configuration menu  
port  
ena  
dis  
cur  
- Port 802.1x configuration menu  
- Enable 802.1x access control  
- Disable 802.1x access control  
- Show 802.1x configuration  
This feature allows you to configure the GbESM as an IEEE 802.1x Authenticator, to provide  
port-based network access control.  
Table 6-34 802.1x Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2/8021x)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
global  
Displays the global 802.1x Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 220.  
port <port alias or number>  
Displays the 802.1x Port Menu. To view menu options, see page 223.  
ena  
Globally enables 802.1x.  
dis  
Globally disables 802.1x.  
cur  
Displays current 802.1x parameters.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l2/8021x/global  
802.1x Global Configuration  
[802.1x Global Configuration Menu]  
gvlan  
mode  
- 802.1x Guest VLAN configuration menu  
- Set access control mode  
qtperiod - Set EAP-Request/Identity quiet time interval  
txperiod - Set EAP-Request/Identity retransmission timeout  
suptmout - Set EAP-Request retransmission timeout  
svrtmout - Set server authentication request timeout  
maxreq - Set max number of EAP-Request retransmissions  
raperiod - Set reauthentication time interval  
reauth - Set reauthentication status to on or off  
default - Restore default 802.1x configuration  
cur  
- Display current 802.1x configuration  
The global 802.1x menu allows you to configure parameters that affect all ports in the GbESM.  
Table 6-35 802.1x Global Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/8021x/global)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
gvlan  
Displays the 802.1x Guest VLAN Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 222.  
mode force-unauth|auto|force-auth  
Sets the type of access control for all ports:  
force-unauth- the port is unauthorized unconditionally.  
auto- the port is unauthorized until it is successfully authorized by the RADIUS server.  
force-auth- the port is authorized unconditionally, allowing all traffic.  
The default value is force-auth.  
qtperiod <0-65535>  
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits before transmitting an EAP-Request/ Identity  
frame to the supplicant (client) after an authentication failure in the previous round of authentica-  
tion. The default value is 60 seconds.  
txperiod <1-65535>  
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for an EAP-Response/Identity frame from the  
supplicant (client) before retransmitting an EAP-Request/Identity frame. The default value is 30  
seconds.  
suptmout <1-65535>  
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for an EAP-Response packet from the supplicant  
(client) before retransmitting the EAP-Request packet to the authentication server. The default  
value is 30 seconds.  
220 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-35 802.1x Global Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/8021x/global)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
svrtmout <1-65535>  
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for a response from the RADIUS server before  
declaring an authentication timeout. The default value is 30 seconds.  
The time interval between transmissions of the RADIUS Access-Request packet containing  
the supplicant’s (client’s) EAP-Response packet is determined by the current setting of  
/cfg/sys/radius/timeout(default is 3 seconds).  
maxreq <1-10>  
Sets the maximum number of times the authenticator retransmits an EAP-Request packet to the  
supplicant (client). The default value is 2.  
raperiod <1-604800>  
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits before re-authenticating a supplicant (client)  
when periodic re-authentication is enabled. The default value is 3600 seconds.  
reauth on|off  
Sets the re-authentication status to onor off. The default value is off.  
default  
Resets the global 802.1x parameters to their default values.  
cur  
Displays current global 802.1x parameters.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l2/8021x/global/gvlan  
802.1x Guest VLAN Configuration  
[802.1x Guest VLAN Configuration Menu]  
vlan  
ena  
dis  
cur  
- Set 8021.x Guest VLAN number  
- Enable 8021.xGuest VLAN  
- Disable 8021.x Guest VLAN  
- Display current Guest VLAN configuration  
The 802.1x Guest VLAN menu allows you to configure a Guest VLAN for unauthenticated  
ports. The Guest VLAN provides limited access to switch functions.  
Table 6-36 802.1x Guest VLAN Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2/8021x/global/gvlan)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
vlan <1-4094>  
Configures the Guest VLAN number.  
ena  
Enables the 802.1x Guest VLAN.  
dis  
Disables the 802.1x Guest VLAN.  
cur  
Displays current 802.1x Guest VLAN parameters.  
222 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l2/8021x/port <alias or number>  
802.1x Port Configuration  
[802.1x Port Configuration Menu]  
mode  
- Set access control mode  
qtperiod - Set EAP-Request/Identity quiet time interval  
txperiod - Set EAP-Request/Identity retransmission timeout  
suptmout - Set EAP-Request retransmission timeout  
svrtmout - Set server authentication request timeout  
maxreq - Set max number of EAP-Request retransmissions  
raperiod - Set reauthentication time interval  
reauth - Set reauthentication status to on or off  
default - Restore default 802.1x configuration  
global - Apply current global 802.1x configuration to this port  
cur  
- Display current 802.1x configuration  
The 802.1x port menu allows you to configure parameters that affect the selected port in the  
GbESM. These settings override the global 802.1x parameters.  
Table 6-37 802.1x Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/8021x/port)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
mode force-unauth|auto|force-auth  
Sets the type of access control for the port:  
force-unauth- the port is unauthorized unconditionally.  
auto- the port is unauthorized until it is successfully authorized by the RADIUS server.  
force-auth- the port is authorized unconditionally, allowing all traffic.  
The default value is force-auth.  
qtperiod <0-65535>  
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits before transmitting an EAP-Request/ Identity  
frame to the supplicant (client) after an authentication failure in the previous round of authentica-  
tion. The default value is 60 seconds.  
txperiod <1-65535>  
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for an EAP-Response/Identity frame from the  
supplicant (client) before retransmitting an EAP-Request/Identity frame. The default value is 30  
seconds.  
suptmout <1-65535>  
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for an EAP-Response packet from the supplicant  
(client) before retransmitting the EAP-Request packet to the authentication server. The default  
value is 30 seconds.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-37 802.1x Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/8021x/port)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
svrtmout <1-65535>  
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for a response from the RADIUS server before  
declaring an authentication timeout. The default value is 30 seconds.  
The time interval between transmissions of the RADIUS Access-Request packet containing  
the supplicant’s (client’s) EAP-Response packet is determined by the current setting of  
/cfg/sys/radius/timeout(default is 3 seconds).  
maxreq <1-10>  
Sets the maximum number of times the authenticator retransmits an EAP-Request packet to the  
supplicant (client). The default value is 2.  
raperiod <1-604800>  
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits before re-authenticating a supplicant (client)  
when periodic re-authentication is enabled. The default value is 3600 seconds.  
reauth on|off  
Sets the re-authentication status to onor off. The default value is off.  
default  
Resets the 802.1x port parameters to their default values.  
global  
Applies current global 802.1x configuration parameters to the port.  
cur  
Displays current 802.1x port parameters.  
224 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l2/mrst  
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol/  
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Configuration  
[Multiple Spanning Tree Menu]  
cist  
name  
rev  
- Common and Internal Spanning Tree menu  
- Set MST region name  
- Set revision level of this MST region  
maxhop - Set Maximum Hop Count for MST (4 - 60)  
mode  
on  
off  
cur  
- Spanning Tree Mode  
- Globally turn Multiple Spanning Tree (MSTP/RSTP) ON  
- Globally turn Multiple Spanning Tree (MSTP/RSTP) OFF  
- Display current MST parameters  
Alteon OS supports the IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) and IEEE 802.1s  
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP). MSTP allows you to map many VLANs to a small  
number of spanning tree groups, each with its own topology.  
Up to 32 Spanning Tree Groups can be configured in mstpmode. MRST is turned off by  
default.  
NOTE When Multiple Spanning Tree is turned on, VLAN 4095 is moved from Spanning Tree  
Group 128 to the Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST). When Multiple Spanning Tree is  
turned off, VLAN 4095 is moved back to Spanning Tree Group 128.  
Table 6-38 MSTP/RSTP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/mrst)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
cist  
Displays the Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) Menu. To view menu options, see page 227.  
name <1-32 characters>  
Configures a name for the MSTP region. All devices within a MSTP region must have the same  
region name.  
rev <1-65535>  
Configures a version number for the MSTP region. The version is used as a numerical identifier  
for the region. All devices within a MSTP region must have the same version number.  
maxhop <4-60>  
Configures the maximum number of bridge hops a packet may to traverse before it is dropped. The  
range is from 4 to 60 hops. The default is 20.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-38 MSTP/RSTP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/mrst)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
mode rstp|mstp  
Selects either Rapid Spanning Tree mode (rstp) or Multiple Spanning Tree mode (mstp). The  
default mode is RSTP.  
on  
Globally turns RSTP/MSTP ON.  
Note: When RSTP is turned on, the configuration parameters for STG 1 apply to RSTP.  
off  
Globally turns RSTP/MSTP OFF.  
cur  
Displays the current RSTP/MSTP configuration.  
226 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l2/mrst/cist  
Common Internal Spanning Tree Configuration  
[Common Internal Spanning Tree Menu]  
port  
add  
- CIST Port parameter menu  
- Add VLAN(s) to CIST  
default - Default Common Internal Spanning Tree and Member parameters  
cur - Display current CIST parameters  
Table 6-39 describes the commands used to configure Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST)  
parameters. The CIST provides compatibility with different MSTP regions and with devices  
running different Spanning Tree instances. It is equivalent to Spanning Tree Group 0.  
Table 6-39 CIST Menu Options (/cfg/l2/mrst/cist)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
brg  
Displays the CIST Bridge Menu. To view menu options, see page 228.  
port <port alias or number>  
Displays the CIST Port Menu. To view menu options, see page 229.  
add <VLAN numbers>  
Adds selected VLANs to the CIST.  
default  
Resets all CIST parameters to their default values.  
cur  
Displays the current CIST configuration.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l2/mrst/cist/brg  
CIST Bridge Configuration  
[CIST Bridge Menu]  
prior - Set CIST bridge Priority (0-65535)  
mxage - Set CIST bridge Max Age (6-40 secs)  
fwd  
cur  
- Set CIST bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs)  
- Display current CIST bridge parameters  
CIST bridge parameters are used only when the switch is in MSTP or RSTP mode. CIST  
parameters do not affect operation of STP/PVST+.  
Table 6-40 CIST Bridge Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/mrst/cist/brg)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
prior <0-65535>  
Configures the CIST bridge priority. The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the  
network is the MSTP root bridge. To make this switch the root bridge, configure the bridge priority  
lower than all other switches and bridges on your network. The lower the value, the higher the  
bridge priority. The range is 0 to 65535, and the default is 32768.  
mxage <6-40 seconds>  
Configures the CIST bridge maximum age. The maximum age parameter specifies the maximum  
time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfig-  
ures the MSTP network. The range is 6 to 40 seconds, and the default is 20 seconds.  
fwd <4-30 seconds>  
Configures the CIST bridge forward delay parameter. The forward delay parameter specifies the  
amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from the listening state to the learn-  
ing state and from the learning state to the forwarding state. The range is 4 to 30 seconds, and the  
default is 15 seconds.  
cur  
Displays the current CIST bridge configuration.  
228 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l2/mrst/cist/port <port alias or number>  
CIST Port Configuration  
[CIST Port 1 Menu]  
prior - Set port Priority (0-240)  
cost  
- Set port Path Cost (1-200000000, 0 for auto)  
hello - Set CIST port Hello Time (1-10 secs)  
link  
edge  
on  
- Set MSTP link type (auto, p2p, or shared; default: auto)  
- Enable/disable edge port  
- Turn port's Spanning Tree ON  
off  
cur  
- Turn port's Spanning Tree OFF  
- Display current port Spanning Tree parameters  
CIST port parameters are used to modify MRST operation on an individual port basis. CIST  
parameters do not affect operation of STP/PVST+. For each port, RSTP/MSTP is turned on by  
default.  
Table 6-41 CIST Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/mrst/cist/port)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
prior <0-240>  
Configures the CIST port priority. The port priority helps determine which bridge port becomes the  
designated port. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single seg-  
ment, the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment.  
The range is 0 to 240, in steps of 16 (0, 16, 32...), and the default is 128.  
cost <0-200000000>  
Configures the CIST port path cost. The port path cost is used to help determine the designated  
port for a segment. Generally speaking, the faster the port, the lower the path cost.  
The default is 2000 for 10 Gigabit ports, 20000 for Gigabit ports.  
hello <1-10 seconds>  
Configures the CIST port Hello time.The Hello time specifies how often the root bridge transmits  
a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the  
root bridge Hello value. The range is 1 to 10 seconds, and the default is 2 seconds.  
link <auto, p2p, or shared; default: auto>  
Defines the type of link connected to the port, as follows:  
auto: Configures the port to detect the link type, and automatically match its settings.  
p2p: Configures the port for Point-To-Point protocol.  
shared: Configures the port to connect to a shared medium (usually a hub).  
The default link type is auto.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-41 CIST Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/mrst/cist/port)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
edge disable|enable  
Enables or disables this port as an edge port. An edge port is not connected to a bridge, and can  
begin forwarding traffic as soon as the link is up. Configure server ports as edge ports (enabled).  
This command is disabled by default.  
on  
Enables MRST on the port.  
off  
Disables MRST on the port.  
cur  
Displays the current CIST port configuration.  
230 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l2/stg <STP group number>  
Spanning Tree Configuration  
[Spanning Tree Group 1 Menu]  
brg  
port  
add  
- Bridge parameter menu  
- Port parameter menu  
- Add VLAN(s) to Spanning Tree Group  
remove - Remove VLAN(s) from Spanning Tree Group  
clear - Remove all VLANs from Spanning Tree Group  
on  
off  
- Globally turn Spanning Tree ON  
- Globally turn Spanning Tree OFF  
default - Default Spanning Tree and Member parameters  
cur - Display current bridge parameters  
Alteon OS supports the IEEE 802.1d Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). STP is used to prevent  
loops in the network topology. Up to 128 Spanning Tree Groups can be configured on the  
switch (STG 128 is reserved for management).  
NOTE When VRRP is used for active/active redundancy, STG must be enabled.  
Table 6-42 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2/stg)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
brg  
Displays the Bridge Spanning Tree Menu. To view menu options, see page 233.  
port <port alias or number>  
Displays the Spanning Tree Port Menu. To view menu options, see page 235.  
add <VLAN number (1-4094)>  
Associates a VLAN with a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as a parameter.  
remove <VLAN number (1-4094)>  
Breaks the association between a VLAN and a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as  
a parameter.  
clear  
Removes all VLANs from a spanning tree.  
on  
Globally enables Spanning Tree Protocol. STG is turned on by default.  
off  
Globally disables Spanning Tree Protocol.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-42 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2/stg)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
default  
Restores a spanning tree instance to its default configuration.  
cur  
Displays current Spanning Tree Protocol parameters.  
232 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l2/stg <STP group number>/brg  
Spanning Tree Bridge Configuration  
[Bridge Spanning Tree Menu]  
prior - Set bridge Priority [0-65535]  
hello - Set bridge Hello Time [1-10 secs]  
mxage - Set bridge Max Age (6-40 secs)  
fwd  
aging - Set bridge Aging Time (1-65535 secs, 0 to disable)  
cur - Display current bridge parameters  
- Set bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs)  
Spanning Tree bridge parameters affect the global STG operation of the switch. STG bridge  
parameters include:  
Bridge priority  
Bridge hello time  
Bridge maximum age  
Forwarding delay  
Bridge aging time  
Table 6-43 Spanning Tree Bridge Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stg/brg)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
prior <new bridge priority (0-65535)>  
Configures the bridge priority. The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network  
is the STG root bridge. To make this switch the root bridge, configure the bridge priority lower  
than all other switches and bridges on your network. The lower the value, the higher the bridge pri-  
ority. The range is 0 to 65535, and the default is 32768.  
RSTP/MSTP: The range is 0 to 61440, in steps of 4096 (0, 4096, 8192...), and the default  
is 32768.  
hello <new bridge hello time (1-10 secs)>  
Configures the bridge hello time.The hello time specifies how often the root bridge transmits a  
configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root  
bridge hello value. The range is 1 to 10 seconds, and the default is 2 seconds.  
This command does not apply to MSTP (see CIST on page 227).  
mxage <new bridge max age (6-40 secs)>  
Configures the bridge maximum age. The maximum age parameter specifies the maximum time  
the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it re configures  
the STG network. The range is 6 to 40 seconds, and the default is 20 seconds.  
This command does not apply to MSTP (see CIST on page 227).  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-43 Spanning Tree Bridge Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stg/brg)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
fwd <new bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs)>  
Configures the bridge forward delay parameter. The forward delay parameter specifies the amount  
of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from the listening state to the learning state  
and from the learning state to the forwarding state. The range is 4 to 30 seconds, and the default is  
15 seconds.  
This command does not apply to MSTP (see CIST on page 227).  
aging <new bridge Aging Time (1-65535 secs, 0 to disable)>  
Configures the forwarding database aging time. The aging time specifies the amount of time the  
bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the for-  
warding database. The range is 1 to 65535 seconds, and the default is 300 seconds. To disable  
aging, set this parameter to 0.  
cur  
Displays the current bridge STG parameters.  
When configuring STG bridge parameters, the following formulas must be used:  
2*(fwd-1) > mxage  
2*(hello+1) < mxage  
234 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l2/stg <STP Group number>/port<port alias or  
number>  
Spanning Tree Port Configuration  
[Spanning Tree Port EXT1 Menu]  
prior  
cost  
- Set port Priority (0-255)  
- Set port Path Cost (1-65535 (802.1d) /  
1-200000000 (MSTP/RSTP) /0 for auto)  
- Set port link type (auto, p2p, or shared; default: auto)  
- Enable/disable edge port  
link  
edge  
on  
- Turn port's Spanning Tree ON  
off  
cur  
- Turn port's Spanning Tree OFF  
- Display current port Spanning Tree parameters  
By default for STP/PVST+, Spanning Tree is turned Off for internal ports and management  
ports, and turned On for external ports. By default for RSTP/MSTP, Spanning Tree is turned  
Off for internal ports and management ports, and turned On for external ports, with internal  
ports configured as Edge ports. STG port parameters include:  
Port priority  
Port path cost  
The portoption of STG is turned on by default.  
Table 6-44 Spanning Tree Port Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stg/port)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
prior <new port Priority (0-255)>  
Configures the port priority. The port priority helps determine which bridge port becomes the des-  
ignated port. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment,  
the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. The default  
value is 128.  
RSTP/MSTP: The range is 0 to 240, in steps of 16 (0, 16, 32...) and the default is 128.  
cost <new port Path Cost (1-65535, 0 for default)>  
Configures the port path cost. The port path cost is used to help determine the designated port for a  
segment. Generally speaking, the faster the port, the lower the path cost. The default is 19 for  
100Mbps ports, 4 for 1Gb ports. A value of 0 (zero) indicates that the default cost will be com-  
puted for an auto negotiated link speed.  
link <auto, p2p, or shared; default: auto>  
Defines the type of link connected to the port, as follows:  
auto: Configures the port to detect the link type, and automatically match its settings.  
p2p: Configures the port for Point-To-Point protocol.  
shared: Configures the port to connect to a shared medium (usually a hub).  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-44 Spanning Tree Port Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stg/port)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
edge disable|enable  
Enables or disables this port as an edge port. An edge port is not connected to a bridge, and can  
begin forwarding traffic as soon as the link is up. Configure server ports as edge ports (enabled).  
on  
Enables STG on the port.  
off  
Disables STG on the port.  
cur  
Displays the current STG port parameters.  
236 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l2/fdb  
Forwarding Database Configuration  
[FDB Menu]  
static - Static FDB Menu  
learn  
flood  
cur  
- Enable/disable FDB Learning for all ports  
- Enable/disable Flooding of Unknown Destination MACs  
- Display current FDB configuration  
Use the following commands to configure the Forwarding Database (FDB) for the GbESM.  
Table 6-45 FDB Menu Options (/cfg/l2/fdb)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
static  
Displays the static FDB menu. To view menu options, see page 238.  
learn disable|enable  
Enables or disables FDB learning. The default value is enabled.  
flood disable|enable  
Enables or disables flooding of packets with unknown MAC addresses to all ports.  
The default value is enabled.  
Note: If you disable FDB flooding, you must also disable FDB learning.  
cur  
Display current FDB configuration.  
NOTE If you disable FDB learning and FDB flooding, manually add static MAC address  
entries for the management module, blade servers, and other connected devices. The static  
entries ensure that the GbESM retains connectivity to those devices. Use the following  
command to add static MAC address entries:  
/cfg/l2/fdb/static/add  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l2/fdb/static  
Static FDB Configuration  
[Static FDB Menu]  
add  
- Add a permanent FDB entry  
del  
- Delete a static FDB entry  
clear  
cur  
- Clear static FDB entries  
- Display current static FDB configuration  
Use the following commands to configure static entries in the FDB.  
Table 6-46 Static FDB Menu Options (/cfg/l2/fdb/static)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
add <MAC address> <VLAN number> <port number>  
Adds a permanent FDB entry.  
del <MAC address> <VLAN number>  
Deletes a permanent FDB entry.  
clear <MAC address>|all {mac|vlan|port}  
Clears static FDB entries.  
cur  
Display current static FDB configuration.  
238 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l2/trunk <trunk group number>  
Trunk Configuration  
[Trunk group 1 Menu]  
add  
rem  
ena  
dis  
del  
cur  
- Add port to trunk group  
- Remove port from trunk group  
- Enable trunk group  
- Disable trunk group  
- Delete trunk group  
- Display current Trunk Group configuration  
Trunk groups can provide super-bandwidth connections between GbE Switch Modules or other  
trunk capable devices. A trunk is a group of ports that act together, combining their bandwidth  
to create a single, larger port. Up to 13 trunk groups can be configured on the GbE Switch Mod-  
ule, with the following restrictions:  
Any physical switch port can belong to no more than one trunk group.  
Up to six ports/trunks can belong to the same trunk group.  
Configure all ports in a trunk group with the same link configuration (speed, duplex, flow  
control).  
Trunking from non-Alteon devices must comply with Cisco® EtherChannel® technology.  
By default, each trunk group is empty and disabled.  
Table 6-47 Trunk Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/trunk)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
add <port alias or number>  
Adds a physical port to the current trunk group.  
rem <port alias or number>  
Removes a physical port from the current trunk group.  
ena  
Enables the current trunk group.  
dis  
Disables the current trunk group.  
del  
Removes the current trunk group configuration.  
cur  
Displays current trunk group parameters.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l2/thash  
IP Trunk Hash Configuration  
[IP Trunk Hash Menu]  
set  
cur  
- IP Trunk Hash Settings Menu  
- Display current IP trunk hash configuration  
Use the following commands to configure IP trunk hash settings for the GbESM.  
Table 6-48 IP Trunk Hash Menu Options (/cfg/l2/thash)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
set  
Displays the Trunk Hash Settings menu. To view menu options, see page 240.  
cur  
Display current trunk hash configuration.  
/cfg/l2/thash/set  
IP Trunk Hash  
[set IP Trunk Hash Settings Menu]  
smac  
dmac  
sip  
- Enable/disable smac hash  
- Enable/disable dmac hash  
- Enable/disable sip hash  
dip  
- Enable/disable dip hash  
cur  
- Display current trunk hash setting  
Trunk hash parameters are set globally for the GbE Switch Module. You can enable one or two  
parameters, to configure any of the following valid combinations:  
SMAC (source MAC only)  
DMAC (destination MAC only)  
SIP (source IP only)  
DIP (destination IP only)  
SIP + DIP (source IP and destination IP)  
SMAC + DMAC (source MAC and destination MAC)  
240 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Use the following commands to configure IP trunk hash parameters for the GbESM.  
Table 6-49 IP Trunk Hash Menu Options (/cfg/l2/thash/set)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
smac enable|disable  
Enable or disable trunk hashing on the source MAC.  
dmac enable|disable  
Enable or disable trunk hashing on the destination MAC.  
sip enable|disable  
Enable or disable trunk hashing on the source IP.  
dip enable|disable  
Enable or disable trunk hashing on the destination IP.  
cur  
Display current layer 2 trunk hash setting.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l2/lacp  
LACP Configuration  
[LACP Menu]  
sysprio - Set LACP system priority  
timeout - Set LACP system timeout scale for timing out partner  
info  
port  
cur  
- LACP port Menu  
- Display current LACP configuration  
Use the following commands to configure Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) for the  
GbESM.  
Table 6-50 LACP Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lacp)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
sysprio <1-65535>  
Defines the priority value (1 through 65535) for the GbESM. Lower numbers provide higher prior-  
ity. The default value is 32768.  
timeout short|long  
Defines the timeout period before invalidating LACP data from a remote partner. Choose short  
(3 seconds) or long(90 seconds). The default value is long.  
Note: It is recommended that you use a timeout value of long, to reduce LACPDU processing. If  
your GbESM’s CPU utilization rate remains at 100% for periods of 90 seconds or more, consider  
using static trunks instead of LACP.  
port <port alias or number>  
Displays the LACP Port menu. To view menu options, see page 243.  
cur  
Display current LACP configuration.  
242 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l2/lacp/port <port alias or number>  
LACP Port Configuration  
[LACP Port EXT1 Menu]  
mode  
prio  
- Set LACP mode  
- Set LACP port priority  
adminkey - Set LACP port admin key  
cur  
- Display current LACP port configuration  
Use the following commands to configure Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) for the  
selected port.  
Table 6-51 LACP Port Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lacp/port)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
mode off|active|passive  
Set the LACP mode for this port, as follows:  
off  
Turn LACP off for this port. You can use this port to manually configure a static trunk. The  
default value is off.  
active  
Turn LACP on and set this port to active. Active ports initiate LACPDUs.  
passive  
Turn LACP on and set this port to passive. Passive ports do not initiate LACPDUs, but respond  
to LACPDUs from active ports.  
prio <1-65535>  
Sets the priority value for the selected port. Lower numbers provide higher priority. Default is  
32768.  
adminkey <1-65535>  
Set the admin key for this port. Only ports with the same admin key and oper key (operational state  
generated internally) can form a LACP trunk group.  
cur  
Displays the current LACP configuration for this port.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l2/failovr  
Layer 2 Failover Configuration  
[Failover Menu]  
trigger - Trigger Menu  
vlan  
on  
- Globally turn VLAN Monitor ON/OFF  
- Globally turn Failover ON  
off  
cur  
- Globally turn Failover OFF  
- Display current Failover configuration  
Use this menu to configure Layer 2 Failover. For more information about Layer 2 Failover, see  
“High Availability” in the Alteon OS Application Guide.  
Table 6-52 Layer 2 Failover Menu Options (/cfg/l2/failovr)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
trigger <1-8>  
Displays the Failover Trigger menu. To view menu options, see page 245.  
vlan on|off  
Globally turns VLAN monitor onor off. When the VLAN Monitor is on, the switch automati-  
cally disables only internal ports that belong to the same VLAN as ports in the failover trigger. The  
default value is off.  
on  
Globally turns Layer 2 failover on.  
off  
Globally turns Layer 2 failover off.  
cur  
Displays current Layer 2 failover parameters.  
244 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l2/failovr/trigger  
Failover Trigger Configuration  
[Trigger 1 Menu]  
amon  
limit  
ena  
- Auto Monitor Menu  
- Limit of Trigger  
- Enable Trigger  
- Disable Trigger  
dis  
cur  
- Display current Trigger configuration  
Table 6-53 Failover Trigger Menu Options (/cfg/l2/failovr/trigger)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
amon  
Displays the Auto Monitor menu for the selected trigger. To view menu options, see page 246.  
limit <0-5>  
Configures the minimum number of operational links allowed within each trigger before  
the trigger initiates a failover event. If you enter a value of zero (0), the switch triggers a  
failover event only when no links in the trigger are operational.  
ena  
Enables the selected trigger.  
dis  
Disables the selected trigger.  
cur  
Displays the current failover trigger settings.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l2/failovr/trigger/amon  
Auto Monitor Configuration  
[Auto Monitor Menu]  
addtrnk - Add trunk to Auto Monitor  
remtrnk - Remove trunk from Auto Monitor  
addkey - Add LACP port adminkey to Auto Monitor  
remkey - Remove LACP port adminkey from Auto Monitor  
cur  
- Display current Auto Monitor configuration  
Table 6-54 Auto Monitor Menu Options (/cfg/l2/failovr/trigger/amon)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
addtrnk <Trunk Group number (1-13)>  
Adds a trunk group to the Auto Monitor.  
remtrnk <Trunk Group number (1-13)>  
Removes a trunk group from the Auto Monitor.  
addkey <1-65535>  
Adds a LACP admin key to the Auto Monitor. LACP trunks formed with this admin key will be  
included in the Auto Monitor.  
remkey <1-65535>  
Removes a LACP admin key from the Auto Monitor.  
cur  
Displays the current Auto Monitor settings.  
246 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l2/vlan<VLAN number>  
VLAN Configuration  
[VLAN 1 Menu]  
pvlan  
- Protocol VLAN Menu  
privlan - Private-VLAN Menu  
name  
stg  
add  
rem  
def  
ena  
dis  
del  
cur  
- Set VLAN name  
- Assign VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group  
- Add port to VLAN  
- Remove port from VLAN  
- Define VLAN as list of ports  
- Enable VLAN  
- Delete VLAN  
- Display current VLAN configuration  
The commands in this menu configure VLAN attributes, change the status of each VLAN,  
change the port membership of each VLAN, and delete VLANs. For more information on con-  
figuring VLANs, see “Setup Part 3: VLANs” on page 38.  
By default, the VLAN menu option is disabled except VLAN 1, which is enabled all the time.  
Internal server ports (INTx) and external ports (EXTx) are in VLAN 1 by default. Up to 1024  
VLANs can be configured on the GbESM.  
Table 6-55 VLAN Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
pvlan <1-8>  
Displays the Protocol-based VLAN menu. To view menu options, see page 249.  
privlan  
Displays the Private VLAN menu. To view menu options, see page 251.  
name  
Assigns a name to the VLAN or changes the existing name. The default VLAN name is the first  
one.  
stg <Spanning Tree Group index [1-128]>  
Assigns a VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group.  
add <port alias or number>  
Adds port(s) to the VLAN membership.  
rem <port alias or number>  
Removes port(s) from this VLAN.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-55 VLAN Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
def <list of port numbers>  
Defines which ports are members of this VLAN. Every port must be a member of at least one  
VLAN. By default, internal server ports (INTx) and external ports (EXTx) are in VLAN 1.  
ena  
Enables this VLAN.  
dis  
Disables this VLAN without removing it from the configuration.  
del  
Deletes this VLAN.  
cur  
Displays the current VLAN configuration.  
NOTE All ports must belong to at least one VLAN. Any port which is removed from a VLAN  
and which is not a member of any other VLAN is automatically added to default VLAN 1. You  
cannot remove a port from VLAN 1 if the port has no membership in any other VLAN.  
Also, you cannot add a port to more than one VLAN unless the port has VLAN tagging turned  
on (see the tagcommand on page 208).  
248 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l2/vlan/pvlan <protocol number>  
Protocol-based VLAN Configuration  
[VLAN 1 Protocol 1 Menu]  
pty  
prio  
add  
rem  
del  
- Set protocol type  
- Set priority to protocol  
- Add port to PVLAN  
- Remove port from PVLAN  
- Delete protocol  
ena  
- Enable protocol  
dis  
- Disable protocol  
ports  
- Add/Remove a list of ports to/from PVLAN  
tagpvl - Enable/Disable port tagging for PVLAN  
taglist - Enable tagging a port list for PVLAN  
cur  
- Display current PVLAN configuration  
Use this menu to configure Protocol-based VLAN (PVLAN) for the selected VLAN.  
Table 6-56 PVLAN Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan/pvlan)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
pty <(Ether2|SNAP|LLC)> <Ethernet type>  
Configures the frame type and the Ethernet type for the selected protocol. Ethernet type consists of  
a 4-digit (16 bit) hex code, such as 0080(IPv4).  
prio <0-7>  
Configures the priority value for this PVLAN.  
add  
Adds a port to the selected PVLAN.  
rem  
Removes a port from the selected PVLAN.  
del  
Deletes the selected protocol configuration from the VLAN.  
ena  
Enables the selected protocol on the VLAN.  
dis  
Disables the selected protocol on the VLAN.  
ports  
Defines a list of ports that belong to the selected protocol on this VLAN. Enter 0 (zero) to remove  
all ports.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-56 PVLAN Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan/pvlan)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
tagpvl enable|disable  
Enables or disables port tagging on this PVLAN.  
taglist  
Defines a list of ports that will be tagged by the selected protocol on this VLAN. Enter emptyto  
disable tagging on all ports by this PVLAN.  
cur  
Displays current parameters for the selected PVLAN.  
250 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l2/vlan/privlan  
Private VLAN Configuration  
[privlan Menu]  
type  
map  
ena  
dis  
cur  
- Set Private-VLAN type  
- Associate secondary VLAN with a primary VLAN  
- Enable Private-VLAN  
- Disable Private-VLAN  
- Display current Private-VLAN configuration  
Use this menu to configure a Private VLAN.  
Table 6-57 Private VLAN Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan/privlan)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
type primary|isolated|community  
Defines the VLAN type, as follows:  
Primary: A Private VLAN must have only one primary VLAN. The primary VLAN carries  
unidirectional traffic to ports on the isolated VLAN or to community VLAN.  
Isolated: The isolated VLAN carries unidirectional traffic from host ports. A Private VLAN  
may have only one isolated VLAN.  
Community: Community VLANs carry upstream traffic from host ports. A Private VLAN may  
have multiple community VLANs.  
map <2-4094>  
Configures Private VLAN mapping between a secondary VLAN (isolatedor community)  
and a primary VLAN. Enter the primary VLAN ID.  
ena  
Enables the Private VLAN.  
dis  
Disables the Private VLAN.  
cur  
Displays current parameters for the selected Private VLAN.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3  
Layer 3 Configuration  
[Layer 3 Menu]  
if  
- Interface Menu  
gw  
route  
- Default Gateway Menu  
- Static Route Menu  
mroute - Static IP Multicast Route Menu  
arp  
- ARP Menu  
frwd  
nwf  
- Forwarding Menu  
- Network Filters Menu  
rmap  
rip  
ospf  
bgp  
igmp  
dns  
bootp  
vrrp  
rtrid  
cur  
- Route Map Menu  
- Routing Information Protocol Menu  
- Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Menu  
- Border Gateway Protocol Menu  
- IGMP Menu  
- Domain Name System Menu  
- Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu  
- Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu  
- Set router ID  
- Display current IP configuration  
Table 6-58 Layer 3 Configuration Menu (/cfg/l3)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
if <interface number (1-128)>  
Displays the IP Interface Menu. To view menu options, see page 254.  
gw <default gateway number (1-132)>  
Displays the IP Default Gateway Menu. To view menu options, see page 255.  
route  
Displays the IP Static Route Menu. To view menu options, see page 256.  
mroute  
Displays the Static IP Multicast Route Menu. To view menu options, see page 257.  
arp  
Displays the Address Resolution Protocol Menu. To view menu options, see page 258.  
frwd  
Displays the IP Forwarding Menu. To view menu options, see page 260.  
nwf <Network filter number (1-256)>  
Displays the Network Filter Configuration Menu. To view menu options see page 261.  
252 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-58 Layer 3 Configuration Menu (/cfg/l3)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
rmap <route map number (1-32)>  
Displays the Route Map Menu. To view menu options see page 262.  
rip  
Displays the Routing Interface Protocol Menu. To view menu options, see page 266.  
ospf  
Displays the OSPF Menu. To view menu options, see page 269.  
bgp  
Displays the Border Gateway Protocol Menu. To view menu options, see page 279.  
igmp  
Displays the IGMP Menu. To view menu options, see page 285.  
dns  
Displays the IP Domain Name System Menu. To view menu options, see page 295.  
bootp  
Displays the Bootstrap Protocol Menu. To view menu options, see page 296.  
vrrp  
Displays the Virtual Router Redundancy Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see  
page 297.  
rtrid <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>  
Sets the router ID.  
cur  
Displays the current IP configuration.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/if<interface number>  
IP Interface Configuration  
[IP Interface 1 Menu]  
addr  
mask  
vlan  
- Set IP address  
- Set subnet mask  
- Set VLAN number  
relay - Enable or disable BOOTP relay  
ena  
dis  
del  
cur  
- Enable interface  
- Disable interface  
- Delete interface  
- Display current interface configuration  
The GbE Switch Module can be configured with up to 128 IP interfaces. Each IP interface repre-  
sents the GbE Switch Module on an IP subnet on your network. The Interface option is disabled  
by default.  
NOTE To maintain connectivity between the management module and the GbE Switch Mod-  
ule, use the management module interface to change the IP address of the switch.  
Table 6-59 IP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/if)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
addr <IP address (such as 192.4.17.101)>  
Configures the IP address of the switch interface using dotted decimal notation.  
mask <IP subnet mask (such as 255.255.255.0)>  
Configures the IP subnet address mask for the interface using dotted decimal notation.  
vlan <VLAN number (1-4094)>  
Configures the VLAN number for this interface. Each interface can belong to one VLAN, though  
any VLAN can have multiple IP interfaces in it.  
relay disable|enable  
Enables or disables the BOOTP relay on this interface. It is enabled by default.  
ena  
Enables this IP interface.  
dis  
Disables this IP interface.  
254 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-59 IP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/if)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
del  
Removes this IP interface.  
cur  
Displays the current interface settings.  
/cfg/l3/gw <gateway number>  
Default Gateway Configuration  
[Default gateway 1 Menu]  
addr  
intr  
- Set IP address  
- Set interval between ping attempts  
retry - Set number of failed attempts to declare gateway DOWN  
arp  
vlan  
ena  
dis  
del  
cur  
- Enable/disable ARP only health checks  
- Set VLAN number  
- Enable default gateway  
- Disable default gateway  
- Delete default gateway  
- Display current default gateway configuration  
NOTE The switch can be configured with up to 132 gateways. Gateways one to four are  
reserved for default gateways. Gateway 132 is reserved for the management VLAN.  
This option is disabled by default.  
Table 6-60 Default Gateway Menu Options (/cfg/l3/gw)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
addr <default gateway address (such as, 192.4.17.44)>  
Configures the IP address of the default IP gateway using dotted decimal notation.  
intr <0-60 seconds>  
The switch pings the default gateway to verify that it’s up. The introption sets the time between  
health checks. The range is from 0 to 60 seconds. The default is 2 seconds.  
retry <number of attempts (1-120)>  
Sets the number of failed health check attempts required before declaring this default gateway  
inoperative. The range is from 1 to 120 attempts. The default is 8 attempts.  
arp disable|enable  
Enables or disables Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) health checks. This command is disabled  
by default.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-60 Default Gateway Menu Options (/cfg/l3/gw)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
vlan <1-4095>  
Sets the VLAN to be assigned to this default IP gateway.  
ena  
Enables the gateway for use.  
dis  
Disables the gateway.  
del  
Deletes the gateway from the configuration.  
cur  
Displays the current gateway settings.  
/cfg/l3/route  
IP Static Route Configuration  
[IP Static Route Menu]  
add  
rem  
cur  
- Add static route  
- Remove static route  
- Display current static routes  
Up to 128 static routes can be configured.  
Table 6-61 IP Static Route Configuration Menu Options (cfg/l3/route)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
add <destination> <mask> <gateway> <interface number>  
Adds a static route. You will be prompted to enter a destination IP address, destination subnet  
mask, and gateway address. Enter all addresses using dotted decimal notation.  
rem <destination> <mask>  
Removes a static route. The destination address of the route to remove must be specified using dot-  
ted decimal notation.  
cur  
Displays the current IP static routes.  
256 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/mroute  
IP Multicast Route Configuration  
[IPMC Static Route Menu]  
add  
rem  
cur  
- Add static IP Multicast route  
- Remove static IP Multicast route  
- Display current static IPMC route configuration  
The following table describes the IP Multicast Route menu options.  
Table 6-62 IP Static Route Configuration Menu Options (cfg/l3/mroute)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
add <IPMC destination> <vlan> <port> primary|backup|host <virtual router id|none>  
Adds a static multicast route. You will be prompted to enter a destination IP address (in dotted dec-  
imal notation), VLAN, and member port. Indicate whether the route is used for a primary, backup,  
or host multicast router.  
rem <IPMC destination> <vlan> <port> primary|backup|host <virtual router id|none>  
Removes a static multicast route. The destination address, VLAN, and member port of the route to  
remove must be specified.  
cur  
Displays the current IP multicast routes.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/arp  
ARP Configuration  
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is the TCP/IP protocol that resides within the Internet  
layer. ARP resolves a physical address from an IP address. ARP queries machines on the local  
network for their physical addresses. ARP also maintains IP to physical address pairs in its  
cache memory. In any IP communication, the ARP cache is consulted to see if the IP address of  
the computer or the router is present in the ARP cache. Then the corresponding physical  
address is used to send a packet.  
[ARP Menu]  
static - Static ARP Menu  
rearp  
cur  
- Set re-ARP period in minutes  
- Display current ARP configuration  
Table 6-63 ARP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/arp)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
static  
Displays Static ARP menu. To view options, see page 259.  
rearp <2-120 minutes>  
Defines re-ARP period in minutes. You can set this duration between two and 120 minutes.  
cur  
Displays the current ARP configurations.  
258 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/arp/static  
ARP Static Configuration  
Static ARP entries are permanent in the ARP cache and do not age out like the ARP entries that  
are learnt dynamically. Static ARP entries enable the switch to reach the hosts without sending  
an ARP broadcast request to the network. Static ARPs are also useful to communicate with  
devices that do not respond to ARP requests. Static ARPs can also be configured on some gate-  
ways as a protection against malicious ARP Cache corruption and possible DOS attacks.  
[Static ARP Menu]  
add  
del  
- Add a permanent ARP entry  
- Delete an ARP entry  
clear  
cur  
- Clear static ARP entries  
- Display current static ARP configuration  
Table 6-64 ARP Static Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/arp/static)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
add <IP address> <MAC address> <VLAN number> <port number>  
Adds a permanent ARP entry.  
del <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>  
Deletes a permanent ARP entry.  
clear [<interface number>|<VLAN number>|<port number>|all] <ARP entry number>  
Clears static ARP entries.  
cur  
Displays current static ARP configuration.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/frwd  
IP Forwarding Configuration  
[IP Forwarding Menu]  
dirbr  
- Enable or disable forwarding directed broadcasts  
noicmprd - Enable/disable No ICMP Redirects  
on  
- Globally turn IP Forwarding ON  
off  
cur  
- Globally turn IP Forwarding OFF  
- Display current IP Forwarding configuration  
Table 6-65 IP Forwarding Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/frwd)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
dirbr disable|enable  
Enables or disables forwarding directed broadcasts. This command is disabled by default.  
noicmprd disable|enable  
Enables or disables ICMP re-directs. This command is disabled by default.  
on  
Enables IP forwarding (routing) on the GbE Switch Module.  
off  
Disables IP forwarding (routing) on the GbE Switch Module. Forwarding is turned off by default.  
cur  
Displays the current IP forwarding settings.  
260 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/nwf  
Network Filter Configuration  
[IP Network Filter 1 Menu]  
addr  
mask  
- IP Address  
- IP Subnet mask  
enable - Enable Network Filter  
disable - Disable Network Filter  
delete - Delete Network Filter  
cur  
- Display current Network Filter configuration  
Table 6-66 IP Network Filter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/nwf)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
addr <IP address, such as 192.4.17.44>  
Sets the starting IP address for this filter. The default address is 0.0.0.0.  
mask <subnet mask, such as 255.255.255.0>  
Sets the IP subnet mask that is used with /cfg/l3/nwf/addrto define the range of IP  
addresses that will be accepted by the peer when the filter is enabled. The default value is 0.0.0.0.  
For Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), assign the network filter to a route map, then assign the route  
map to the peer.  
enable  
Enables the Network Filter configuration.  
disable  
Disables the Network Filter configuration.  
delete  
Deletes the Network Filter configuration.  
cur  
Displays the current the Network Filter configuration.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/rmap <route map number>  
Routing Map Configuration  
NOTE The map number (1-32) represents the routing map you wish to configure.  
[IP Route Map 1 Menu]  
alist - Access List number  
aspath - AS Filter Menu  
ap  
lp  
- Set as-path prepend of the matched route  
- Set local-preference of the matched route  
metric - Set metric of the matched route  
type  
prec  
- Set OSPF metric-type of the matched route  
- Set the precedence of this route map  
weight - Set weight of the matched route  
enable - Enable route map  
disable - Disable route map  
delete - Delete route map  
cur  
- Display current route map configuration  
Routing maps control and modify routing information.  
Table 6-67 Routing Map Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
alist <number 1-8>  
Displays the Access List menu. For more information, see page 264.  
aspath <number 1-8>  
Displays the Autonomous System (AS) Filter menu. For more information, see page 265.  
ap <AS number> [<AS number>] [<AS number>]|none  
Sets the AS path preference of the matched route. One to three path preferences can be configured.  
lp <(0-4294967294)>|none  
Sets the local preference of the matched route, which affects both inbound and outbound direc-  
tions. The path with the higher preference is preferred.  
metric <(1-4294967294)>|none  
Sets the metric of the matched route.  
type <value (1|2)>|none  
Assigns the type of OSPF metric. The default is type 1.  
Type 1—External routes are calculated using both internal and external metrics.  
Type 2—External routes are calculated using only the external metrics. Type 1 routes have  
more cost than Type 2.  
none—Removes the OSPF metric.  
262 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-67 Routing Map Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap) (Continued)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
prec <value (1-255)>  
Sets the precedence of the route map. The smaller the value, the higher the precedence. Default  
value is 10.  
weight <value (0-65534)>|none  
Sets the weight of the route map.  
enable  
Enables the route map.  
disable  
Disables the route map.  
delete  
Deletes the route map.  
cur  
Displays the current route configuration.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/rmap <route map number/alist <access list  
number>  
IP Access List Configuration  
NOTE The route map number (1-32) and the access list number (1-8) represent the IP access  
list you wish to configure.  
[IP Access List 1 Menu]  
nwf  
- Network Filter number  
metric - Metric  
action - Set Network Filter action  
enable - Enable Access List  
disable - Disable Access List  
delete - Delete Access List  
cur  
- Display current Access List configuration  
Table 6-68 IP Access List Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap/alist)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
nwf <network filter number (1-256)>  
Sets the network filter number. See “/cfg/l3/nwf” on page 261 for details.  
metric <(1-4294967294)>|none  
Sets the metric value in the AS-External (ASE) LSA.  
action permit|deny  
Permits or denies action for the access list.  
enable  
Enables the access list.  
disable  
Disables the access list.  
delete  
Deletes the access list.  
cur  
Displays the current Access List configuration.  
264 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/rmap <route map number> aspath <autonomous  
system path>  
Autonomous System Filter Path  
NOTE The rmap number (1-32) and the path number (1-8) represent the AS path you wish to  
configure.  
[AS Filter 1 Menu]  
as  
- AS number  
action - Set AS Filter action  
enable - Enable AS Filter  
disable - Disable AS Filter  
delete - Delete AS Filter  
cur  
- Display current AS Filter configuration  
Table 6-69 AS Filter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap/aspath)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
as<AS number (1-65535)>  
Sets the Autonomous System filter’s path number.  
action<permit|deny (p|d)>  
Permits or denies Autonomous System filter action.  
enable  
Enables the Autonomous System filter.  
disable  
Disables the Autonomous System filter.  
delete  
Deletes the Autonomous System filter.  
current  
Displays the current Autonomous System filter configuration.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/rip  
Routing Information Protocol Configuration  
[Routing Information Protocol Menu]  
if  
- RIP Interface Menu  
update - Set update period in seconds  
on  
off  
- Globally turn RIP ON  
- Globally turn RIP OFF  
current - Display current RIP configuration  
The RIP Menu is used for configuring Routing Information Protocol (RIP) parameters. This  
option is turned off by default.  
Table 6-70 RIP Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rip)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
if <1-127>  
Displays the RIP Interface menu. For more information, see page 267.  
update <1-120>  
Configures the time interval for sending for RIP table updates, in seconds.  
The default value is 30 seconds.  
on  
Globally turns RIP on.  
off  
Globally turns RIP off.  
cur  
Displays the current RIP configuration.  
266 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/rip/if <interface number>  
Routing Information Protocol Interface Configuration  
[RIP Interface 1 Menu]  
version - Set RIP version  
supply - Enable/disable supplying route updates  
listen - Enable/disable listening to route updates  
poison - Enable/disable poisoned reverse  
split  
trigg  
mcast  
- Enable/disable split horizon  
- Enable/disable triggered updates  
- Enable/disable multicast updates  
default - Set default route action  
metric - Set metric  
auth  
key  
- Set authentication type  
- Set authentication key  
enable - Enable interface  
disable - Disable interface  
current - Display current RIP interface configuration  
The RIP Menu is used for configuring Routing Information Protocol parameters. This option is  
turned off by default.  
NOTE Do not configure RIP1 parameters if your routing equipment uses RIP version 2.  
Table 6-71 RIP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rip/if)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
version 1|2|both  
Configures the RIP version used by this interface. The default value is version 2.  
supply disable|enable  
When enabled, the switch supplies routes to other routers. The default setting is enabled.  
listen disable|enable  
When enabled, the switch learns routes from other routers. The default setting is enabled.  
poisondisable|enable  
When enabled, the switch uses split horizon with poisoned reverse. When disabled, the switch uses  
only split horizon. The default setting is disabled.  
splitdisable|enable  
Enables or disables split horizon. The default setting is enabled.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-71 RIP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rip/if)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
trigg disable|enable  
Enables or disables Triggered Updates. Triggered Updates are used to speed convergence. When  
enabled, Triggered Updates force a router to send update messages immediately, even if it is not  
yet time for the update message. The default setting is enabled.  
mcast disable|enable  
Enables or disables multicast updates of the routing table (using address 224.0.0.9). The default  
setting is enabled.  
default none|listen|supply|both  
Configures the default route action. The default setting is none.  
metric <1-15>  
Configures the route metric, which indicates the relative distance to the destination. The default  
value is 1.  
auth none|password  
Configures the authentication type. The default is none.  
key  
Configures the authentication key password.  
enable  
Enables this RIP interface.  
disable  
Disables this RIP interface.  
current  
Displays the current RIP configuration.  
268 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/ospf  
Open Shortest Path First Configuration  
[Open Shortest Path First Menu]  
aindex - OSPF Area (index) menu  
range - OSPF Summary Range menu  
if  
- OSPF Interface menu  
virt  
- OSPF Virtual Links menu  
md5key - OSPF MD5 Key Menu  
host - OSPF Host Entry menu  
redist - OSPF Route Redistribute menu  
lsdb - Set the LSDB limit  
default - Originate default route information  
on  
- Globally turn OSPF ON  
off  
cur  
- Globally turn OSPF OFF  
- Display current OSPF configuration  
Table 6-72 OSPF Configuration Menu (/cfg/l3/ospf)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
aindex <area index (0-2)>  
Displays the area index menu. This area index does not represent the actual OSPF area number.  
See page 271 to view menu options.  
range <range number (1-16)>  
Displays summary routes menu for up to 16 IP addresses. See page 272 to view menu options.  
if <interface number (1-127)>  
Displays the OSPF interface configuration menu. See page 273 to view menu options.  
virt <virtual link (1-3)>  
Displays the Virtual Links menu used to configure OSPF for a Virtual Link. See page 275 to view  
menu options.  
md5key <key ID (1-255>  
Assigns a string to MD5 authentication key.  
host <host entry number (1-128)>  
Displays the menu for configuring OSPF for the host routes. Up to 128 host routes can be config-  
ured. Host routes are used for advertising network device IP addresses to external networks to per-  
form server load balancing within OSPF. It also makes Area Border Route (ABR) load sharing and  
ABR failover possible. See page 276 to view menu options.  
redist fixed|static|rip|ebgp|ibgp  
Displays Route Distribution Menu. See page 277 to view menu options.  
lsdb <LSDB limit (0-2000, 0 for no limit)>  
Sets the link state database limit.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-72 OSPF Configuration Menu (/cfg/l3/ospf)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
default <metric (1-16777214)> <metric-type 1|2>|none  
Sets one default route among multiple choices in an area. Use nonefor no default.  
on  
Enables OSPF on the GbE Switch Module.  
off  
Disables OSPF on the GbE Switch Module.  
cur  
Displays the current OSPF configuration settings.  
270 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex <area index>  
Area Index Configuration  
[OSPF Area (index) 1 Menu]  
areaid - Set area ID  
type  
- Set area type  
metric - Set stub area metric  
auth  
spf  
- Set authentication type  
- Set time interval between two SPF calculations  
enable - Enable area  
disable - Disable area  
delete - Delete area  
cur  
- Display current OSPF area configuration  
Table 6-73 Area Index Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
areaid <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>  
Defines the IP address of the OSPF area number.  
type transit|stub|nssa  
Defines the type of area. For example, when a virtual link has to be established with the backbone,  
the area type must be defined as transit.  
Transit area: allows area summary information to be exchanged between routing devices. Any  
area that is not a stub area or NSSA is considered to be transit area.  
Stub area: is an area where external routing information is not distributed. Typically, a stub area is  
connected to only one other area.  
NSSA: Not-So-Stubby Area (NSSA) is similar to stub area with additional capabilities. For exam-  
ple, routes originating from within the NSSA can be propagated to adjacent transit and backbone  
areas. External routes from outside the Autonomous System (AS) can be advertised within the  
NSSA but are not distributed into other areas.  
metric <metric value (1-65535)>  
Configures a stub area to send a numeric metric value. All routes received via that stub area carry  
the configured metric to potentially influencing routing decisions.  
Metric value assigns the priority for choosing the switch for default route. Metric type determines  
the method for influencing routing decisions for external routes.  
auth none|password|md5  
None: No authentication required.  
Password: Authenticates simple passwords so that only trusted routing devices can participate.  
MD5: This parameter is used when MD5 cryptographic authentication is required.  
spf <interval (1-255)>  
Sets time interval between two successive SPF (shortest path first) calculations of the shortest path  
tree using the Dijkstra’s algorithm.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-73 Area Index Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
enable  
Enables the OSPF area.  
disable  
Disables the OSPF area.  
delete  
Deletes the OSPF area.  
cur  
Displays the current OSPF configuration.  
/cfg/l3/ospf/range <range number>  
OSPF Summary Range Configuration  
[OSPF Summary Range 1 Menu]  
addr  
mask  
- Set IP address  
- Set IP mask  
aindex - Set area index  
hide  
- Enable/disable hide range  
enable - Enable range  
disable - Disable range  
delete - Delete range  
cur  
- Display current OSPF summary range configuration  
Table 6-74 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/range)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
addr <IP Address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>  
Configures the base IP address for the range.  
mask <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>  
Configures the IP address mask for the range.  
aindex <area index (0-2)>  
Configures the area index used by the GbE Switch Module.  
hide disable|enable  
Hides the OSPF summary range.  
enable  
Enables the OSPF summary range.  
272 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-74 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/range)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
disable  
Disables the OSPF summary range.  
delete  
Deletes the OSPF summary range.  
current  
Displays the current OSPF summary range.  
/cfg/l3/ospf/if <interface number>  
OSPF Interface Configuration  
[OSPF Interface 1 Menu]  
aindex - Set area index  
prio  
cost  
- Set interface router priority  
- Set interface cost  
hello - Set hello interval in seconds  
dead - Set dead interval in seconds  
trans - Set transit delay in seconds  
retra - Set retransmit interval in seconds  
key  
- Set authentication key  
mdkey - Set MD5 key ID  
enable - Enable interface  
disable - Disable interface  
delete - Delete interface  
cur  
- Display current OSPF interface configuration  
Table 6-75 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/if)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
aindex <area index (0-2)>  
Configures the OSPF area index.  
prio <priority value (0-255)>  
Configures the priority value for the GbE Switch Module’s OSPF interfaces.  
(A priority value of 255 is the highest and 1 is the lowest. A priority value of 0 specifies that the  
interface cannot be used as Designated Router (DR) or Backup Designated Router (BDR).)  
cost <cost value (1-65535)>  
Configures cost set for the selected path—preferred or backup. Usually the cost is inversely pro-  
portional to the bandwidth of the interface. Low cost indicates high bandwidth.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-75 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/if)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
hello <value (1-65535)>  
Configures the interval in seconds between the hellopackets for the interfaces.  
dead <value (1-65535)>  
Configures the health parameters of a hellopacket, which is set for an interval of seconds before  
declaring a silent router to be down.  
trans <value (1-3600)>  
Configures the transit delay in seconds.  
retra <value (0-3600)>  
Configures the retransmit interval in seconds.  
key <key> | none  
Sets the authentication key to clear the password.  
mdkey <key ID (1-255)>|none  
Assigns an MD5 key to the interface.  
enable  
Enables OSPF interface.  
disable  
Disables OSPF interface.  
delete  
Deletes OSPF interface.  
cur  
Displays the current settings for OSPF interface.  
274 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/ospf/virt <link number>  
OSPF Virtual Link Configuration  
[OSPF Virtual Link 1 Menu]  
aindex - Set area index  
hello - Set hello interval in seconds  
dead  
trans - Set transit delay in seconds  
retra - Set retransmit interval in seconds  
- Set dead interval in seconds  
nbr  
key  
- Set router ID of virtual neighbor  
- Set authentication key  
mdkey - Set MD5 key ID  
enable - Enable interface  
disable - Disable interface  
delete - Delete interface  
cur  
- Display current OSPF interface configuration  
Table 6-76 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/virt)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
aindex <area index (0-2)>  
Configures the OSPF area index.  
hello <value (1-65535)>  
Configures the authentication parameters of a hello packet, in seconds.  
dead <value (1-65535)>  
Configures the health parameters of a hello packet, in seconds. Default is 60 seconds.  
trans <value (1-3600)>  
Configures the delay in transit, in seconds. Default is one second.  
retra <value (1-3600)>  
Configures the retransmit interval, in seconds. Default is five seconds.  
nbr <NBR router ID (IP address)>  
Configures the router ID of the virtual neighbor. Default is 0.0.0.0.  
key <password>  
Configures the password (up to eight characters) for each virtual link. Default is none.  
mdkey <key ID (1-255)>|none  
Sets MD5 key ID for each virtual link. Default is none.  
enable  
Enables OSPF virtual link.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-76 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/virt)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
disable  
Disables OSPF virtual link.  
delete  
Deletes OSPF virtual link.  
cur  
Displays the current OSPF virtual link settings.  
/cfg/l3/ospf/host <host number>  
OSPF Host Entry Configuration  
[OSPF Host Entry 1 Menu]  
addr  
- Set host entry IP address  
aindex - Set area index  
cost  
- Set cost of this host entry  
enable - Enable host entry  
disable - Disable host entry  
delete - Delete host entry  
cur  
- Display current OSPF host entry configuration  
Table 6-77 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/host)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
addr <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>  
Configures the base IP address for the host entry.  
aindex <area index (0-2)>  
Configures the area index of the host.  
cost <cost value (1-65535)>  
Configures the cost value of the host.  
enable  
Enables OSPF host entry.  
disable  
Disables OSPF host entry.  
276 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-77 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/host)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
delete  
Deletes OSPF host entry.  
cur  
Displays the current OSPF host entries.  
/cfg/l3/ospf/redist fixed|static|rip|ebgp|ibgp  
OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration  
[OSPF Redistribute Fixed Menu]  
add  
rem  
- Add rmap into route redistribution list  
- Remove rmap from route redistribution list  
export - Export all routes of this protocol  
cur - Display current route-maps added  
Table 6-78 OSPF Route Redistribution Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/redist)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
add (<route map (1-32)> <route map (1-32)>)... |all  
Adds selected routing maps to the rmap list.To add all the 32 route maps, enter all. To add spe-  
cific route maps, enter routing map numbers one per line, NULL at the end.  
This option adds a route map to the route redistribution list. The routes of the redistribution proto-  
col matched by the route maps in the route redistribution list will be redistributed.  
rem (<route map (1-32)> <route map (1-32)>) ... |all  
Removes the route map from the route redistribution list.  
Removes routing maps from the rmaplist. To remove all 32 route maps, enter all. To remove  
specific route maps, enter routing map numbers one per line, NULL at end.  
export <metric (1-16777214)><metric type [1|2]> |none  
Exports the routes of this protocol as external OSPF AS-external LSAs in which the metric and  
metric type are specified. To remove a previous configuration and stop exporting the routes of the  
protocol, enter none.  
cur  
Displays the current route map settings.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/ospf/md5key <key ID>  
OSPF MD5 Key Configuration  
[OSPF MD5 Key 1 Menu]  
key  
- Set authentication key  
delete - Delete key  
cur  
- Display current MD5 key configuration  
Table 6-79 OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/ip/ospf/md5key)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
key  
Sets the authentication key for this OSPF packet.  
delete  
Deletes the authentication key for this OSPF packet.  
cur  
Displays the current MD5 key configuration.  
278 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/bgp  
Border Gateway Protocol Configuration  
[Border Gateway Protocol Menu]  
peer  
aggr  
as  
pref  
on  
- Peer menu  
- Aggregation menu  
- Set Autonomous System (AS) number  
- Set Local Preference  
- Globally turn BGP ON  
off  
cur  
- Globally turn BGP OFF  
- Display current BGP configuration  
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an Internet protocol that enables routers on a network to  
share routing information with each other and advertise information about the segments of the  
IP address space they can access within their network with routers on external networks. BGP  
allows you to decide what is the “best” route for a packet to take from your network to a desti-  
nation on another network, rather than simply setting a default route from your border router(s)  
to your upstream provider(s). You can configure BGP either within an autonomous system or  
between different autonomous systems. When run within an autonomous system, it's called  
internal BGP (iBGP). When run between different autonomous systems, it's called external  
BGP (eBGP). BGP is defined in RFC 1771.  
The BGP Menu enables you to configure the switch to receive routes and to advertise static  
routes, fixed routes and virtual server IP addresses with other internal and external routers. In  
the current Alteon OS implementation, the GbE Switch Module does not advertise BGP routes  
that are learned from other BGP “speakers”.  
The BGP menu option is turned off by default.  
NOTE Fixed routes are subnet routes. There is one fixed route per IP interface.  
Table 6-80 Border Gateway Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/bgp)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
peer <peer number (1-16)>  
Displays the menu used to configure each BGP peer. Each border router, within an autonomous  
system, exchanges routing information with routers on other external networks. To view menu  
options, see page 281.  
aggr <aggregate number (1-16)>  
Displays the Aggregation Menu. To view menu options, see page 284.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-80 Border Gateway Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/bgp)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
as <1-65535>  
Set Autonomous System number.  
pref <local preference (0-4294967294)>  
Sets the local preference. The path with the higher value is preferred.  
When multiple peers advertise the same route, use the route with the shortest AS path as  
the preferred route if you are using eBGP, or use the local preference if you are using  
iBGP.  
on  
Globally turns BGP on.  
off  
Globally turns BGP off.  
cur  
Displays the current BGP configuration.  
280 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/bgp/peer<peer number>  
BGP Peer Configuration  
[BGP Peer 1 Menu]  
redist - Redistribution menu  
addr  
ras  
hold  
- Set remote IP address  
- Set remote autonomous system number  
- Set hold time  
alive - Set keep alive time  
advert - Set min time between advertisements  
retry - Set connect retry interval  
orig  
ttl  
addi  
addo  
remi  
remo  
- Set min time between route originations  
- Set time-to-live of IP datagrams  
- Add rmap into in-rmap list  
- Add rmap into out-rmap list  
- Remove rmap from in-rmap list  
- Remove rmap from out-rmap list  
enable - Enable peer  
disable - Disable peer  
delete - Delete peer  
cur  
- Display current peer configuration  
This menu is used to configure BGP peers, which are border routers that exchange routing  
information with routers on internal and external networks. The peer option is disabled by  
default.  
Table 6-81 BGP Peer Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
redist  
Displays BGP Redistribution Menu. To view the menu options, see page 283.  
addr <IP address (such as 192.4.17.101)>  
Defines the IP address for the specified peer (border router), using dotted decimal notation. The  
default address is 0.0.0.0.  
ras <AS number (1-65535)>  
Sets the remote autonomous system number for the specified peer.  
hold <hold time (0, 3-65535)>  
Sets the period of time, in seconds, that will elapse before the peer session is torn down because the  
switch hasn’t received a “keep alive” message from the peer. The default value is 180 seconds.  
alive <keep alive time (0-21845)>  
Sets the keep-alive time for the specified peer, in seconds. The default value is 60 seconds.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-81 BGP Peer Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
advert <min adv time (1-65535)>  
Sets time in seconds between advertisements.  
retry <connect retry interval (1-65535)>  
Sets connection retry interval, in seconds.  
orig <min orig time (1-65535)>  
Sets the minimum time between route originations, in seconds.  
ttl <number of router hops (1-255)>  
Time-to-live (TTL) is a value in an IP packet that tells a network router whether or not the packet  
has been in the network too long and should be discarded. TTL specifies a certain time span in sec-  
onds that, when exhausted, would cause the packet to be discarded. The TTL is determined by the  
number of router hops the packet is allowed before it must be discarded.  
This command specifies the number of router hops that the IP packet can make. This value is used  
to restrict the number of “hops” the advertisement makes. It is also used to support multi-hops,  
which allow BGP peers to talk across a routed network. The default number is set at 1.  
addi <route map ID (1-32)>  
Adds route map into in-route map list.  
addo <route map ID (1-32)>  
Adds route map into out-route map list.  
remi <route map ID (1-32)>  
Removes route map from in-route map list.  
remo <route map ID (1-32)>  
Removes route map from out-route map list.  
ena  
Enables this peer configuration.  
dis  
Disables this peer configuration.  
del  
Deletes this peer configuration.  
cur  
Displays the current BGP peer configuration.  
282 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist  
BGP Redistribution Configuration  
[Redistribution Menu]  
metric - Set default-metric of advertised routes  
default - Set default route action  
rip  
ospf  
- Enable/disable advertising RIP routes  
- Enable/disable advertising OSPF routes  
fixed - Enable/disable advertising fixed routes  
static - Enable/disable advertising static routes  
cur  
- Display current redistribution configuration  
Table 6-82 BGP Redistribution Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
metric <metric (1-4294967294)>|none  
Sets default metric of advertised routes.  
default none|import|originate|redistribute  
Sets default route action.  
Defaults routes can be configured as import, originate, redistribute, or none.  
None: No routes are configured  
Import: Import these routes.  
Originate: The switch sends a default route to peers if it does not have any default routes in its  
routing table.  
Redistribute: Default routes are either configured through default gateway or learned through  
other protocols and redistributed to peer. If the routes are learned from default gateway configura-  
tion, you have to enable static routes since the routes from default gateway are static routes. Simi-  
larly, if the routes are learned from a certain routing protocol, you have to enable that protocol in  
this redistribute submenu.  
rip disable|enable  
Enables or disables advertising RIP routes  
ospf disable|enable  
Enables or disables advertising OSPF routes.  
fixed disable|enable  
Enables or disables advertising fixed routes.  
static disable|enable  
Enables or disables advertising static routes.  
current  
Displays current redistribution configuration.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/bgp/aggr<aggregation number>  
BGP Aggregation Configuration  
[BGP Aggr 1 Menu]  
addr  
mask  
- Set aggregation IP address  
- Set aggregation network mask  
enable - Enable aggregation  
disable - Disable aggregation  
delete - Delete aggregation  
cur  
- Display current aggregation configuration  
This menu enables you to configure BGP aggregation to specify the routes/range of IP destina-  
tions a peer router accepts from other peers. All matched routes are aggregated to one route, to  
reduce the size of the routing table. By default, the first aggregation number is enabled and the  
rest are disabled.  
Table 6-83 BGP Aggregation Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/aggr)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
addr <IP address (such as 192.4.17.101)>  
Defines the starting subnet IP address for this aggregation, using dotted decimal notation. The  
default address is 0.0.0.0.  
mask <IP subnet mask (such as, 255.255.255.0)>  
This IP address mask is used with addrto define the range of IP addresses that will be aggregated  
to one route when the aggregation is enabled. The default address is 0.0.0.0.  
ena  
Enables this BGP aggregation.  
dis  
Disables this BGP aggregation.  
del  
Deletes this BGP aggregation.  
cur  
Displays the current BGP aggregation configuration.  
284 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/igmp  
IGMP Configuration  
[IGMP Menu]  
snoop  
relay  
- IGMP Snoop Menu  
- IGMP Relay Menu  
mrouter - Static Multicast Router Menu  
igmpflt - IGMP Filtering Menu  
adv  
on  
off  
cur  
- IGMP Advanced Menu  
- Globally turn IGMP ON  
- Globally turn IGMP OFF  
- Display current IGMP configuration  
Table 6-84 describes the commands used to configure basic IGMP parameters.  
Table 6-84 IGMP Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
snoop  
Displays the IGMP Snoop Menu. To view menu options, see page 286.  
relay  
Displays the IGMP Relay Menu. To view menu options, see page 288.  
mrouter  
Displays the Static Multicast Router Menu. To view menu options, see page 290.  
igmpflt  
Displays the IGMP Filtering Menu. To view menu options, see page 291.  
adv  
Displays the IGMP Advanced Menu. To view menu options, see page 294.  
on  
Globally turns IGMP on.  
off  
Globally turns IGMP off.  
cur  
Displays the current IGMP configuration parameters.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/igmp/snoop  
IGMP Snooping Configuration  
[IGMP Snoop Menu]  
igmpv3 - IGMP Version3 Snoop Menu  
mrto  
aggr  
- Set multicast router timeout  
- Aggregate IGMP report  
srcip - Set source ip to use when proxying GSQ  
add  
rem  
- Add VLAN(s) to IGMP Snooping  
- Remove VLAN(s) from IGMP Snooping  
clear - Remove all VLAN(s) from IGMP Snooping  
ena  
dis  
cur  
- Enable IGMP Snooping  
- Disable IGMP Snooping  
- Display current IGMP Snooping configuration  
IGMP Snooping allows the switch to forward multicast traffic only to those ports that  
request it. IGMP snooping prevents multicast traffic from being flooded to all ports. The  
switch learns which server hosts are interested in receiving multicast traffic, and forwards it  
only to ports connected to those servers.  
Table 6-85 describes the commands used to configure IGMP Snooping.  
Table 6-85 IGMP Snoop Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/snoop)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
igmpv3  
Displays the IGMP version 3 Menu. To view menu options, see page 287.  
mrto <1-600 seconds>  
Configures the timeout value for IGMP Membership Queries (mrouter). Once the timeout value  
is reached, the switch removes the multicast router from its IGMP table, if the proper conditions  
are met. The range is from 1 to 600 seconds. The default is 255 seconds.  
aggr enable|disable  
Enables or disables IGMP Membership Report aggregation.  
srcip <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>  
Configures the source IP address used as a proxy for IGMP Group Specific Queries.  
add <VLAN number (1-4094)>  
Adds the selected VLAN(s) to IGMP Snooping.  
rem <VLAN number (1-4094)>  
Removes the selected VLAN(s) from IGMP Snooping.  
clear  
Removes all VLANs from IGMP Snooping.  
286 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-85 IGMP Snoop Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/snoop)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
ena  
Enables IGMP Snooping.  
dis  
Disables IGMP Snooping.  
cur  
Displays the current IGMP Snooping parameters.  
/cfg/l3/igmp/snoop/igmpv3  
IGMP Version 3 Configuration  
[IGMP V3 Snoop Menu]  
sources - Set the number of sources to snoop in group record  
- Enable/disable snooping IGMPv1/v2 reports  
exclude - Enable/disable snooping EXCLUDE mode reports  
ena  
dis  
cur  
- Enable IGMPv3 Snooping  
- Disable IGMPv3 Snooping  
- Display current IGMP Snooping V3 configuration  
Table 6-88 describes the commands used to configure IGMP version 3.  
Table 6-86 IGMP V3 Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/snoop/igmpv3)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
sources <1-64>  
Configures the maximum number of IGMP multicast sources to snoop from within the group  
record. Use this command to limit the number of IGMP sources to provide more refined control.  
v1v2 enable|disable  
Enables or disables snooping on IGMP version 1 and version 2 reports. When disabled, the switch  
drops IGMPv1 and IGMPv2 reports. The default value is enabled.  
exclude enable|disable  
Enables or disables snooping on IGMPv3 Exclude Reports. When disabled, the switch ignores  
Exclude Reports. The default value is enabled.  
ena  
Enables IGMP version 3. The default value is disabled.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-86 IGMP V3 Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/snoop/igmpv3)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
dis  
Disables IGMP version 3.  
cur  
Displays the current IGMP version 3 configuration.  
/cfg/l3/igmp/relay  
IGMP Relay Configuration  
[IGMP Relay Menu]  
mrtr  
add  
- Upstream Multicast Router Menu  
- Add VLAN(s) to downstream  
rem  
- Remove VLAN(s) from downstream  
- Remove all VLAN(s) from downstream  
report - Set unsolicited report interval  
ena  
dis  
cur  
- Enable IGMP Relay  
- Disable IGMP Relay  
- Display current IGMP Relay configuration  
Table 6-88 describes the commands used to configure IGMP Relay.  
Table 6-87 IGMP Relay Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/relay)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
mrtr <multicast router number (1-2)>  
Displays the Upstream Multicast Router Menu. To view menu options, see page 289.  
add <VLAN number (1-4094)>  
Adds the VLAN to the list of IGMP Relay VLANs.  
rem <VLAN number (1-4094)>  
Removes the VLAN from the list of IGMP Relay VLANs.  
clear  
Removes all VLANs from the list of IGMP Relay VLANs.  
report <0-150>  
Configures the interval between unsolicited Join reports sent by the switch, in seconds.  
The default value is 10.  
ena  
Enables IGMP Relay.  
288 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-87 IGMP Relay Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/relay)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
dis  
Disables IGMP Relay.  
cur  
Displays the current IGMP Relay configuration.  
/cfg/l3/igmp/mrtr <Mrouter number>  
IGMP Relay Multicast Router Configuration  
[Multicast router 2 Menu]  
addr  
intr  
- Set IP address of multicast router  
- Set interval between ping attempts  
retry  
restr  
- Set number of failed attempts to declare router DOWN  
- Set number of successful attempts to declare router UP  
version - Set IGMP version  
ena  
dis  
del  
cur  
- Enable multicast router  
- Disable multicast router  
- Delete multicast router  
- Display current multicast router configuration  
Table 6-90 describes the commands used to configure the IGMP Relay multicast router.  
Table 6-88 IGMP Relay Mrouter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/relay/mrtr)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
addr <IP address (such as 224.0.1.0)>  
Configures the IP address of the IGMP multicast router used for IGMP Relay.  
intr <1-60>  
Configures the time interval between ping attempts to the upstream Mrouters, in seconds.  
The default value is 2.  
retry <1-120>  
Configures the number of failed ping attempts required before the switch declares this Mrouter is  
down. The default value is 4.  
restr <1-128>  
Configures the number of successful ping attempts required before the switch declares this  
Mrouter is up. The default value is 5.  
version <1-2>  
Configures the IGMP version (1 or 2) of the multicast router.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-88 IGMP Relay Mrouter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/relay/mrtr)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
ena  
Enables the multicast router.  
dis  
Disables the multicast router.  
del  
Deletes the multicast router from IGMP Relay.  
cur  
Displays the current IGMP Relay multicast router parameters.  
/cfg/l3/igmp/mrouter  
IGMP Static Multicast Router Configuration  
[Static Multicast Router Menu]  
add  
rem  
cur  
- Add port as Multicast Router Port  
- Remove port as Multicast Router Port  
- Display current Multicast Router configuration  
Table 6-89 describes the commands used to configure a static multicast router.  
NOTE When you configure a static multicast router on a VLAN, the process of learning mul-  
ticast routers is disabled for that VLAN.  
Table 6-89 IGMP Static Multicast Router Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/mrouter)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
add <port number> <VLAN number> <IGMP version number>  
Selects a port/VLAN combination on which the static multicast router is connected, and configures  
the IGMP version (1, 2, or 3) of the multicast router.  
remove <port number> <VLAN number> <IGMP version number>  
Removes a static multicast router from the selected port/VLAN combination.  
cur  
Displays the current IGMP Static Multicast Router parameters.  
290 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt  
IGMP Filtering Configuration  
[IGMP Filter Menu]  
filter - IGMP Filter Definition Menu  
port  
ena  
dis  
cur  
- IGMP Filtering Port Menu  
- Enable IGMP Filtering  
- Disable IGMP Filtering  
- Display current IGMP Filtering configuration  
Table 6-90 describes the commands used to configure an IGMP filter.  
Table 6-90 IGMP Filtering Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
filter <filter number (1-16)>  
Displays the IGMP Filter Definition Menu. To view menu options, see page 292.  
port <port number>  
Displays the IGMP Filtering Port Menu. To view menu options, see page 293.  
ena  
Enables IGMP filtering globally.  
dis  
Disables IGMP filtering globally.  
cur  
Displays the current IGMP Filtering parameters.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt/filter <filter number>  
IGMP Filter Definition  
[IGMP Filter 1 Definition Menu]  
range - Set IP Multicast address range  
action - Set filter action  
ena  
dis  
del  
cur  
- Enable filter  
- Disable filter  
- Delete filter  
- Display current IGMP filter configuration  
Table 6-91 describes the commands used to define an IGMP filter.  
Table 6-91 IGMP Filter Definition Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt/filter)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
range <IP multicast address (such as 224.0.0.10)> <IP multicast address>  
Configures the range of IP multicast addresses for this filter.  
action allow|deny  
Allows or denies multicast traffic for the IP multicast addresses specified.  
ena  
Enables this IGMP filter.  
dis  
Disables this IGMP filter.  
del  
Deletes this filter’s parameter definitions.  
cur  
Displays the current IGMP filter.  
292 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt/port <port alias or number>  
IGMP Filtering Port Configuration  
filt  
add  
rem  
cur  
- Enable/disable IGMP filtering on port  
- Add IGMP filter to port  
- Remove IGMP filter from port  
- Display current IGMP filtering Port configuration  
Table 6-92 describes the commands used to configure a port for IGMP filtering.  
Table 6-92 IGMP Filter Port Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt/port)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
filt enable|disable  
Enables or disables IGMP filtering on this port.  
add <filter number (1-16)>  
Adds an IGMP filter to this port.  
rem <filter number (1-16)>  
Removes an IGMP filter from this port.  
cur  
Displays the current IGMP filter parameters for this port.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/igmp/adv  
IGMP Advanced Configuration  
[IGMP Advanced Menu]  
qintrval - Set IGMP query interval  
robust - Set expected packet loss on subnet  
timeout - Set report timeout  
fastlv - Enable/disable Fastleave processing in VLAN  
flood  
cur  
- Flood unregistered IPMC  
- Display current IGMP Advanced configuration  
Table 6-90 describes the commands used to configure advanced IGMP parameters.  
Table 6-93 IGMP Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/adv)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
qinterval <1-600>  
Configures the interval for IGMP Query Reports. The default value is 125 seconds.  
robust <2-10>  
Configures the IGMP Robustness variable, which allows you to tune the switch for expected  
packet loss on the subnet. If the subnet is expected to be lossy (high rate of packet loss), increase  
the value. The default value is 2.  
timeout <1-255 seconds>  
Configures the timeout value for IGMP Membership Reports (host). Once the timeout value is  
reached, the switch removes the host from its IGMP table, if the conditions are met. The range is  
from 1 to 255 seconds. The default is 10 seconds.  
fastlv <VLAN number> disable|enable  
Enables or disables Fastleave processing. Fastleave allows the switch to immediately remove a  
port from the IGMP port list, if the host sends a Leave message, and the proper conditions  
are met. This command is disabled by default.  
flood enable|disable  
Configures the switch to flood unregistered IP multicast reports to all ports. The default setting is  
enabled.  
cur  
Displays the current IGMP Advanced parameters.  
294 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/dns  
Domain Name System Configuration  
[Domain Name System Menu]  
prima - Set IP address of primary DNS server  
secon - Set IP address of secondary DNS server  
dname - Set default domain name  
cur  
- Display current DNS configuration  
The Domain Name System (DNS) Menu is used for defining the primary and secondary DNS  
servers on your local network, and for setting the default domain name served by the switch  
services. DNS parameters must be configured prior to using hostname parameters with the  
ping, traceroute, and tftpcommands.  
Table 6-94 Domain Name Service Menu Options (/cfg/l3/dns)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
prima <IP address (such as 192.4.17.101)>  
You will be prompted to set the IP address for your primary DNS server. Use dotted decimal nota-  
tion.  
secon <IP address (such as 192.4.17.101)>  
You will be prompted to set the IP address for your secondary DNS server. If the primary DNS  
server fails, the configured secondary will be used instead. Enter the IP address using dotted deci-  
mal notation.  
dname <dotted DNS notation>|none  
Sets the default domain name used by the switch.  
For example: mycompany.com  
cur  
Displays the current Domain Name System settings.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/bootp  
Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration  
[Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu]  
addr  
- Set IP address of BOOTP server  
addr2 - Set IP address of second BOOTP server  
on  
- Globally turn BOOTP relay ON  
off  
cur  
- Globally turn BOOTP relay OFF  
- Display current BOOTP relay configuration  
The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) Relay Menu is used to allow hosts to obtain their configura-  
tions from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. The BOOTP configuration  
enables the switch to forward a client request for an IP address to two DHCP/BOOTP servers  
with IP addresses that have been configured on the GbE Switch Module.  
BOOTP relay is turned off by default.  
Table 6-95 Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bootp)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
addr <IP address (such as 192.4.17.101)>  
Sets the IP address of the BOOTP server.  
addr2 <IP address (such a 192.4.17.101)>  
Sets the IP address of the second BOOTP server.  
on  
Globally turns on BOOTP relay.  
off  
Globally turns off BOOTP relay.  
cur  
Displays the current BOOTP relay configuration.  
296 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/vrrp  
VRRP Configuration  
[Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu]  
vr  
group - VRRP Virtual Router Group menu  
if - VRRP Interface menu  
track - VRRP Priority Tracking menu  
hotstan - Enable/disable hot-standby processing  
- VRRP Virtual Router menu  
on  
- Globally turn VRRP ON  
off  
cur  
- Globally turn VRRP OFF  
- Display current VRRP configuration  
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on GbE Switch Modules provides redun-  
dancy between routers in a LAN. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP  
address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. One of the virtual  
routers is then elected as the master, based on a number of priority criteria, and assumes control  
of the shared virtual router IP address. If the master fails, one of the backup virtual routers will  
assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address.  
By default, VRRP is disabled. Alteon OS has extended VRRP to include virtual servers as  
well, allowing for full active/active redundancy between switches. For more information on  
VRRP, see the “High Availability” chapter in the Alteon OS Application Guide.  
Table 6-96 VRRP Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
vr <virtual router number (1-1024)>  
Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Menu. This menu is used for configuring virtual routers on this  
switch. To view menu options, see page 299.  
group  
Displays the VRRP virtual router group menu, used to combine all virtual routers together as one  
logical entity. Group options must be configured when using two or more Alteon switches in a hot-  
standby failover configuration where only one switch is active at any given time. To view menu  
options, see page 302.  
if <interface number (1-127)>  
Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Interface Menu. To view menu options, see page 305.  
track  
Displays the VRRP Tracking Menu. This menu is used for weighting the criteria used when modi-  
fying priority levels in the master router election process. To view menu options, see page 306.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-96 VRRP Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
hotstan disable|enable  
Enables or disables hot standby processing, in which two or more switches provide redundancy for  
each other. By default, this option is disabled.  
on  
Globally enables VRRP on this switch.  
off  
Globally disables VRRP on this switch.  
cur  
Displays the current VRRP parameters.  
298 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr <router number>  
Virtual Router Configuration  
[VRRP Virtual Router 1 Menu]  
track - Priority Tracking Menu  
vrid  
addr  
if  
- Set virtual router ID  
- Set IP address  
- Set interface number  
- Set renter priority  
prio  
adver - Set advertisement interval  
preem - Enable or disable preemption  
ena  
dis  
del  
cur  
- Enable virtual router  
- Disable virtual router  
- Delete virtual router  
- Display current VRRP virtual router configuration  
This menu is used for configuring virtual routers for this switch. A virtual router is defined by  
its virtual router ID and an IP address. On each VRRP-capable routing device participating in  
redundancy for this virtual router, a virtual router will be configured to share the same virtual  
router ID and IP address.  
Virtual routers are disabled by default.  
Table 6-97 VRRP Virtual Router Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
track  
Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for this virtual router. Tracking is an Alteon OS pro-  
prietary extension to VRRP, used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the  
master router. To view menu options, see page 301.  
vrid <virtual router ID (1-1024)>  
Defines the virtual router ID. This is used in conjunction with addr(below) to define a virtual  
router on this switch. To create a pool of VRRP-enabled routing devices which can provide redun-  
dancy to each other, each participating VRRP device must be configured with the same virtual  
router: one that shares the same vridand addrcombination.  
The vridfor virtual routers (where the virtual router IP address is not the same as any virtual  
server) can be any integer between 1 and 1024. The default value is 1.  
All vridvalues must be unique within the VLAN to which the virtual router’s IP interface  
belongs.  
addr <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>  
Defines the IP address for this virtual router using dotted decimal notation. This is used in conjunc-  
tion with the vrid(above) to configure the same virtual router on each participating VRRP  
device. The default address is 0.0.0.0.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 299  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-97 VRRP Virtual Router Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
if <interface number (1-127)>  
Selects a switch IP interface. If the IP interface has the same IP address as the addroption above,  
this switch is considered the “owner” of the defined virtual router. An owner has a special priority  
of 255 (highest) and will always assume the role of master router, even if it must preempt another  
virtual router which has assumed master routing authority. This preemption occurs even if the  
preemoption below is disabled. The default value is 1.  
prio <priority (1-254)>  
Defines the election priority bias for this virtual server. This can be any integer between 1 and 254.  
The default value is 100.  
During the master router election process, the routing device with the highest virtual router priority  
number wins. If there is a tie, the device with the highest IP interface address wins. If this virtual  
router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface, the priority for this vir-  
tual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest).  
When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/trackor /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr#/track),  
this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational cri-  
teria.  
adver <seconds (1-255)>  
Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. This can be any integer between 1  
and 255 seconds. The default value is 1.  
preem disable|enable  
Enables or disables master preemption. When enabled, if this virtual router is in backup mode but  
has a higher priority than the current master, this virtual router will preempt the lower priority mas-  
ter and assume control. Note that even when preemis disabled, this virtual router will always pre-  
empt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual router addr  
are the same). By default, this option is enabled.  
ena  
Enables this virtual router.  
dis  
Disables this virtual router.  
del  
Deletes this virtual router from the switch configuration.  
cur  
Displays the current configuration information for this virtual router.  
300 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr<router number>/track  
Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration  
[VRRP Virtual Router 1 Priority Tracking Menu]  
vrs  
ifs  
- Enable/disable tracking master virtual routers  
- Enable/disable tracking other interfaces  
ports - Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports  
cur - Display current VRRP virtual router configuration  
This menu is used for modifying the priority system used when electing the master router from  
a pool of virtual routers. Various tracking criteria can be used to bias the election results. Each  
time one of the tracking criteria is met, the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an  
amount defined through the VRRP Tracking Menu (see page 306).  
Criteria are tracked dynamically, continuously updating virtual router priority levels when  
enabled. If the virtual router preemption option (see preemin Table 6-97 on page 299) is  
enabled, this virtual router can assume master routing authority when its priority level rises  
above that of the current master.  
Some tracking criteria (vrs, ifs, and portsbelow) apply to standard virtual routers, other-  
wise called “virtual interface routers.” A virtual server router is defined as any virtual router  
whose IP address (addr) is the same as any configured virtual server IP address.  
Table 6-98 Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
vrs disable|enable  
When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each virtual router in master  
mode on this switch. This is useful for making sure that traffic for any particular client/server pair-  
ing are handled by the same switch, increasing routing and load balancing efficiency. This com-  
mand is disabled by default.  
ifs disable|enable  
When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each other IP interface active  
on this switch. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the  
same VLAN. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. This  
command is disabled by default.  
ports disable|enable  
When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same  
VLAN. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. This helps elect the  
virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. This command is disabled by default.  
cur  
Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 301  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/vrrp/group  
Virtual Router Group Configuration  
[VRRP Virtual Router Group Menu]  
track - Priority Tracking Menu  
vrid  
if  
prio  
- Set virtual router ID  
- Set interface number  
- Set renter priority  
adver - Set advertisement interval  
preem - Enable or disable preemption  
ena  
dis  
del  
cur  
- Enable virtual router  
- Disable virtual router  
- Delete virtual router  
- Display current VRRP virtual router configuration  
The Virtual Router Group menu is used for associating all virtual routers into a single logical  
virtual router, which forces all virtual routers on the GbE Switch Module to either be master or  
backup as a group. A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address. On  
each VRRP-capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router, a virtual  
router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address.  
NOTE This option is required to be configured only when using at least two GbE Switch Mod-  
ules in a hot-standby failover configuration, where only one switch is active at any time.  
Table 6-99 Virtual Router Group Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/group)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
track  
Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for the virtual router group. Tracking is an Alteon OS  
proprietary extension to VRRP, used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing  
the master router. To view menu options, see page 304.  
vrid <virtual router ID (1-1024)>  
Defines the virtual router ID.  
The vridfor standard virtual routers (where the virtual router IP address is not the same as any  
virtual server) can be any integer between 1 and 1024. All vridvalues must be unique within the  
VLAN to which the virtual router’s IP interface (see ifbelow) belongs. The default virtual router  
ID is 1.  
if <interface number (1-127)>  
Selects a switch IP interface. The default switch IP interface number is 1.  
302 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-99 Virtual Router Group Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/group)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
prio <priority (1-254)>  
Defines the election priority bias for this virtual router group. This can be any integer between 1  
and 254. The default value is 100.  
During the master router election process, the routing device with the highest virtual router priority  
number wins. If there is a tie, the device with the highest IP interface address wins. If this virtual  
router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface, the priority for this vir-  
tual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest).  
When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/trackor /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr#/track),  
this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational cri-  
teria.  
adver <seconds (1-255)>  
Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. This can be any integer between 1  
and 255 seconds. The default is 1.  
preem disable|enable  
Enables or disables master preemption. When enabled, if the virtual router group is in backup  
mode but has a higher priority than the current master, this virtual router will preempt the lower  
priority master and assume control. Note that even when preemis disabled, this virtual router will  
always preempt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual  
router addrare the same). By default, this option is enabled.  
ena  
Enables the virtual router group.  
dis  
Disables the virtual router group.  
del  
Deletes the virtual router group from the switch configuration.  
cur  
Displays the current configuration information for the virtual router group.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 303  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/vrrp/group/track  
Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration  
[Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Menu]  
ifs  
ports - Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports  
cur - Display current VRRP Group Tracking configuration  
- Enable/disable tracking other interfaces  
NOTE If Virtual Router Group Tracking is enabled, then the tracking option will be available  
only under group option. The tracking setting for the other individual virtual routers will be  
ignored.  
Table 6-100 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Menu (/cfg/l3/vr/group/track)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
ifs disable|enable  
When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each other IP interface active  
on this switch. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the  
same VLAN. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. This  
command is disabled by default.  
ports disable|enable  
When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same  
VLAN. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. This helps elect the  
virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. This command is disabled by default.  
cur  
Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router.  
304 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/vrrp/if<interface number>  
VRRP Interface Configuration  
NOTE The interface-number (1 to 127) represents the IP interface on which authentication  
parameters must be configured.  
[VRRP Interface 1 Menu]  
auth  
- Set authentication types  
passw - Set plain-text password  
del  
cur  
- Delete interface  
- Display current VRRP interface configuration  
This menu is used for configuring VRRP authentication parameters for the IP interfaces used  
with the virtual routers.  
Table 6-101 VRRP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/if)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
auth none|password  
Defines the type of authentication that will be used: none(no authentication), or password  
(password authentication).  
passw <password>  
Defines a plain text password up to eight characters long. This password will be added to each  
VRRP packet transmitted by this interface when password authentication is chosen (see auth  
above).  
del  
Clears the authentication configuration parameters for this IP interface. The IP interface itself is  
not deleted.  
cur  
Displays the current configuration for this IP interface’s authentication parameters.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 305  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/l3/vrrp/track  
VRRP Tracking Configuration  
[VRRP Tracking Menu]  
vrs  
ifs  
- Set priority increment for virtual router tracking  
- Set priority increment for IP interface tracking  
ports - Set priority increment for VLAN switch port tracking  
cur - Display current VRRP Priority Tracking configuration  
This menu is used for setting weights for the various criteria used to modify priority levels dur-  
ing the master router election process. Each time one of the tracking criteria is met (see “VRRP  
Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu” on page 301), the priority level for the virtual router is  
increased by an amount defined through this menu.  
Table 6-102 VRRP Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
vrs <0-254>  
Defines the priority increment value (0 through 254) for virtual routers in master mode detected on  
this switch. The default value is 2.  
ifs <0-254>  
Defines the priority increment value (0 through 254) for active IP interfaces detected on this  
switch. The default value is 2.  
ports <0-254>  
Defines the priority increment value (0 through 254) for active ports on the virtual router’s VLAN.  
The default value is 2.  
cur  
Displays the current configuration of priority tracking increment values.  
NOTE These priority tracking options only define increment values. These options do not  
affect the VRRP master router election process until options under the VRRP Virtual Router  
Priority Tracking Menu (see page 301) are enabled.  
306 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/qos  
Quality of Service Configuration  
[QOS Menu]  
8021p  
- 802.1p Menu  
- Dscp Menu  
dscp  
Use the Quality of Service (QoS) menus to configure the 802.1p priority value and DiffServ  
Code Point (DSCP) value of incoming packets. This allows you to differentiate between  
various types of traffic, and provide different priority levels.  
Table 6-103 Quality of Service Menu Options (/cfg/qos)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
8021p  
Displays 802.1p configuration menu. To view menu options, see page 308.  
dscp  
Displays DSCP configuration menu. To view menu options, see page 309.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 307  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/qos/8021p  
802.1p Configuration  
[802.1p Menu]  
priq  
- Set priority to COS queue mapping  
qweight - Set weight to a COS queue  
numcos - Set number of COS queue  
cur  
- Display current 802.1p configuration  
This feature provides the capability to filter IP packets based on the 802.1p bits in the packet's  
VLAN header. The 802.1p bits specify the priority that you should give to the packets while  
forwarding them. The packets with a higher (non-zero) priority bits are given forwarding pref-  
erence over packets with numerically lower priority bits value.  
Table 6-104 802.1p Menu Options (/cfg/qos/8021p)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
priq <0-7> <0-1>|<0-7>  
Maps the 802.1p priority of to the Class of Service queue (COSq) priority. Enter the 802.1p prior-  
ity value (0-7), followed by the Class of Service queue that handles the matching traffic.  
qweight <0-1>|<0-7> <0-15>  
Configures the weight of the selected Class of Service queue (COSq). Enter the queue  
number, followed by the scheduling weight (0-15).  
numcos 2|8  
Sets the number of Class of Service queues for switch ports. The default value is 2. You must  
apply, save, and reset the switch to activate the new configuration.  
cur  
Displays the current 802.1p parameters.  
308 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/qos/dscp  
DSCP Configuration  
[dscp Menu]  
dscp  
prio  
on  
- Remark DSCP value to a new DSCP value  
- Remark DSCP value to a 802.1p priority  
- Globally turn DSCP remarking ON  
off  
cur  
- Globally turn DSCP remarking OFF  
- Display current DSCP remarking configuration  
Use this menu map the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) value of incoming packets to a new value,  
or to an 802.1p priority value.  
Table 6-105 DSCP Menu Options (/cfg/qos/dscp)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
dscp <0-63> <0-63>  
Maps the initial DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) value to a new value. Enter the DSCP value (0-63) of  
incoming packets, followed by the new value.  
prio <dscp (0-63)> <priority (0-7)>  
Maps the DiffServ Code point value to an 802.1p priority value. Enter the DSCP value, followed  
by the corresponding 802.1p value.  
on  
Turns on DSCP re-marking globally.  
off  
Turns off DSCP re-marking globally.  
cur  
Displays the current DSCP parameters.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 309  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/acl  
Access Control List Configuration  
[ACL Menu]  
acl  
- Access Control List Item Config Menu  
- Access Control List Block Config Menu  
- Access Control List Group Config Menu  
- Display current ACL configuration  
block  
group  
cur  
Use this menu to create Access Control Lists, ACL Blocks, and ACL Groups. ACLs define  
matching criteria used for IP filtering and Quality of Service functions.  
Table 6-106 ACL Menu Options (/cfg/acl)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
acl <1-4096>  
Displays Access Control List configuration menu. To view menu options, see page 311.  
block <1-4096>  
Displays ACL Block configuration menu. To view menu options, see page 316.  
group <1-4096>  
Displays ACL Group configuration menu. To view menu options, see page 317.  
cur  
Displays the current ACL parameters.  
310 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/acl/acl <ACL number>  
ACL Configuration  
[ACL 1 Menu]  
ethernet - Ethernet Header Options Menu  
ipv4 - IP Header Options Menu  
tcpudp - TCP/UDP Header Options Menu  
pktfmt - Set to filter specific packet format types  
egrport - Set to filter for packets egressing this port  
action - Set filter action  
stats  
reset  
cur  
- Enable/disable statistics for this acl  
- Reset filtering parameters  
- Display current filter configuration  
These menus allow you to define filtering criteria for each Access Control List (ACL).  
Table 6-107 ACL Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
ethernet  
Displays the ACL Ethernet Header menu. To view menu options, see page 312.  
ipv4  
Displays the ACL IP Header menu. To view menu options, see page 313.  
tcpudp  
Displays the ACL TCP/UDP Header menu. To view menu options, see page 314.  
pktfmt <packet format>  
Displays the ACL Packet Format menu. To view menu options, see page 315.  
egrport <port alias or number>  
Configures the ACL to function on egress packets.  
action permit|deny|setprio <0-7>  
Configures a filter action for packets that match the ACL definitions. You can choose to permit  
(pass) or deny (drop) packets, or set the 802.1p priority level (0-7).  
stats e|d  
Enables or disables the statistics collection for the Access Control List.  
reset  
Resets the ACL parameters to their default values.  
cur  
Displays the current ACL parameters.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 311  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/acl/acl <ACL number>/ethernet  
Ethernet Filtering Configuration  
smac  
dmac  
vlan  
etype  
pri  
- Set to filter on source MAC  
- Set to filter on destination MAC  
- Set to filter on VLAN ID  
- Set to filter on ethernet type  
- Set to filter on priority  
- Reset all fields  
reset  
cur  
- Display current parameters  
This menu allows you to define Ethernet matching criteria for an ACL.  
Table 6-108 Ethernet Filtering Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x/ethernet)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
smac <MAC address (such as 00:60:cf:40:56:00)> <mask (FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF)>  
Defines the source MAC address for this ACL.  
dmac <MAC address (such as 00:60:cf:40:56:00)> <mask (FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF)>  
Defines the destination MAC address for this ACL.  
vlan <1-4095> <VLAN mask (0xfff)>  
Defines a VLAN number and mask for this ACL.  
etype ARP|IP|IPv6|MPLS|RARP|any|0xXXXX  
Defines the Ethernet type for this ACL.  
pri <0-7>  
Defines the Ethernet priority value for the ACL.  
reset  
Resets Ethernet parameters for the ACL to their default values.  
cur  
Displays the current Ethernet parameters for the ACL.  
312 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/acl/acl <ACL number>/ipv4  
IP version 4 Filtering Configuration  
[Filtering IPv4 Menu]  
sip  
dip  
- Set to filter on source IP address  
- Set to filter on destination IP address  
proto  
tos  
reset  
cur  
- Set to filter on prototype  
- Set to filter on TOS  
- Reset all fields  
- Display current parameters  
This menu allows you to define IPv4 matching criteria for an ACL.  
Table 6-109 IP version 4 Filtering Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x/ipv4)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
sip <IP address> <mask (such as 255.255.255.0)>  
Defines a source IP address for the ACL. If defined, traffic with this source IP address will match  
this ACL. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation.  
dip <IP address> <mask (such as 255.255.255.0)>  
Defines a destination IP address for the ACL. If defined, traffic with this destination IP address  
will match this ACL.  
proto <0-255>  
Defines an IP protocol for the ACL. If defined, traffic from the specified protocol matches this fil-  
ter. Specify the protocol number. Listed below are some of the well-known protocols.  
Number Name  
1
icmp  
igmp  
tcp  
2
6
17  
89  
112  
udp  
ospf  
vrrp  
tos <0-255>  
Defines a Type of Service value for the ACL. For more information on ToS, refer to RFC 1340 and  
1349.  
reset  
Resets the IPv4 parameters for the ACL to their default values.  
Displays the current IPV4 parameters.  
cur  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 313  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/acl/acl <ACL number>/tcpudp  
TCP/UDP Filtering Configuration  
[Filtering TCP/UDP Menu]  
sport  
dport  
flags  
reset  
cur  
- Set to filter on TCP/UDP source port  
- Set to filter on TCP/UDP destination port  
- Set to filter TCP/UDP flags  
- Reset all fields  
- Display current parameters  
This menu allows you to define TCP/UDP matching criteria for an ACL.  
Table 6-110 TCP/UDP Filtering Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x/tcpudp)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
sport <source port (1-65535)> <mask (0xFFFF)>  
Defines a source port for the ACL. If defined, traffic with the specified TCP or UDP source port  
will match this ACL. Specify the port number. Listed below are some of the well-known ports:  
Number  
20  
Name  
ftp-data  
ftp  
21  
22  
ssh  
23  
telnet  
smtp  
time  
25  
37  
42  
name  
whois  
domain  
tftp  
43  
53  
69  
70  
gopher  
finger  
http  
79  
80  
dport <destination port (1-65535)> <mask (0xFFFF)>  
Defines a destination port for the ACL. If defined, traffic with the specified TCP or UDP destina-  
tion port will match this ACL. Specify the port number, just as with sport above.  
flags <value (0x0-0x3f)>  
Defines a TCP/UDP flag for the ACL.  
314 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 6-110 TCP/UDP Filtering Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x/tcpudp)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
reset  
Resets the TCP/UDP parameters for the ACL to their default values.  
cur  
Displays the current TCP/UDP Filtering parameters.  
/cfg/acl/acl <ACL number>/pktfmt  
Packet Format Filtering Configuration  
[Filtering Packet Format Menu]  
ethfmt - Set to filter on ethernet format  
tagfmt - Set to filter on ethernet tagging format  
ipfmt  
reset  
cur  
- Set to filter on IP format  
- Reset all fields  
- Display current parameters  
This menu allows you to define Packet Format matching criteria for an ACL.  
Table 6-111 ACL Packet Format Filtering Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x/pktfmt)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
ethfmt eth2|SNAP|LLC  
Defines the Ethernet format for the ACL.  
tagfmt none|tagged  
Defines the tagging format for the ACL.  
ipfmt none|v4|v6  
Defines the IP format for the ACL.  
reset  
Resets Packet Format parameters for the ACL to their default values.  
cur  
Displays the current Packet Format parameters for the ACL.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
cfg/acl/block <ACL Block number>  
ACL Block Menu  
[ACL Block 1 Menu]  
addacl - Add ACL item to block  
remacl - Remove ACL item from block  
cur - Display current ACL items in block  
This menu allows you to compile one or more ACLs into an ACL Block. Each ACL in the  
ACL Block must fall within the same mask.  
Table 6-112 ACL Block Menu options (/cfg/acl/block x)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
addac1 <1-4096>  
Adds the selected ACL to the ACL Block.  
remac1 <1-4096>  
Removes the selected ACL from the ACL Block.  
cur  
Displays the current ACL block parameters.  
316 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/acl/group <ACL Group number>  
ACL Group Configuration  
[ACL Group 1 Menu]  
add  
rem  
cur  
- Add ACL to group  
- Remove ACL from group  
- Display current ACL items in group  
This menu allows you to compile one or more ACLs into an ACL Group. Once you create an  
ACL Group, you can assign the ACL Group to one or more ports.  
Table 6-113 ACL Group Menu Options (/cfg/acl/group x)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
add acl <1-4096>  
Adds the selected ACL to the ACL Group.  
rem acl <1-4096>  
Removes the selected ACL from the ACL Group.  
cur  
Displays the current ACL group parameters.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 317  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/pmirr  
Port Mirroring Configuration  
[Port Mirroring Menu]  
mirror - Enable/Disable Mirroring  
monport - Monitoring Port based PM Menu  
cur - Display All Mirrored and Monitoring Ports  
Port mirroring is disabled by default. For more information about port mirroring on the  
GbE Switch Module, see “Appendix A: Troubleshooting” in the Alteon OS Application Guide.  
NOTE Traffic on VLAN 4095 is not mirrored to the external ports.  
The Port Mirroring Menu is used to configure, enable, and disable the monitored port. When  
enabled, network packets being sent and/or received on a target port are duplicated and sent to  
a monitor port. By attaching a network analyzer to the monitor port, you can collect detailed  
information about your network performance and usage.  
Table 6-114 Port Mirroring Menu Options (/cfg/pmirr)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
mirror disable|enable  
Enables or disables port mirroring  
monport <port alias or number>  
Displays port-mirroring menu. To view menu options, see page 319.  
cur  
Displays current settings of the mirrored and monitoring ports.  
318 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/pmirr/monport  
Port-Mirroring Configuration  
[Port EXT1 Menu]  
add  
rem  
- Add "Mirrored" port and VLANs  
- Rem "Mirrored" port and VLANs  
delete - Delete this "Monitor" port  
cur - Display current Port Mirroring configuration  
Table 6-115 Port Mirroring Monitor Port Menu Options (/cfg/pmirr/monport)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
add <mirrored port (port to mirror from)> <direction (in, out, or both)>  
Adds the port to be mirrored. This command also allows you to enter the direction of the traffic. It  
is necessary to specify the direction because:  
If the source port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is ingress or  
both (ingress and egress), the frame is sent to the mirrored port.  
If the destination port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is egress or  
both, the frame is sent to the monitoring port.  
rem <mirrored port (port to mirror from)>  
Removes the mirrored port.  
delete  
Deletes this monitor port.  
cur  
Displays the current settings of the monitoring port.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 319  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/setup  
Setup  
The setup program steps you through configuring the system date and time, BOOTP, IP, Span-  
ning Tree, port speed/mode, VLAN parameters, and IP interfaces.  
To start the setup program, at the Configuration#prompt, enter:  
Configuration# setup  
For a complete description of how to use setup, see Chapter 2, “First-Time Configuration.”  
/cfg/dump  
Dump  
The dump program writes the current switch configuration to the terminal screen. To start the  
dump program, at the Configuration#prompt, enter:  
Configuration# dump  
The configuration is displayed with parameters that have been changed from the default val-  
ues. The screen display can be captured, edited, and placed in a script file, which can be used to  
configure other switches through a Telnet connection. When using Telnet to configure a new  
switch, paste the configuration commands from the script file at the command line prompt of  
the switch. The active configuration can also be saved or loaded via TFTP, as described on  
page 321.  
320 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/cfg/ptcfg<TFTP server> <filename>  
Saving the Active Switch Configuration  
When the ptcfgcommand is used, the switch’s active configuration commands (as displayed  
using /cfg/dump) will be uploaded to the specified script configuration file on the TFTP  
server. To start the switch configuration upload, at the Configuration#prompt, enter:  
Configuration# ptcfg <TFTP server> <filename>  
Where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname, and filename is the name of the target  
script configuration file.  
NOTE The output file is formatted with line-breaks but no carriage returns—the file cannot be  
viewed with editors that require carriage returns (such as Microsoft Notepad).  
NOTE If the TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system, the specified  
ptcfgfile must exist prior to executing the ptcfgcommand and must be writable (set with  
proper permission, and not locked by any application). The contents of the specified file will  
be replaced with the current configuration data.  
/cfg/gtcfg<TFTP server> <filename>  
Restoring the Active Switch Configuration  
When the gtcfgcommand is used, the active configuration will be replaced with the com-  
mands found in the specified configuration file. The file can contain a full switch configuration  
or a partial switch configuration. The configuration loaded using gtcfgis not activated until  
the applycommand is used. If the applycommand is found in the configuration script file  
loaded using this command, the apply action will be performed automatically.  
To start the switch configuration download, at the Configuration#prompt, enter:  
Configuration# gtcfg <TFTP server> <filename>  
Where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname, and filename is the name of the target  
script configuration file.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 321  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Alteon OS Command Reference  
322 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 7  
The Operations Menu  
The Operations Menu is generally used for commands that affect switch performance immedi-  
ately, but do not alter permanent switch configurations. For example, you can use the Opera-  
tions Menu to immediately disable a port (without the need to apply or save the change), with  
the understanding that when the switch is reset, the port returns to its normally configured  
operation.  
40M2420, April 2007  
323  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/oper  
Operations Menu  
[Operations Menu]  
port  
vrrp  
ip  
- Operational Port Menu  
- Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu  
- Operational IP Menu  
passwd - Change current user password  
clrlog - Clear syslog messages  
conlog - Enable/Disable Session Console Logging  
cfgtrk - Track last config change made  
ntpreq - Send NTP request  
The commands of the Operations Menu enable you to alter switch operational characteristics  
without affecting switch configuration.  
Table 7-1 Operations Menu (/oper)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
port <port alias or number>  
Displays the Operational Port Menu. To view menu options, see page 325.  
vrrp  
Displays the Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu. To view menu options, see page 327.  
ip  
Displays the IP Operations Menu, which has one sub-menu/option, the Operational Border Gate-  
way Protocol Menu. To view menu options, see page 328.  
passwd <15 char max>  
Allows the user to change the password. You need to enter the current password in use for valida-  
tion.  
clrlog  
Clears all Syslog messages.  
conlog enable|disable  
Enables of disables console logging of the current session.  
cfgtrk  
Displays a list of configuration changes made since the last applycommand. Each time the  
applycommand is sent, the configuration-tracking log is cleared.  
ntpreq  
Allows the user to send requests to the NTP server.  
324 Chapter 7: The Operations Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/oper/port <port alias or number>  
Operations-Level Port Options  
[Operations Port INT1 Menu]  
8021x  
ena  
- 8021.x Menu  
- Enable port  
dis  
cur  
- Disable port  
- Current port state  
Operations-level port options are used for temporarily disabling or enabling a port, and for re-  
setting the port.  
Table 7-2 Operations-Level Port Menu Options (/oper/port)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
8021x  
Displays the 802.1x Port Menu. To view menu options, see page 326.  
ena  
Temporarily enables the port. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the  
switch is reset.  
dis  
Temporarily disables the port. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the  
switch is reset.  
cur  
Displays the current settings for the port.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 7: The Operations Menu 325  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/oper/port <port alias or number>/8021x  
Operations-Level Port 802.1x Options  
[802.1x Operation Menu]  
reset  
- Reinitialize 802.1x access control on this port  
reauth - Initiate reauthentication on this port now  
Operations-level port 802.1x options are used to temporarily set 802.1x parameters for a port.  
Table 7-3 Operations-Level Port 802.1x Menu Options (/oper/port x/8021x)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
reset  
Re-initializes the 802.1x access-control parameters for the port. The following actions take place,  
depending on the 802.1x port configuration:  
force unauth- the port is placed in unauthorized state, and traffic is blocked.  
auto- the port is placed in unauthorized state, then authentication is initiated.  
force auth- the port is placed in authorized state, and authentication is not required.  
reauth  
Re-authenticates the supplicant (client) attached to the port. This command only applies if the  
port’s 802.1x mode is configured as auto.  
326 Chapter 7: The Operations Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/oper/vrrp  
Operations-Level VRRP Options.  
[VRRP Operations Menu]  
back - Set virtual router to backup  
Table 7-4 Operations-Level VRRP Menu Options (/oper/vrrp)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
back <virtual router number (1-1024)>  
Forces the specified master virtual router on this switch into backup mode. This is generally used  
for passing master control back to a preferred switch once the preferred switch has been returned to  
service after a failure. When this command is executed, the current master gives up control and ini-  
tiates a new election by temporarily advertising its own priority level as 0 (lowest). After the new  
election, the virtual router forced into backup mode by this command will resume master control in  
the following cases:  
This switch owns the virtual router (the IP addresses of the virtual router and its IP interface are  
the same)  
This switch’s virtual router has a higher priority and preemption is enabled.  
There are no other virtual routers available to take master control.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 7: The Operations Menu 327  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/oper/ip  
Operations-Level IP Options  
[IP Operations Menu]  
bgp  
- Operational Border Gateway Protocol Menu  
Table 7-5 Operations-Level IP Menu Options (/oper/ip)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
bgp  
Displays the Border Gateway Protocol Operations Menu. To view the menu options see page 328.  
/oper/ip/bgp  
Operations-Level BGP Options  
[Border Gateway Protocol Operations Menu]  
start - Start peer session  
stop  
- Stop peer session  
current - Current BGP operational state  
Table 7-6 Operations-Level BGP Menu Options (/oper/ip/bgp)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
start <peer number (1-16)>  
Starts the peer session.  
stop <peer number (1-16)>  
Stops the peer session.  
cur  
Displays the current BGP operational state.  
328 Chapter 7: The Operations Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
CHAPTER 8  
The Boot Options Menu  
To use the Boot Options Menu, you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator. The  
Boot Options Menu provides options for:  
Selecting a switch software image to be used when the switch is next reset  
Selecting a configuration block to be used when the switch is next reset  
Downloading or uploading a new software image to the switch via FTP/TFTP  
In addition to the Boot Menu, you can use a Web browser or SNMP to work with switch image  
and configuration files. To use SNMP, refer to “Working with Switch Images and Configura-  
tion Files” on page 368.  
40M2420, April 2007  
329  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/boot  
Boot Menu  
[Boot Options Menu]  
sched - Scheduled Switch Reset Menu  
image - Select software image to use on next boot  
conf - Select config block to use on next boot  
mode - Select CLI mode to use on next boot  
prompt - Prompt for selectable boot mode  
gtimg - Download new software image via TFTP  
ptimg - Upload selected software image via TFTP  
reset - Reset switch [WARNING: Restarts Spanning Tree]  
cur - Display current boot options  
Each of these options is discussed in greater detail in the following sections.  
Scheduled Reboot of the Switch  
This feature allows the switch administrator to schedule a reboot to occur at a particular time in  
future. This feature is particularly helpful if the user needs to perform switch upgrades during  
off-peak hours. You can set the reboot time, cancel a previously scheduled reboot, and check  
the time of the currently set reboot schedule with the help of the following sub-menu:  
/boot/sched  
Scheduled Reboot Menu  
[Boot Schedule Menu]  
set  
- Set switch reset time  
cancel - Cancel pending switch reset  
cur  
- Display current switch reset schedule  
330 Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Updating the Switch Software Image  
The switch software image is the executable code running on the GbE Switch Module. A version  
of the image ships with the switch, and comes pre-installed on the device. As new versions of  
the image are released, you can upgrade the software running on your switch. To get the latest  
version of software available for your GbE Switch Module, go to:  
http://www.ibm.com/pc/support  
Click on software updates. Use the /boot/curcommand to determine the current  
software version.  
The typical upgrade process for the software image consists of the following steps:  
Place the new image onto a FTP or TFTP server on your network, or on a local computer.  
Transfer the new image to your switch.  
Select the new software image to be loaded into switch memory the next time the switch is  
reset.  
Loading New Software to Your Switch  
The switch can store up to two different software images, called image1and image2, as  
well as boot software, called boot. When you load new software, you must specify where it  
should be placed: either into image1, image2, or boot.  
For example, if your active image is currently loaded into image1, you would probably load  
the new image software into image2. This lets you test the new software and reload the origi-  
nal active image (stored in image1), if needed.  
Using the BBI  
You can use the Browser-Based Interface to load software onto the GbESM. The software  
image to load can reside in one of the following locations:  
FTP server  
TFTP server  
Local computer  
After you log onto the BBI, perform the following steps to load a software image:  
1. Click the Configure context button in the toolbar.  
2. In the Navigation Window, select System > Config/Image Control.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu 331  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Alteon OS Command Reference  
The Switch Image and Configuration Management page appears.  
3. If you are loading software from your computer (HTTP client), go to step 4.  
If you are loading software from a FTP/TFTP server, enter the server’s information in  
the FTP/TFTP Settings section.  
4. In the Image Settings section, select the image version you want to replace (Image for  
Transfer).  
If you are loading software from a FTP/TFTP server, enter the file name and  
click Get Image.  
If you are loading software from your computer, click Browse.  
In the File Upload Dialog, select the file and click OK.  
Click Download via Browser.  
Once the image has loaded, the page refreshes to show the new software.  
332 Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Using the AOS CLI  
To load a new software image to your switch, you need the following:  
The image or boot software loaded on a FTP/TFTP server on your network  
The hostname or IP address of the FTP/TFTP server  
The name of the new software image or boot file  
NOTE The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames. See “Domain Name  
System Configuration” on page 295.  
When the above requirements are met, use the following procedure to download the new soft-  
ware to your switch.  
1. At the BootOptions#prompt, enter:  
Boot Options# gtimg  
2. Enter the name of the switch software to be replaced:  
Enter name of switch software image to be replaced  
["image1"/"image2"/"boot"]: <image>  
3. Enter the hostname or IP address of the FTP or TFTP server.  
Enter hostname or IP address of FTP/TFTP server: <name or IP address>  
4. Enter the name of the new software file on the server.  
Enter name of file on FTP/TFTP server: <filename>  
The exact form of the name will vary by server. However, the file location is normally relative  
to the FTP or TFTP directory (usually /tftpboot).  
5. Enter your username for the server, if applicable.  
Enter username for FTP server or hit return for TFTP server:  
<username> or <Enter>  
The system prompts you to confirm your request.  
You should next select a software image to run, as described below.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu 333  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Selecting a Software Image to Run  
You can select which software image (image1or image2) you want to run in switch mem-  
ory for the next reboot.  
1. At the BootOptions#prompt, enter:  
Boot Options# image  
2. Enter the name of the image you want the switch to use upon the next boot.  
The system informs you of which image is currently set to be loaded at the next reset, and  
prompts you to enter a new choice:  
Currently set to use switch software "image1" on next reset.  
Specify new image to use on next reset ["image1"/"image2"]:  
334 Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch  
You can upload a software image from the switch to a FTP or TFTP server.  
1. At the BootOptions#prompt, enter:  
Boot Options# ptimg  
2. The system prompts you for information. Enter the desired image:  
Enter name of switch software image to be uploaded  
["image1"|"image2"|"boot"]: <image> <hostname or server-IP-addr> <server-file-  
name>  
3. Enter the name or the IP address of the FTP or TFTP server:  
Enter hostname or IP address of FTP/TFTP server: <name or IP address>  
4. Enter the name of the file into which the image will be uploaded on the FTP or TFTP  
server:  
Enter name of file on FTP/TFTP server: <filename>  
5. The system then requests confirmation of what you have entered. To have the file  
uploaded, enter Y.  
image2 currently contains Software Version 1.3.0  
Upload will transfer image2 (1889411 bytes) to file "test"  
on TFTP server 192.1.1.1.  
Confirm upload operation [y/n]: y  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu 335  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Selecting a Configuration Block  
When you make configuration changes to the GbE Switch Module, you must save the changes so  
that they are retained beyond the next time the switch is reset. When you perform the save  
command, your new configuration changes are placed in the active configuration block. The  
previous configuration is copied into the backup configuration block.  
There is also a factory configuration block. This holds the default configuration set by the factory  
when your GbE Switch Module was manufactured. Under certain circumstances, it may be desir-  
able to reset the switch configuration to the default. This can be useful when a custom-configured  
GbE Switch Module is moved to a network environment where it will be re configured for a differ-  
ent purpose.  
Use the following procedure to set which configuration block you want the switch to load the  
next time it is reset:  
1. At the BootOptions#prompt, enter:  
Boot Options# conf  
2. Enter the name of the configuration block you want the switch to use:  
The system informs you of which configuration block is currently set to be loaded at the next  
reset, and prompts you to enter a new choice:  
Currently set to use active configuration block on next reset.  
Specify new block to use ["active"/"backup"/"factory"]:  
336 Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Resetting the Switch  
You can reset the switch to make your software image file and configuration block changes occur.  
NOTE Resetting the switch causes the Spanning Tree Group to restart. This process can be  
lengthy, depending on the topology of your network.  
NOTE Resetting the switch causes the date and time to revert to default values.  
Use /cfg/sys/dateand /cfg/sys/timeto reenter the current date and time.  
To reset the switch, at the BootOptions#prompt, enter:  
>> Boot Options# reset  
You are prompted to confirm your request.  
Accessing the ISCLI  
The default command-line interface for the GbESM is the Alteon OS CLI. To access the  
ISCLI, enter the following command and reset the GbESM:  
Main# boot/mode iscli  
To access the Alteon OS CLI, enter the following command from the ISCLI and reload the  
GbESM:  
Router(config)# boot cli-mode aos  
Users can select the CLI mode upon login, if the /boot/prompt command is enabled. Only  
an administrator connected through the console port can view and enable /boot/prompt.  
When /boot/prompt is enabled, the first user to log in can select the CLI mode. Subse-  
quent users must use the selected CLI mode, until all users have logged out.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu 337  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
338 Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 9  
The Maintenance Menu  
The Maintenance Menu is used to manage dump information and forward database informa-  
tion. It also includes a debugging menu to help with troubleshooting.  
40M2420, April 2007  
339  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/maint  
Maintenance Menu  
NOTE To use the Maintenance Menu, you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator.  
[Maintenance Menu]  
sys  
fdb  
- System Maintenance Menu  
- Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu  
- Debugging Menu  
- ARP Cache Manipulation Menu  
- IP Route Manipulation Menu  
- IGMP Multicast Group Menu  
- Uuencode FLASH dump  
debug  
arp  
route  
igmp  
uudmp  
ptdmp  
- Upload FLASH dump via FTP/TFTP  
ptfile - Upload FLASH dump via FTP/TFTP  
cldmp  
panic  
tsdmp  
- Clear FLASH dump  
- Dump state information to FLASH and reboot  
- Tech support dump  
pttsdmp - Upload tech support dump via FTP/TFTP  
Dump information contains internal switch state data that is written to flash memory on the  
GbE Switch Module after any one of the following occurs:  
The switch administrator forces a switch panic. The panicoption, found in the Mainte-  
nance Menu, causes the switch to dump state information to flash memory, and then  
causes the switch to reboot.  
The watchdog timer forces a switch reset. The purpose of the watchdog timer is to reboot  
the switch if the switch software freezes.  
The switch detects a hardware or software problem that requires a reboot.  
Table 9-1 Maintenance Menu (/maint)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
sys  
Displays the System Maintenance Menu. To view menu options, see page 342.  
fdb  
Displays the Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu. To view menu options, see page 343.  
debug  
Displays the Debugging Menu. To view menu options, see page 344.  
340 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 9-1 Maintenance Menu (/maint)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
arp  
Displays the ARP Cache Manipulation Menu. To view menu options, see page 345.  
route  
Displays the IP Route Manipulation Menu. To view menu options, see page 346.  
igmp  
Displays the IGMP Maintenance Menu. To view menu options, see page 347.  
uudmp  
Displays dump information in uuencoded format. For details, see page 349.  
ptdmp <host name> <file name> [-mgmt|-data]  
Saves the system dump information via TFTP. For details, see page 350.  
ptfile  
Uploads a specified file from switch the root file system to a FTP/TFTP server.  
cldmp  
Clears dump information from flash memory. For details, see page 350.  
panic  
Dumps MP information to FLASH and reboots. For details, see page 351.  
tsdmp  
Dumps all GbE Switch Module information, statistics, and configuration.You can log the tsdump  
output into a file.  
pttsdmp  
Redirects the technical support dump (tsdmp) to an external TFTP server.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 341  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/maint/sys  
System Maintenance  
This menu is reserved for use by IBM Service Support. The options are used to perform system  
debugging.  
[System Maintenance Menu]  
flags - Set NVRAM flag word  
Table 9-2 System Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/sys)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
flags <new NVRAM flags word as 0xXXXXXXXX>  
This command sets the flags that are used for debugging purposes by Tech support group.  
342 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/maint/fdb  
Forwarding Database Maintenance  
[FDB Manipulation Menu]  
find  
port  
- Show a single FDB entry by MAC address  
- Show FDB entries for a single port  
trunk - Show FDB entries for a single trunk  
vlan  
dump  
- Show FDB entries for a single VLAN  
- Show all FDB entries  
clear - Clear entire FDB, then re-add static entries  
The Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu can be used to view information and to delete a  
MAC address from the forwarding database or clear the entire forwarding database. This is  
helpful in identifying problems associated with MAC address learning and packet forwarding  
decisions.  
Table 9-3 FDB Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/fdb)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
find <MAC address> [<VLAN>]  
Displays a single database entry by its MAC address. You are prompted to enter the MAC address  
of the device. Enter the MAC address using the xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx format (such as  
08:00:20:12:34:56) or xxxxxxxxxxxxformat (such as 080020123456).  
port <port alias or number>  
Displays all FDB entries for a particular port.  
trunk <Trunk Group number>  
Displays all FDB entries for a particular port.  
vlan <VLAN number (1-4095)>  
Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN.  
dump  
Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database. For details, see page 77.  
clear  
Clears the entire Forwarding Database from switch memory.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 343  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/maint/debug  
Debugging Options  
[Miscellaneous Debug Menu]  
tbuf  
snap  
- Show MP trace buffer  
- Show MP snap (or post-mortem) trace buffer  
clrcfg - Clear all flash configs  
The Miscellaneous Debug Menu displays trace buffer information about events that can be  
helpful in understanding switch operation. You can view the following information using the  
debug menu:  
Events traced by the Management Processor (MP)  
Events traced to a buffer area when a reset occurs  
If the switch resets for any reason, the MP trace buffer is saved into the snap trace buffer area.  
The output from these commands can be interpreted by IBM Service Support.  
Table 9-4 Miscellaneous Debug Menu Options (/maint/debug)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
tbuf  
Displays the Management Processor trace buffer. Header information similar to the following is shown:  
MP trace buffer at 13:28:15 Fri May 25, 2001; mask: 0x2ffdf748  
The buffer information is displayed after the header.  
snap  
Displays the Management Processor snap (or post-mortem) trace buffer. This buffer contains infor-  
mation traced at the time that a reset occurred.  
clrcfg  
Deletes all flash configuration blocks.  
344 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/maint/arp  
ARP Cache Maintenance  
[Address Resolution Protocol Menu]  
find  
port  
vlan  
addr  
dump  
clear  
- Show a single ARP entry by IP address  
- Show ARP entries on a single port  
- Show ARP entries on a single VLAN  
- Show ARP entries for switch's interfaces  
- Show all ARP entries  
- Clear ARP cache  
Table 9-5 ARP Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/arp)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
find <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>  
Shows a single ARP entry by IP address.  
port <port alias or number>  
Shows ARP entries on a single port.  
vlan <VLAN number>  
Shows ARP entries on a single VLAN.  
addr  
Shows the list of IP addresses which the switch will respond to for ARP requests.  
dump  
Shows all ARP entries.  
clear  
Clears the entire ARP list from switch memory.  
NOTE To display all ARP entries currently held in the switch, or a portion according to one of  
the options listed on the menu above (find, port, vlan, dump), you can also refer to “ARP  
Information” on page 98.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 345  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/maint/route  
IP Route Manipulation  
[IP Routing Menu]  
find - Show a single route by destination IP address  
gw - Show routes to a single gateway  
type - Show routes of a single type  
tag - Show routes of a single tag  
if  
- Show routes on a single interface  
dump - Show all routes  
clear - Clear route table  
Table 9-6 IP Route Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/route)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
find <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>  
Shows a single route by destination IP address.  
gw <default gateway address (such as, 192.4.17.44)>  
Shows routes to a default gateway.  
type indirect|direct|local|broadcast|martian|multicast  
Shows routes of a single type. For a description of IP routing types, see Table 4-21 on page 96  
tag fixed|static|addr|rip|ospf|bgp|broadcast|martian|multicast  
Shows routes of a single tag. For a description of IP routing tags, see Table 4-22 on page 97  
if <interface number (1-128)>  
Shows routes on a single interface.  
dump  
Shows all routes.  
clear  
Clears the route table from switch memory.  
NOTE To display all routes, you can also refer to “IP Routing Information” on page 95.  
346 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/maint/igmp  
IGMP Maintenance  
[IGMP Multicast Group Menu]  
group  
- Multicast Group Menu  
mrouter - IGMP Multicast Router Port Menu  
clear  
- Clear group and mrouter tables  
Table 9-7 describes the IGMP Maintenance commands.  
Table 9-7 IGMP Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/igmp)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
group  
Displays the Multicast Group menu. To view menu options, see page 347.  
mrouter  
Displays the Multicast Router Port menu. To view menu options, see page 347.  
clear  
Clears the IGMP group table and Mrouter tables.  
/maint/igmp/group  
IGMP Group Maintenance  
[IGMP Multicast Group Menu]  
find  
vlan  
trunk  
- Show a single group by IP group address  
- Show groups on a single vlan  
- Show groups on a single port  
- Show groups on a single trunk  
detail - Show detail of a single group by IP address  
dump  
- Show all groups  
clear  
- Clear group tables  
Table 9-7 describes the IGMP Maintenance commands.  
Table 9-8 IGMP Multicast Group Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/igmp/group)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
find <IP address>  
Displays a single IGMP multicast group by its IP address.  
vlan <VLAN number>  
Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single VLAN.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 347  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 9-8 IGMP Multicast Group Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/igmp/group)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
port <Port number or alias>  
Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single port.  
trunk <Trunk Group number>  
Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single trunk group.  
detail <IP address>  
Displays detailed information about a single IGMP multicast group.  
dump  
Displays information for all multicast groups.  
clear  
Clears the IGMP group tables.  
/maint/igmp/mrouter  
IGMP Multicast Routers Maintenance  
[IGMP Multicast Routers Menu]  
vlan  
dump  
clear  
- Show all multicast router ports on a single vlan  
- Show all multicast router ports  
- Clear multicast router port table  
Table 9-7 describes the IGMP multicast router (Mrouter) maintenance commands.  
Table 9-9 IGMP Mrouter Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/igmp/mrouter)  
Command Syntax and Usage  
vlan <VLAN number>  
Shows all IGMP multicast router ports on a single VLAN.  
dump  
Shows all multicast router ports.  
clear  
Clears the IGMP Multicast Router port table.  
348 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/maint/uudmp  
Uuencode Flash Dump  
Using this command, dump information is presented in uuencoded format. This format makes  
it easy to capture the dump information as a file or a string of characters.  
If you want to capture dump information to a file, set your communication software on your  
workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the uudmpcommand. This will ensure that  
you do not lose any information. Once entered, the uudmpcommand will cause approximately  
23,300 lines of data to be displayed on your screen and copied into the file.  
Using the uudmpcommand, dump information can be read multiple times. The command  
does not cause the information to be updated or cleared from flash memory.  
NOTE Dump information is not cleared automatically. In order for any subsequent dump  
information to be written to flash memory, you must manually clear the dump region. For more  
information on clearing the dump region, see page 350.  
To access dump information, at the Maintenance#prompt, enter:  
Maintenance# uudmp  
The dump information is displayed on your screen and, if you have configured your communi-  
cation software to do so, captured to a file. If the dump region is empty, the following appears:  
No FLASH dump available.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 349  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/maint/ptdmp <server> <filename>  
TFTP System Dump Put  
Use this command to put(save) the system dump to a TFTP server.  
NOTE If the TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system, the specified  
ptdmpfile must exist prior to executing the ptdmpcommand, and must be writable (set with  
proper permission, and not locked by any application). The contents of the specified file will  
be replaced with the current dump data.  
To save dump information via TFTP, at the Maintenance#prompt, enter:  
Maintenance# ptdmp <server> <filename>  
Where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname, and filename is the target dump file.  
/maint/cldmp  
Clearing Dump Information  
To clear dump information from flash memory, at the Maintenance#prompt, enter:  
Maintenance# cldmp  
The switch clears the dump region of flash memory and displays the following message:  
FLASH dump region cleared.  
If the flash dump region is already clear, the switch displays the following message:  
FLASH dump region is already clear.  
350 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
/maint/panic  
Panic Command  
The paniccommand causes the switch to immediately dump state information to flash mem-  
ory and automatically reboot.  
To select panic, at the Maintenance#prompt, enter:  
>> Maintenance# panic  
A FLASH dump already exists.  
Confirm replacing existing dump and reboot [y/n]:  
Enter yto confirm the command:  
Confirm dump and reboot [y/n]: y  
The following messages are displayed:  
Starting system dump...done.  
Rebooted because of PANIC command.  
Booting complete 0:01:01 Tue Mar 14, 2007:  
Version 1.3.0 from FLASH image1, active config block.  
No POST errors (0xff).  
Production Mode.  
Unscheduled System Dumps  
If there is an unscheduled system dump to flash memory, the following message is displayed  
when you log on to the switch:  
Note: A system dump exists in FLASH. The dump was saved  
at 13:43:22 Tuesday March 14, 2007. Use /maint/uudmp to  
extract the dump for analysis and /maint/cldmp to  
clear the FLASH region. The region must be cleared  
before another dump can be saved.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 351  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Alteon OS Command Reference  
352 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX A  
Alteon OS Syslog Messages  
The following syntax is used when outputting syslog messages:  
<Time stamp><Log Label>Web OS<Thread ID>:<Message>  
where  
<Timestamp>  
The time of the message event is displayed in month day hour:minute:second format. For  
example: Aug1914:20:30  
<Log Label>  
The following types of log messages are recorded: LOG_EMERG, LOG_ALERT,  
LOG_CRIT, LOG_ERR, LOG_WARNING, LOG_NOTICE, LOG_INFO, and LOG_DEBUG  
<Thread ID>  
This is the software thread that reports the log message. The following thread IDs are  
recorded: stg, ip, console, telnet, vrrp, system, webserver, ssh, and bgp  
<Message>: The log message  
Following is a list of potential syslog messages. To keep this list as short as possible, only  
<Thread ID> and <Message> are shown. The messages are sorted by <Log Label>.  
Where the <Thread ID> is listed as mgmt, one of the following may be shown: console,  
telnet, webserver, or ssh.  
LOG_WARNING  
FILTER “filter <filter number> fired on port <port number>, <source IP address> -> <desti-  
nation IP address>, [<ICMP type>], [<IP protocol>], [<TCP f1ags>]”  
40M2420, April 2007  
353  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
LOG_ALERT  
STP  
Own BPDU received from port <port_id>  
STP  
STG <stg>, topology change detected  
STP  
CIST topology change detected  
STP  
STG <stg>, new root bridge  
STP  
CIST new root bridge  
IP  
Cannot contact default gateway <ip_address>  
Received errored advertisement from <ip_address>  
Received incorrect password from <ip_address>  
Received incorrect addresses from <ip_address>  
Received incorrect advertisement interval <seconds> from <ip_address>  
Synchronization from non-configured peer <ip_address>  
Synchronization from non-configured peer <ip_address> was blocked  
Notification (<reason>) received from <BGP peer ip_address>  
Session with <BGP peer ip_address> failed (<reason>)  
Inserted at port EXT<num> is UNAPPROVED! Port is DISABLED.  
Removed at port EXT<num>  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
BGP  
BGP  
SFP  
SFP  
SFP  
Inserted at port EXT<num>  
354 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
LOG_CRITICAL  
SSH  
SSH  
SSH  
SYSTEM  
SFP  
Can't allocate memory in load_MP_INT  
Currently not enough resource for loading RSA private key  
Currently not enough resource for loading RSA public key  
Temperature exceeds threshold  
Failed to Read SFP ID for port EXT<num>  
SFP  
Failed to Select SFP for port EXT<num> ID  
SFP  
Voltage (<volt>) is UNDER Range on port EXT<num>. Port is DISABLED  
Voltage (<volt>) is OVER Range on port EXT<num>  
Failed to Read SFP Voltage|Temperature for port EXT<num>  
Failed to Select SFP for port EXT<num> voltage|temperature.  
Temperature (<temp>) is UNDER|OVER Range on port EXT<num>  
Poll SFP Failed to get SFP Status  
SFP  
SFP  
SFP  
SFP  
SFP  
SFP  
Inserted at port EXT<num> has I2C FAILURE! Port is DISABLED.  
TX Fault on port EXT<num>. Port is DISABLED.  
SFP  
40M2420, April 2007  
Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 355  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
LOG_ERROR  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
NTP  
NTP  
STP  
PANIC at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id>  
VERIFY at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id>  
ASSERT at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id>  
Cannot contact <primary|secondary> NTP server <ip_address>  
Unable to listen to NTP port  
Error: Error writing STG config to FLASH  
STP  
Error: Error writing config to FLASH  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
CLI  
Apply not done  
Save not done  
<apply|save|diff> is issued by another user. Try later.  
Error: Error writing %s config to FLASH  
CLI  
New Path Cost for Port <port_id> is invalid  
PVID <vlan_id> for port <port_id> is not created  
RADIUS secret must be 1-32 characters long  
Please configure primary RADIUS server address  
STP changes can't be applied since STP is OFF  
Trunk group <trunk_id> contains ports with different PVIDs  
Trunk group <trunk_id> has more than <max_trunk_ports> ports  
Trunk group <trunk_id> contains no ports but is enabled  
Not all ports in trunk group <trunk_id> are in VLAN <vlan_id>  
Trunk groups <trunk_id> and <trunk_id> can not share the same port  
CLI  
CLI  
CLI  
CLI  
CLI  
CLI  
CLI  
CLI  
CLI  
356 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
LOG_ERROR (continued)  
PORT_MIRR  
CLI  
Port Mirroring changes are not applied  
Broadcast address for IP interface <interface_id> is invalid  
CLI  
IP Interfaces <interface_id> and <interface_id> are on the same subnet  
Unapplied changes reverted  
MGMT  
MGMT  
CLI  
Unsaved changes reverted  
SNMP source trap interface <IF> is not enabled  
Password already taken  
CLI  
CLI  
Radius is already turned ON  
CLI  
Cannot ena/dis primary admin user  
CLI  
Cannot change primary admin COS  
CLI  
Cannot change primary admin username  
Cannot delete primary admin  
CLI  
CLI  
Error: Enabled user <user> has no username  
Error: Enabled user <user> has no password  
New combination of Bridge Timers for STG <group> is invalid  
Need maxage <= 2*(frwd-1) and maxage >= 2*(hello+1)  
Multiple VLAN members in non default STG <group>  
Duplicate VLAN members in STGs <gr1> and <gr2>  
CLI  
CLI  
CLI  
CLI  
CLI  
CLI  
VRRP hot-standby port (<port>) is part of a STG (<group>) with STP  
turned on  
CLI  
Error writing active config to FLASH!  
- Another save is in progress -OR-  
- Configuration is too large -OR-  
- Unknown error  
40M2420, April 2007  
Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 357  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
LOG_ERROR (continued)  
CLI  
A previous apply is being executed. Try later.  
RADIUS secret must be 1-<len> characters long  
Please configure primary RADIUS server address.  
TACACS+ secret must be 1-<len> characters long  
Please configure primary TACACS+ server address.  
Port Mirroring changes are not applied  
CLI  
CLI  
CLI  
CLI  
CLI  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
cfg_sync_tx_putsn: ABORTED  
Synchronization RX connection RESET.  
Synchronization RX connection TIMEOUT.  
Synchronization RX connection UNKNOWN CLOSE.  
Synchronization RX connection UNREACHABLE.  
Synchronization TX Error.  
Synchronization TX connection RESET.  
Synchronization TX connection TIMEOUT.  
Synchronization TX connection UNREACHABLE.  
Synchronization TX connection UNKNOWN CLOSE.  
Synchronization connection RCLOSE by peer.  
Synchronization connection Wait-For-Close Timeout.  
Synchronization connection Transmit Timeout.  
Synchronization Receive Timeout  
358 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
LOG_ERROR (continued)  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
Synchronization Receive UNKNOWN Timeout  
Sync receive in progress ... cannot start Sync  
Sync already in progress ... cannot start Sync  
Config Sync route find error.  
Config Sync tcp_open error.  
Config Synchronization Timeout - Resuming Console thread  
New configuration did not validate (rc=<code>)  
New configuration did not apply (rc=<code>)  
Sync config apply error.  
Attempting to redirect a previously redirected input  
Sync rx tcp open Error  
Sync Version/Password Failed-No Version/Password Line  
Sync Version Failed - peer:<host> config:<version>  
Sync Password Failed-Bad Password  
Sync of switches of different hardware types is not supported  
Synchronization connection RCLOSE before RX.  
Sync transmit already in progress ... cannot start Sync  
Sync receive in progress ... cannot start Sync  
Sync receive already in progress ... cannot start Sync receive  
Sync transmit in progress ... cannot start Sync receive  
40M2420, April 2007  
Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 359  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
LOG_ERROR (continued)  
VRRP  
VRRP  
Multiple static routes have same destination  
Virtual router <vr_id> must have sharing disabled when hotstandby is  
enabled  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
Virtual router group must be enabled when hotstandby is enabled  
At least one virtual router must be enabled when group is enabled  
Virtual router group must have sharing disabled when hotstandby is  
enabled  
VRRP  
Virtual router group must have pre-emption enabled when hotstandby is  
enabled  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
Virtual router <vr_id> must have an IP address  
Virtual router <vr_id> cannot have same VRID and VLAN as <vlan_id>  
Virtual router <vr_id> cannot have same IP address as <ip_address>  
Virtual router <vr_id> corresponding virtual server <server_id> is not  
enabled  
CLI  
CLI  
CLI  
CLI  
Duplicate default entry  
BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> must have an IP address  
BGP peers <bgp_peer_id> and <bgp_peer_id> have same address  
BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> have same address as IP interface  
<ip_interface_id>  
CLI  
BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> IP interface <ip_interface_id> is not enabled  
LOG_NOTICE  
SYSTEM  
SYSTEM  
SYSTEM  
SYSTEM  
SYSTEM  
MGMT  
Rebooted <last_reset_information>  
Rebooted <last_reset_information> administrator logged in  
Enable auto negotiation for copper GIG port: <port>  
Change fiber GIG port <port> mode to full duplex  
Change fiber GIG port <port> speed to 1000  
Boot config block changed  
MGMT  
Boot image changed  
MGMT  
Switch reset from CLI  
MGMT  
Syslog host changed to <ip_address>  
Syslog host changed to this host  
MGMT  
360 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
LOG_NOTICE (continued)  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
Second syslog host changed to <ip_address>  
Second syslog host changed to this host  
Next boot will use active config block  
User password changed  
Operator password changed  
Administrator password changed  
RADIUS server timeouts  
Failed login attempt via TELNET from host %s  
Failed login attempt via the CONSOLE  
PASSWORD FIX-UP MODE IN USE  
<login_level> login on Console  
" <login_level> <""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Console"  
" <login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout"">  
from"  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
Administrator logout from BBI  
<login_level> login from host <ip_address>  
System clock set to <time>  
PANIC command from CLI  
Switch reset scheduled at <time>  
Switch reset at <time> has been cancelled  
Scheduled switch reboot  
40M2420, April 2007  
Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 361  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
LOG_NOTICE (continued)  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
VLAN  
IP  
<mins> minutes until scheduled reboot  
Password for <user> changed by <user>, notifying admin to save.  
Temperature OK  
Default VLAN can not be deleted  
" default gateway <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled"">"  
Default gateway <ip_address> operational  
scp <login_level> login  
IP  
SSH  
SSH  
" scp <login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle time-  
out""|""logout"">"  
PORT_MIRR  
PORT_MIRR  
SYSTEM  
Port mirroring is enabled  
Port mirroring is disabled  
Management Port enabled/disabled state can only be controlled by Man-  
agement Module.  
SYSTEM  
Management Port can only be enabled/disabled by the Management  
Module  
SYSTEM  
SYSTEM  
SYSTEM  
SYSTEM  
SYSTEM  
SYSTEM  
SYSTEM  
SYSTEM  
Cannot change the Management IP Interface VLAN  
Cannot enable/disable the Management IP Interface  
Cannot enable/disable forwarding on Management IP Interface  
Cannot delete the Management IP Interface  
Management VLAN can not be disabled  
Default VLAN can not be deleted  
Management VLAN can not be deleted  
Management Port enabled/disabled state can only be controlled by  
Management Module.  
362 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
LOG_NOTICE (continued)  
SYSTEM  
Management Port can only be enabled/disabled by the Management  
Module  
SYSTEM  
SYSTEM  
SYSTEM  
SYSTEM  
SYSTEM  
SYSTEM  
SYSTEM  
SYSTEM  
SYSTEM  
VRRP  
Cannot change the Management IP Interface VLAN  
Cannot enable/disable the Management IP Interface  
Cannot enable/disable forwarding on Management IP Interface  
Cannot delete the Management IP Interface  
Management VLAN can not be disabled  
Default VLAN can not be deleted  
Management VLAN can not be deleted  
Rebooted <cause and time of reboot>  
Management Port cannot be configured as a Monitor Port.  
Virtual router <ip_address> is now master  
Virtual router <ip_address> is now backup  
Session established with <BGP_peer_ip_address>  
VRRP  
BGP  
LOG_INFO  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
New configuration applied  
New configuration saved  
Unsaved changes reverted  
Could not revert unsaved changes  
" <image1|image2> downloaded from host <ip_address>, file  
<file_name> <software_version>"  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
Serial EEPROM downloaded from host <ip_address> file <file_name>  
<login_level> login on Console  
" <login_level> <""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Console"  
<login_level> login from host <ip_address>  
" <login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout"">  
from Telnet/SSH."  
40M2420, April 2007  
Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 363  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
LOG_INFO (continued)  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
MGMT  
SSH  
Unsupported GBIC refused  
Flash Write Error. Failed to allocate buffer. Quitting  
Flash Write Error. Trying again  
Flash Write Error. Failed to allocate buffer. Quitting  
Flash Write Error  
FLASH ERROR - invalid address used  
scp <login_level> login  
SSH  
" scp <login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle time-  
out""|""logout"">"  
SSH  
Server key autogen starts  
SSH  
Server key autogen completes  
Server key autogen timer timeouts  
Synchronizing to <host> ...  
SSH  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
VRRP  
Config Synchronization Transmit Successful.  
New configuration validated  
New configuration applied  
New configuration did not save (rc=<code>)  
New configuration saved  
Restoring Current Config.  
Synchronizing from <host> ...  
Config Synchronization Receive Successful.  
364 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B  
Alteon OS SNMP Agent  
The Alteon OS SNMP agent supports SNMP version 3. Security is provided through SNMP  
community strings. The default community strings are “public” for SNMPGEToperation and  
“private” for SNMPSEToperation. The community string can be modified only through the  
Command Line Interface (CLI). Alteon WebSystems is registered as Vendor 1872. Detailed  
SNMP MIBs and trap definitions of the Alteon OS SNMP agent are contained in the following  
Alteon OS enterprise MIB document:  
GbESM-1G-2223.mib  
Users may specify up to two trap hosts for receiving SNMP Traps. The agent will send the  
SNMP Trap to the specified hosts when appropriate. Traps are not sent if there is no host spec-  
ified.  
Alteon OS SNMP agent supports the following standard MIBs:  
rfc1213.mib  
rfc1215.mib  
rfc1493.mib  
rfc1573.mib  
rfc1643.mib  
rfc1757.mib  
rfc1907.mib  
rfc2037.mib  
rfc2571 .mib  
rfc2572.mib  
rfc2573.mib  
rfc2574.mib  
rfc2575.mib  
rfc2576.mib  
40M2420, April 2007  
365  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Alteon OS SNMP agent supports the following generic traps as defined in RFC 1215:  
ColdStart  
WarmStart  
LinkDown  
LinkUp  
AuthenticationFailure  
The SNMP agent also supports two Spanning Tree traps as defined in RFC 1493:  
NewRoot  
TopologyChange  
The following are the enterprise SNMP traps supported in Alteon OS:  
Table 9-10 Alteon OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps  
Trap Name  
Description  
altSwPrimaryPowerSupplyFailure Signifies that the primary power supply failed.  
altSwFanFailure  
Signifies that the fan has failed.  
altSwDefGwUp  
Signifies that the default gateway is alive.  
Signifies that the default gateway is down.  
Signifies that the default gateway is up and in service  
altSwDefGwDown  
altSwDefGwInService  
altSwDefGwNotInService  
Signifies that the default gateway is alive but not in  
service  
The newMaster trap indicates that the sending agent has tran-  
sitioned to 'Master' state.  
altSwVrrpNewMaster  
altSwVrrpNewBackup  
altSwVrrpAuthFailure  
The newBackup trap indicates that the sending agent has  
transitioned to 'Backup' state.  
A vrrpAuthFailure trap signifies that a packet has been  
received from a router whose authentication key or authenti-  
cation type conflicts with this router's authentication key or  
authentication type. Implementation of this trap is optional.  
A altSwLoginFailure trap signifies that someone failed to  
enter a valid username/password combination.  
altSwLoginFailure  
366 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Table 9-10 Alteon OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps  
Trap Name  
Description  
A altSwTcpHoldDown trap signifies that new TCP connec-  
tion requests from a particular client will be blocked for a  
pre-determined amount of time since the rate of new TCP  
connections from that client has reached a pre-determined  
threshold.  
altSwTcpHoldDown  
A altSwTempExceedThreshold trap signifies that the switch  
temperature has exceeded maximum safety limits.  
altSwTempExceedThreshold  
40M2420, April 2007  
Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 367  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Working with Switch Images and  
Configuration Files  
This section describes how to use MIB calls to work with switch images and configuration  
files. You can use a standard SNMP tool to perform the actions, using the MIBs listed in  
Table 9-11.  
The examples in this section use the MIB name, but you can also use the OID.  
Table 9-11 lists the MIBS used to perform operations associated with the GbESM Switch  
Image and Configuration files. These MIBS are contained within in the file “aosswitch.mib”  
Table 9-11 MIBs for Switch Image and Configuration Files  
MIB Name  
MIB OID  
agTftpServer  
1.3.6.1.4.1872.2.5.1.1.7.1.0  
1.3.6.1.4.1872.2.5.1.1.7.2.0  
1.3.6.1.4.1872.2.5.1.1.7.3.0  
1.3.6.1.4.1872.2.5.1.1.7.4.0  
1.3.6.1.4.1872.2.5.1.1.7.5.0  
1.3.6.1.4.1872.2.5.1.1.7.6.0  
1.3.6.1.4.1872.2.5.1.1.7.7.0  
1.3.6.1.4.1872.2.5.1.1.7.9.0  
1.3.6.1.4.1.1872.2.5.1.1.7.10.0  
1.3.6.1.4.1.1872.2.5.1.1.7.11.0  
agTftpImage  
agTftpImageFileName  
agTftpCfgFileName  
agTftpDumpFileName  
agTftpAction  
agTftpLastActionStatus  
agTftpUserName  
agTftpPassword  
agTftpTSDumpFileName  
The following SNMP actions can be performed using the MIBs listed in Table 9-11.  
Load a new Switch image (boot or running) from a FTP/TFTP server  
Load a previously saved switch configuration from a FTP/TFTP server  
Save the switch configuration to a FTP/TFTP server  
Save a switch dump to a FTP/TFTP server  
368 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Loading a new switch image  
To load a new switch image with the name “MyNewImage-1.img” into image2, follow the  
steps below. This example assumes you have a FTP/TFTP server at 192.168.10.10.  
1. Set the FTP/TFTP server address where the switch image resides:  
Set agTftpServer.0 “192.168.10.10”  
2. Set the area where the new image will be loaded:  
Set agTftpImage.0 “image2”  
3. Set the name of the image:  
Set agTftpImageFileName.0 “MyNewImage-1.img”  
4. Initiate the transfer. To transfer a switch image, enter 2 (gtimg):  
Set agTftpAction.0 “2”  
5. If you are using an FTP server, enter a username:  
Set agTftpUserName.0 “MyName”  
6. If you are using an FTP server, enter a password:  
Set agTftpPassword.0 “MyPassword”  
40M2420, April 2007  
Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 369  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Loading a saved switch configuration  
To load a saved switch configuration with the name “MyRunningConfig.cfg” into the switch,  
follow the steps below. This example assumes you have a TFTP server at 192.168.10.10.  
1. Set the FTP/TFTP server address where the switch Configuration File resides:  
Set agTftpServer.0 “192.168.10.10”  
2. Set the name of the configuration file:  
Set agTftpCfgFileName.0 “MyRunningConfig.cfg”  
3. Initiate the transfer. To restore a running configuration, enter 3:  
Set agTftpAction.0 “3”  
4. If you are using an FTP server, enter a username:  
Set agTftpUserName.0 “MyName”  
5. If you are using an FTP server, enter a password:  
Set agTftpPassword.0 “MyPassword”  
Saving the switch configuration  
To save the switch configuration to a FTP/TFTP server follow the steps below. This example  
assumes you have a FTP/TFTP server at 192.168.10.10.  
1. Set the FTP/TFTP server address where the configuration file is saved:  
Set agTftpServer.0 “192.168.10.10”  
2. Set the name of the configuration file:  
Set agTftpCfgFileName.0 “MyRunningConfig.cfg”  
3. Initiate the transfer. To save a running configuration file, enter 4:  
Set agTftpAction.0 “4”  
4. If you are using an FTP server, enter a username:  
Set agTftpUserName.0 “MyName”  
5. If you are using an FTP server, enter a password:  
Set agTftpPassword.0 “MyPassword”  
370 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Saving a switch dump  
To save a switch dump to a FTP/TFTP server, follow the steps below. This example assumes  
you have a FTP/TFTP server at 192.168.10.10.  
1. Set the FTP/TFTP server address where the configuration will be saved:  
Set agTftpServer.0 “192.168.10.10”  
2. Set the name of dump file:  
Set agTftpDumpFileName.0 “MyDumpFile.dmp”  
3. Initiate the transfer. To save a dump file, enter 5:  
Set agTftpAction.0 “5”  
4. If you are using an FTP server, enter a username:  
Set agTftpUserName.0 “MyName”  
5. If you are using an FTP server, enter a password:  
Set agTftpPassword.0 “MyPassword”  
40M2420, April 2007  
Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 371  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Alteon OS Command Reference  
372 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
DIP (Destination IP  
Address)  
The destination IP address of a frame.  
Dport (Destination  
Port)  
The destination port (application socket: for example, http-80/https-443/DNS-53)  
NAT (Network Address Any time an IP address is changed from one source IP or destination IP address to another  
Translation)  
address, network address translation can be said to have taken place. In general, half NAT  
is when the destination IP or source IP address is changed from one address to another.  
Full NAT is when both addresses are changed from one address to another. No NAT is  
when neither source nor destination IP addresses are translated.  
Preemption  
Priority  
In VRRP, preemption will cause a Virtual Router that has a lower priority to go into  
backup should a peer Virtual Router start advertising with a higher priority.  
In VRRP, the value given to a Virtual Router to determine its ranking with its peer(s). Min-  
imum value is 1 and maximum value is 254. Default is 100. A higher number will win out  
for master designation.  
Proto (Protocol)  
The protocol of a frame. Can be any value represented by a 8-bit value in the IP header  
adherent to the IP specification (for example, TCP, UDP, OSPF, ICMP, and so on.)  
SIP (Source IP Address) The source IP address of a frame.  
SPort (Source Port)  
Tracking  
The source port (application socket: for example, HTTP-80/HTTPS-443/DNS-53).  
In VRRP, a method to increase the priority of a virtual router and thus master designation  
(with preemption enabled). Tracking can be very valuable in an active/active configuration.  
You can track the following:  
ifs: Active IP interfaces on the GbE Switch Module (increments priority by 2 for  
each)  
ports: Active ports on the same VLAN (increments priority by 2 for each)  
vrs: Number of virtual routers in master mode on the switch  
40M2420, April 2007  
373  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
VIR (Virtual Interface  
Router)  
A VRRP address that is an IP interface address shared between two or more virtual routers.  
Virtual Router  
A shared address between two devices utilizing VRRP, as defined in RFC 2338. One vir-  
tual router is associated with an IP interface. This is one of the IP interfaces that the switch  
is assigned. All IP interfaces on the GbE Switch Module must be in a VLAN. If there is  
more than one VLAN defined on the GbE Switch Module, then the VRRP broadcasts will  
only be sent out on the VLAN of which the associated IP interface is a member.  
VRID (Virtual Router  
Identifier)  
In VRRP, a value between 1 and 1024 that is used by each virtual router to create its MAC  
address and identify its peer for which it is sharing this VRRP address. The standard  
VRRP MAC address as defined in the RFC is 00-00-5E-00-01-{VRID}. For virtual rout-  
ers with a VRID greater than 255, the following block of MAC addresses is allocated:  
00:0F:6A:9A:40:00 - 00:0F:6A:9A:47:FF  
If you have a VRRP address shared between two switches, then the VRID must be identi-  
cal on both switches so each virtual router on each switch knows with whom to share.  
VRRP (Virtual Router  
A protocol that acts very similarly to Cisco's proprietary HSRP address sharing protocol.  
Redundancy Protocol) The reason for both of these protocols is so devices have a next hop or default gateway that  
is always available. Two or more devices sharing an IP interface are either advertising or  
listening for advertisements. These advertisements are sent via a broadcast message to an  
address such as 224.0.0.18.  
With VRRP, one switch is considered the master and the other the backup. The master is  
always advertising via the broadcasts. The backup switch is always listening for the broad-  
casts. Should the master stop advertising, the backup will take over ownership of the  
VRRP IP and MAC addresses as defined by the specification. The switch announces this  
change in ownership to the devices around it by way of a Gratuitous ARP, and advertise-  
ments. If the backup switch didn't do the Gratuitous ARP the Layer 2 devices attached to  
the switch would not know that the MAC address had moved in the network. For a more  
detailed description, refer to RFC 2338.  
374 Glossary  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
autonomous system filter path  
Symbols  
action ........................................................265  
as ..............................................................265  
aspath ........................................................265  
/ command.......................................................... 50  
[ ]....................................................................... 16  
A
B
abbreviating commands (CLI) .............................. 54  
access control  
backup configuration block.........................173, 336  
banner (system option) .......................................176  
BBI ....................................................................19  
BGP  
user........................................................... 204  
ACL Port menu................................................. 211  
ACL statistics ........................................... 160, 161  
active configuration block .......................... 173, 336  
active IP interface.............................................. 304  
active port  
configuration ..............................................279  
eBGP.........................................................279  
filters, aggregation configuration...................284  
iBGP .........................................................279  
in route ......................................................282  
IP address, border router ..............................281  
IP route tag...................................................97  
keep-alive time ...........................................281  
peer...........................................................279  
peer configuration .......................................281  
redistribution configuration ..........................283  
remote autonomous system...........................281  
router hops .................................................282  
BLOCKING (port state) .......................................84  
boot options menu .............................................329  
bootstrap protocol..............................................296  
Border Gateway Protocol .....................................97  
configuration ..............................................279  
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP)  
VLAN....................................................... 304  
active switch configuration  
gtcfg ......................................................... 321  
ptcfg ......................................................... 321  
restoring .................................................... 321  
active switch, saving and loading configuration.... 321  
addr  
IP route tag .................................................. 97  
administrator account..................................... 27, 32  
admpw (system option)...................................... 204  
aging  
STP bridge option....................................... 234  
STP information ..................................... 83, 86  
apply (global command)..................................... 172  
applying configuration changes........................... 172  
autoconfiguration  
operations-level options ...............................328  
BPDU. See Bridge Protocol Data Unit.  
link ............................................................. 37  
auto-negotiation  
enable/disable on port.................................. 210  
setup ........................................................... 37  
autonomous system filter action.......................... 265  
bridge parameter menu, for STP..........................231  
bridge priority ...............................................83, 89  
Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU) .................83, 89  
STP transmission frequency .........................233  
Bridge Spanning-Tree parameters .......................233  
40M2420, April 2007  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Alteon OS Command Reference  
broadcast  
configuration  
802.1x ....................................................... 219  
IP route tag ...................................................97  
IP route type .................................................96  
Browser-Based Interface.......................................19  
administrator password................................ 204  
apply changes............................................. 172  
CIST ......................................................... 227  
default gateway interval, for health checks ..... 255  
default gateway IP address ........................... 255  
dump command.......................................... 320  
failover...................................................... 244  
flow control................................................ 210  
Gigabit Ethernet.......................................... 208  
IGMP........................................................ 285  
IP static route ..................................... 256, 257  
LDAP........................................................ 184  
operating mode........................................... 210  
port link speed............................................ 210  
port mirroring............................................. 318  
port trunking .............................................. 239  
RIP ........................................................... 266  
save changes .............................................. 173  
setup ......................................................... 320  
setup command........................................... 320  
SNMP ....................................................... 188  
switch IP address ........................................ 254  
TACACS+................................................. 181  
user password............................................. 204  
view changes.............................................. 172  
VLAN default (PVID)................................. 208  
VLAN IP interface...................................... 254  
VLAN tagging............................................ 208  
VRRP........................................................ 297  
C
capture dump information to a file .......................349  
Cisco Ether Channel...........................................239  
CIST information.................................................88  
clear  
ARP entries ................................................345  
dump information........................................350  
FDB entry...................................................343  
routing table................................................346  
command (help)...................................................50  
Command-Line Interface (CLI) ....... 19 to 29, 32, 47  
commands  
abbreviations.................................................54  
conventions used in this manual ......................16  
global commands...........................................50  
shortcuts.......................................................54  
stacking........................................................54  
tab completion...............................................54  
configuration block  
active ........................................................ 336  
backup....................................................... 336  
factory....................................................... 336  
selection .................................................... 336  
configuration menu............................................ 169  
configuring routing information protocol ............. 267  
connecting  
via console................................................... 20  
console port  
connecting ................................................... 20  
COS queue information...................................... 114  
cost  
STP information ............................... 84, 86, 89  
STP port option .......................................... 235  
CPU statistics.................................................... 159  
CPU utilization.................................................. 159  
cur (system option)............................ 180, 187, 202  
2 Index  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
forwarding database (FDB).................................339  
Forwarding Database Information Menu................76  
Forwarding Database Menu ................................343  
forwarding state (FWD) .....................77, 83, 89, 91  
fwd (STP bridge option).....................................234  
FwdDel (forward delay), bridge port..........83, 86, 89  
D
date  
setup ........................................................... 35  
system option ............................................. 175  
daylight savings time ......................................... 186  
debugging......................................................... 339  
default gateway  
G
information .................................................. 94  
interval, for health checks ............................ 255  
default password ................................................. 27  
designated port.................................................... 99  
diff (global) command, viewing changes ............. 172  
direct (IP route type)............................................ 96  
directed broadcasts ............................................ 260  
DISABLED (port state)........................................ 84  
disconnect idle timeout ........................................ 29  
DNS statistics ................................................... 142  
downloading software........................................ 331  
dump  
configuration command............................... 320  
maintenance............................................... 339  
state information......................................... 351  
duplex mode  
link status ............................................ 56, 116  
dynamic routes.................................................. 346  
GEA Port mapping ............................................118  
gig (Port Menu option).......................................208  
Gigabit Ethernet  
configuration ..............................................208  
Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link............................208  
global commands.................................................50  
Greenwich ........................................................186  
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)............................186  
gtcfg (TFTP load command)...............................321  
H
health checks  
default gateway interval, retries.....................255  
retry, number of failed health checks .............255  
hello  
STP information ...............................83, 86, 89  
help ....................................................................50  
hot-standby failover ...........................................302  
hprompt  
E
End-to-End flow control..................................... 175  
EtherChannel  
system option .............................................176  
HTTPS .............................................................207  
as used with port trunking............................ 239  
I
F
ICMP statistics ..................................................142  
idle timeout  
overview......................................................29  
IEEE 802.1s........................................................85  
IEEE 802.1w.......................................................85  
IEEE standards  
802.1d .................................................83, 231  
802.1s........................................................225  
802.1w.......................................................225  
802.1x .........................................................80  
IGMP Snooping.................................................286  
IGMP statistics..................................................148  
image  
downloading...............................................331  
software, selecting.......................................334  
indirect (IP route type) .........................................96  
factory configuration block................................. 336  
factory default configuration..................... 28, 32, 33  
failover  
configuration.............................................. 244  
FDB statistics.................................................... 135  
Final Steps.......................................................... 41  
first-time configuration ......................... 28, 31 to 46  
fixed  
IP route tag .................................................. 97  
flag field............................................................. 99  
flow control ................................................ 56, 116  
configuring ................................................ 210  
setup ........................................................... 36  
forwarding configuration  
IP forwarding configuration ......................... 260  
40M2420, April 2007  
Index 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Information  
Link Status Information ..................................... 116  
linkt (SNMP option) .......................................... 189  
LISTENING (port state)....................................... 84  
lmask (routing option).......................................... 94  
lnet (routing option)............................................. 94  
local (IP route type) ............................................. 96  
log  
IGMP Information.......................................109  
IGMP Multicast Router Information ..............110  
Trunk Group Information ...............................91  
information  
802.1p........................................................113  
Information Menu ................................................55  
Ingress Back Pressure (IBP) flow control .............176  
Interface change stats..........................................153  
IP address............................................................39  
ARP information ...........................................98  
configuring default gateway..........................255  
IP interface ...................................................39  
IP configuration via setup .....................................39  
IP forwarding  
directed broadcasts ......................................260  
IP forwarding information.....................................94  
IP Information ...................................................108  
IP Information Menu ............................................94  
IP interface........................................................254  
active .........................................................304  
configuring address......................................254  
configuring VLANs .....................................254  
IP interfaces...................................................39, 96  
information...................................................94  
IP route tag ...................................................97  
priority increment value (ifs) for VRRP..........306  
IP network filter configuration.............................261  
IP Route Manipulation Menu ..............................346  
IP routing ............................................................39  
tag parameters...............................................97  
IP Static Route Menu..................................256, 257  
IP statistics ........................................................139  
IP subnet mask.....................................................39  
IP switch processor statistics ...............................137  
syslog messages.......................................... 177  
M
MAC (media access control) address.. 58, 70, 76, 98,  
343  
Main Menu ......................................................... 48  
Command-Line Interface (CLI) ...................... 28  
summary...................................................... 49  
Maintenance  
IGMP........................................................ 347  
IGMP Groups............................................. 347  
IGMP Multicast Routers.............................. 348  
Maintenance Menu ............................................ 339  
management module............................................ 20  
Management Processor (MP).............................. 344  
display MAC address .............................. 58, 70  
manual style conventions ..................................... 16  
martian  
IP route tag (filtered) ..................................... 97  
IP route type (filtered out) .............................. 96  
mask  
IP interface subnet address ........................... 254  
mation ................................................................ 91  
MaxAge (STP information) ...................... 83, 86, 89  
MD5 cryptographic authentication ...................... 271  
MD5 key .......................................................... 274  
media access control. See MAC address.  
meter  
ACL.......................................................... 212  
Miscellaneous Debug Menu ............................... 344  
monitor port...................................................... 318  
mp  
packet........................................................ 157  
MP. See Management Processor.  
L
LACP ...............................................................242  
Layer 2 Menu ......................................................74  
Layer 3 Menu ......................................................93  
LEARNING (port state)............................83, 84, 89  
link  
multicast  
speed, configuring .......................................210  
Link Aggregation Control Protocol......................242  
link status............................................................56  
command....................................................116  
duplex mode .........................................56, 116  
port speed.............................................56, 116  
IP route type................................................. 96  
Multiple Spanning Tree  
configuration.............................................. 225  
mxage (STP bridge option)................................. 233  
4 Index  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
275  
N
host entry configuration ...............................276  
host routes..................................................269  
interface.....................................................269  
interface configuration.................................273  
link state database .......................................269  
Not-So-Stubby Area....................................271  
priority value of the switch interface..............273  
range number..............................................269  
redistribution menu .....................................269  
route redistribution configuration ..................277  
spf, shortest path first...................................271  
stub area ....................................................271  
summary range configuration .......................272  
transit area..................................................271  
transit delay................................................274  
type...........................................................271  
virtual link..................................................269  
virtual link configuration..............................275  
virtual neighbor, router ID............................275  
OSPF Database Information ...............................104  
OSPF general ....................................................102  
OSPF General Information .................................103  
OSPF Information..............................................102  
OSPF Information Route Codes ..........................106  
OSPF statistics ..................................................149  
nbr change statistics........................................... 152  
network management........................................... 19  
notice ............................................................... 175  
NTP server menu............................................... 186  
NTP synchronization ......................................... 186  
NTP time zone .................................................. 186  
O
online help.......................................................... 50  
operating mode, configuring............................... 210  
operations menu................................................ 323  
operations-level BGP options ............................. 328  
operations-level IP options ................................. 328  
Operations-Level Port Options.................... 325, 326  
operations-level VRRP options........................... 327  
ospf  
area index .......................................... 269, 271  
authentication key....................................... 274  
configuration.............................................. 269  
cost of the selected path............................... 273  
cost value of the host................................... 276  
dead, declaring a silent router to be down....... 274  
dead, health parameter of a hello packet......... 275  
export........................................................ 277  
fixed routes ................................................ 279  
general ...................................................... 150  
global........................................................ 150  
hello, authentication parameter of a hello packet...  
P
panic  
command ...................................................351  
switch (and Maintenance Menu option)..........340  
parameters  
tag...............................................................97  
type.............................................................96  
Password  
user access control.......................................204  
password  
administrator account.....................................27  
default .........................................................27  
user account .................................................27  
VRRP authentication...................................305  
passwords ...........................................................27  
ping....................................................................51  
poisoned reverse, as used with split horizon .........267  
port configuration ..............................................208  
port flow control. See flow control.  
40M2420, April 2007  
Index 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
Port Menu  
reboot....................................................... 340, 351  
receive flow control ..................................... 36, 210  
reference ports..................................................... 77  
referenced port .................................................... 99  
re-mark............................................................. 213  
restarting switch setup.......................................... 34  
retries  
radius server............................................... 179  
retry  
health checks for default gateway.................. 255  
rip  
IP route tag .................................................. 97  
RIP Information ................................................ 107  
RIP information................................................. 107  
RIP. See Routing Information Protocol.  
route statistics ................................................... 141  
router hops........................................................ 282  
routing information protocol  
configuration.............................................. 267  
Routing Information Protocol (RIP) ...................... 97  
options ...................................................... 267  
poisoned reverse ......................................... 267  
split horizon ............................................... 267  
version 1 parameters............................ 266, 267  
RSTP information................................................ 85  
rx flow control .................................................... 36  
Rx/Tx statistics.................................................. 151  
configuration options ...................................208  
configuring Gigabit Ethernet (gig) .................208  
port mirroring  
configuration...............................................318  
Port number.......................................................116  
port speed....................................................56, 116  
port states  
UNK (unknown) ...........................................77  
port trunking  
description..................................................239  
port trunking configuration..................................239  
ports  
configuration.................................................36  
disabling (temporarily).................................211  
information.................................................117  
IP status........................................................94  
membership of the VLAN ........................75, 92  
priority...................................................83, 89  
STP port priority..........................................235  
VLAN ID .............................................57, 117  
preemption  
assuming VRRP master routing authority .......301  
virtual router .......................................300, 303  
priority  
virtual router ...............................................303  
priority (STP port option)....................................235  
prisrv  
primary radius server ...................................179  
Private VLAN....................................................251  
ptcfg (TFTP save command) ...............................321  
PVID (port VLAN ID)..................................57, 117  
PVLAN.............................................................249  
pwd ....................................................................51  
S
save (global command) ...................................... 173  
noback option............................................. 173  
save command................................................... 336  
secret  
radius server............................................... 179  
secsrv  
secondary radius server................................ 179  
Secure Shell...................................................... 178  
setup  
Q
quiet (screen display option)..................................51  
configuration.............................................. 320  
setup command, configuration ............................ 320  
R
RADIUS server menu.........................................179  
read community string (SNMP option).................189  
6 Index  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
setup facility ................................................. 28, 31  
IP configuration............................................ 39  
IP subnet mask ............................................. 39  
port auto-negotiation mode ............................ 37  
port configuration ......................................... 36  
port flow control........................................... 36  
restarting ..................................................... 34  
Spanning-Tree Protocol................................. 36  
starting ........................................................ 32  
stopping....................................................... 34  
system date .................................................. 35  
system time.................................................. 35  
VLAN name ................................................ 38  
VLAN tagging ............................................. 37  
VLANs ....................................................... 38  
shortcuts (CLI).................................................... 54  
snap traces  
buffer ........................................................ 344  
SNMP ........................................................ 19, 122  
menu options.............................................. 189  
set and get access........................................ 189  
SNMP Agent .................................................... 365  
SNMP statistics................................................. 162  
SNMPv3 .......................................................... 190  
software  
statistics  
management processor.................................156  
Statistics Menu..................................................121  
stopping switch setup ...........................................34  
subnet address maskconfiguration  
IP subnet address ........................................254  
subnet mask ........................................................39  
subnets ...............................................................39  
IP interface.................................................254  
switch  
name and location ...................................58, 70  
resetting.....................................................337  
syslog  
system host log configuration .......................177  
system  
contact (SNMP option) ................................189  
date and time ..........................................58, 70  
information ..................................................70  
location (SNMP option)...............................189  
System Information..............................................58  
System Maintenance Menu.................................342  
system options  
admpw (administrator password)...................204  
cur (current system parameters).....180, 187, 202  
date ...........................................................175  
hprompt .....................................................176  
login banner ...............................................176  
time...........................................................175  
tnport.........................................................202  
usrpw (user password) .................................204  
wport.........................................................201  
system parameters, current..................180, 187, 202  
image ........................................................ 331  
image file and version ............................. 58, 71  
spanning tree  
configuration.............................................. 231  
Spanning-Tree Protocol ....................................... 91  
bridge aging option ..................................... 234  
bridge parameters ....................................... 233  
bridge priority ........................................ 83, 89  
port cost option........................................... 235  
port priority option...................................... 235  
root bridge ..................................... 83, 89, 233  
setup (on/off)................................................ 36  
switch reset effect ....................................... 337  
split horizon...................................................... 267  
stacking commands (CLI) .................................... 54  
starting switch setup ............................................ 32  
state (STP information)............................ 84, 86, 90  
static  
T
tab completion (CLI)............................................54  
tacacs ...............................................................181  
TACACS+........................................................181  
TCP..................................................................138  
TCP statistics ............................................145, 158  
Telnet  
configuring switches using ...........................320  
Telnet support  
optional setup for Telnet support .....................42  
text conventions...................................................16  
TFTP................................................................333  
PUT and GET commands ............................321  
TFTP server ......................................................321  
thash.................................................................240  
IP route tag .................................................. 97  
static route  
rem ........................................................... 256  
statis route  
add............................................................ 256  
40M2420, April 2007  
Index 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alteon OS Command Reference  
time  
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)  
authentication parameters for IP interfaces ..... 305  
group options (prio)..................................... 303  
operations-level options ............................... 327  
password, authentication.............................. 305  
priority election for the virtual router............. 300  
priority tracking options....................... 281, 301  
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol configuration297  
virtual routers  
setup ............................................................35  
system option..............................................175  
timeout  
radius server ...............................................180  
timeouts  
idle connection..............................................29  
timers kickoff ....................................................153  
tnport  
system option..............................................202  
trace buffer........................................................344  
traceroute ............................................................51  
Tracking  
VRRP ........................................................299  
transmit flow control ....................................36, 210  
Trunk Group Information......................................91  
trunk hash algorithm...........................................240  
tx flow control .....................................................36  
type of area  
ospf ...........................................................271  
type parameters....................................................96  
typographic conventions, manual...........................16  
tzone.................................................................186  
increasing priority level of............................ 301  
master preemption (preem)........................... 303  
master preemption (prio).............................. 300  
priority increment values (vrs) for VRRP....... 306  
VLAN  
active port.................................................. 304  
configuration.............................................. 247  
VLAN tagging  
port configuration ....................................... 208  
port restrictions........................................... 248  
setup ........................................................... 37  
VLANs............................................................... 39  
ARP entry information .................................. 98  
information .................................................. 92  
interface....................................................... 40  
name ..................................................... 75, 92  
name setup................................................... 38  
port membership..................................... 75, 92  
setting default number (PVID)...................... 208  
setup ........................................................... 38  
tagging .................................. 37, 57, 117, 248  
VLAN Number............................................. 92  
VRID (virtual router ID) ............................ 299, 302  
VRRP  
U
UCB statistics....................................................158  
UDP .................................................................138  
UDP statistics ....................................................147  
unknown (UNK) port state....................................77  
Unscheduled System Dump.................................351  
upgrade, switch software.....................................331  
user access control configuration .........................204  
user account.........................................................27  
usrpw (system option).........................................204  
Uuencode Flash Dump........................................349  
interface configuration................................. 305  
master advertisements.................................. 300  
tracking ..................................................... 299  
tracking configuration.................................. 306  
VRRP Information............................................. 112  
VRRP master advertisements  
V
verbose ...............................................................51  
virtual router  
description..................................................299  
priority.......................................................303  
tracking criteria ...........................................301  
virtual router group  
VRRP priority tracking.................................302  
virtual router group configuration ........................302  
virtual router group priority tracking ....................304  
time interval............................................... 303  
VRRP statistics ................................................. 154  
W
watchdog timer.................................................. 340  
weights  
setting virtual router priority values ............... 306  
wport................................................................ 201  
write community string (SNMP option) ............... 189  
8 Index  
40M2420, April 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Miele Freezer 09 169 330 User Manual
Miele Microwave Oven 09 924 540 User Manual
Nady Systems Speaker System PFW12 User Manual
NEC Computer Drive N8103 89 User Manual
Nokia Cell Phone 2626 User Manual
Nokia Headphones HS 6 User Manual
NordicTrack Treadmill NTTL11992 User Manual
NordicTrack Treadmill NTTL25900 User Manual
NuTone Door LA 205WH User Manual
Panasonic Car Video System CQE15EUC User Manual